Important information, Table of contents SIMATIC ET 200S Motor starters Fail-Safe Motor Starters Safety-Integrated Systems Manual Product overview 1 Brief instructions 2 Installation 3 Commissioning and diagnostics 4 General technical specifications 5 Terminal modules 6 Power modules 7 Direct and soft starters Fail-safe direct starter 8 Reversing starters Fail-safe reversing starter 9 Functions 10 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution 11 Expansion modules 12 Fail-safe modules 13 Appendix Edition 06/2015 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3ZX1012-0RK13-0AC0 Data formats and data records A Order numbers B Dimensioned drawings C Applications D Glossary, Index Safety guidelines This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. The information regarding your personal safety is indicated by a warning triangle, while information regarding only property damage does not have a warning triangle. According to the warning level, the warnings are shown in decreasing order as follows: Danger Indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning Indicates that death or severe personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution With a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution Without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Attention Indicates that an undesired result or state can occur if the corresponding notice is not observed. If multiple warning levels occur, the warning for the highest level is always used. If a warning triangle indicating an injury hazard is shown in a warning message, a warning indicating property damage can also be included in the same warning message. Qualified personnel The product/system belonging to this documentation must only be used for the relevant task by qualified personnel observing the relevant documentation for the corresponding task, in particular the safety and warning information included. Thanks to their training and experience, qualified personnel are able to recognize hazards when using these products/systems and avoid possible dangers. Correct usage of SIEMENS products Note the following: Warning Siemens products must only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical documentation. If third party products and components are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. The correct and safe operation of the products requires correct transportation, correct storage, setup, assembly, installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance. The permissible ambient conditions must be observed. Information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names marked with the trademark symbol (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Some other designations used in these documents are also brands; the owner's rights may be violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes. Copyright Siemens AG 2005 All rights reserved Disclaimer of liability The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. We have checked this manual to ensure that its contents are correct and applicable in relation to the hardware and software it describes. Despite all our endeavors, however, discrepancies cannot be wholly excluded and so we cannot guarantee complete correctness and applicability. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Technical Assistance: Telephone: Fax: Email: Website: Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 4848 90026 Nurnberg GERMANY Siemens Aktiengesellschaft +49 (0) 911-895-5900 (8.00 am - 5.00 pm CET) +49 (0) 911-895-5907 technical-assistance@siemens.com www.siemens.com/sirius/technical-assistance SIEMENS AG Technical Assistance Breslauer Str. 5 D-90766 Furth (c) Siemens AG 2005 Technical data subject to change without notice. Important information Purpose of the manual This manual is an addition to the following manuals: * * * * * * * * ET 200S Distributed I/O Device IM 151/CPU Interface Module ET 200S Process-Related Functions ET 200S Positioning ET 200S Serial Interface Module Distributed I/O System ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules Safety Engineering in SIMATIC S7, System Description S7 Distributed Safety Configuration and Programming This manual describes all the functions of the ET 200S motor starters. The manual does not deal with general ET 200S functions. You can find descriptions of these in the SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O Device manual. Target group This manual describes the hardware of the ET 200S motor starters and failsafe motor starters and the safety-integrated system. It is aimed at configuration engineers, commissioning engineers and maintenance personnel. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 i Manuals The following list provides a table of contents of the manuals (also see Section B.6): Distributed I/O System ET 200S in Internet only * * * * * * * * * * * ii Automation Systems S7-300, Operations list in Internet only Installing and wiring the * IM 151-7 CPU ET 200S Commissioning and diagnostics of the ET 200S ET 200S distributed I/O system, fail-safe technology PM-D F PROFIsafe module Technical data from IM 151-1, digital and analog electronic modules Order numbers for ET 200S Positioning Process-Related Functions ET 200S ET 200S in Internet only in Internet only 1STEP 5V/204 kHZ 1POS INC/Digital 1POS SSI/Digital 1POS INC/Analog 1POS SSI/Analog * * * * 1COUNT 24V/100kHz 1COUNT 5V/500kHz 1SSI 2PULSE IM 151-7 CPU Interface Module in Internet only * * * * Addressing of IM 151-7 CPU ET 200S with IM 151-7 CPU in a PROFIBUS network Commissioning and diagnostics of the IM 151-7 CPU Technical data for the IM 1517 CPU Serial interface module ET 200S in Internet only * * 1SI 3964/ASCII 1SI MODBUS/USS SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Note The fail-safe modules are described in the "ET 200S Distributed I/O Device for Fail-Safe Modules" manual. This and additional manuals for fail-safe systems can be downloaded on the Internet. Scope of validity This manual is valid for ET 200S motor starters. It contains a description of the components that were valid at the time the manual was published. We reserve the right to enclose a product information document containing upto-date information about new components and new versions of components. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 iii Approvals The product series in the ET 200S distributed I/O device - motor starters, fail-safe motor starters, and safety-integrated system corresponds to the following regulations: * * * * EC Directive 2006/95/EC on low voltage EC Directive 2004/108/EC on electromagnetic compatibility Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: UL 508 registered (Industrial Control Equipment) Canadian Standards Association: CSA C22.2 Number 142, tested (Process Control Equipment) Standards, certificates and approvals The ET 200S distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61158/EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. The ET 200S distributed I/O device fulfills the requirements and criteria of IEC 61131, Part 2 and the requirements for obtaining the CE marking. ET 200S has CSA and UL approval. You will find detailed information on the relevant standards, certificates, and approvals in the SIMATIC manual ET 200S Distributed I/O System. Disclaimer of liability The products described in this manual were developed to discharge safetyoriented functions as part of a higher-order system or machine. A complete safety system generally comprises sensors, analyzers, signaling devices and concepts for safe shutdowns. The manufacturer of the system or machine is responsible for ensuring correct overall functioning. Siemens AG, its subsidiaries and its affiliated companies (hereinafter designated "Siemens") are not in a position to guarantee all features of an overall system or machine not designed by Siemens. Siemens also refuses to accept liability for recommendations, express or implicit, in the subsequent description. No warranty, guarantee or liability claims above and beyond the General Terms and Conditions of Supply and Sale of Siemens can be derived from the subsequent description. Installation notes Measures to be observed for improving immunity to conducted radio-frequency emissions: * Spatial separation of sensitive electrical circuit from sources of interference * Use of transposed conductors * Maintaining a sufficient distance between interference from emitting conductors and conductors in sensitive electrical circuits * Aligning cables and lines as close to 90 as possible at crossovers * Using the thickest possible conductor routing at groundplane * Use of electrostatic / electromagnetic shields iv SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Position in the information landscape As well as this manual, you will need the manual for the DP master you are using. Note A guide to the contents of the SIMATIC ET 200S manuals can be found in Section 1.5 of this manual. We recommend that you first look in this section to find out which contents of which manual are important for solving your problem. Aids to accessing information You can find specific information in the manual quickly by using the following aids: * There is a table of contents at the front of the manual. * Each section contains subheadings that provide you with an overview of the contents of the relevant sections. * Following the appendices you will find a glossary, in which important technical terms used in the manual are defined. * At the end of the manual you will find a detailed index, which makes it easy for you to find the information you are looking for. Constantly updated information Should you have any queries regarding motor starters, please get in touch with the point of contact in your region responsible for low-voltage switchgear/controlgear with communication capability. You can obtain a list of the points of contact, along with the latest release of the manual, at the following Internet address: www.siemens.de/sirius-motorstarter SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 v vi SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Table of contents 1 Product overview 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.4 1.5 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width for standard motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for High Feature motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fail-safe components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components for safety-integrated systems . . . . . . . . . . . Components of the expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200S configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROFIenergy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guide to the ET 200S manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Brief commissioning instructions 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.5 2.6 2.6.1 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.9.1 2.10 Introduction and purpose of the example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200S components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuitry for the example setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design of 24 VDC power pack for F-DS1e-x, FRS1e-x failsafe motor starter Integration into the user program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis via "Hardware configuration (HW Config)" from STEP 7 . . . Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Installation 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.7.1 Slot rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation measurements and clearances. . . . . . . . . . . . Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is derating? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Derating factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DM-V15 spacing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Criteria for configurations with/without DM-V15 spacing module Installing terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing and removing motor starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm . 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.2 1.3 . . . . . . 1-2 1-2 . . . 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 1-8 1-10 1-12 1-13 . . . . . . . . . 1-18 1-20 1-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-14 3-2 3-3 3-5 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-9 3-10 3-17 3-20 3-22 3-23 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 vii 3.7.2 3.8 3.9 High feature/failsafe motor starter with installation width of 65 or 130 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover and caps . . . . . Labeling motor starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3 4.8.4 4.8.5 4.8.6 4.8.7 4.8.8 4.8.9 4.8.10 4.8.11 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2DI COM control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2DI LC COM control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis and monitoring through the user program . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis by LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-D power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-D F1 power module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-D F2 power module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-D F3 power module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-D F4 power module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-D F5 power module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-X connection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-D F X1 fail-safe power/expansion module . . . . . Diagnosis of the F-CM fail-safe contact replicator. . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the DS1-x and RS1-x motor starters; standard . . . . . . Diagnosis of DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x motor starters; high feature F-DS1e-x and FRS1e-x fail-safe motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of brake control modules xB3, xB4, xB6 . . . . . . . . . . . Process mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process mapping of DS1-x and RS1-x motor starters; standard . . . . . Process mapping of DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x motor starters; high feature F-DS1e-x and FRS1e-x fail-safe motor starters . . . . . . . Process mapping of xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control modules . . . . . . . Motor Starter ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Feature motor starter with order number suffix -.AB4. . . . . . . Device replacement of HF starters -.AA3 and -.AA4 with -.AB4 starters Device response during parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply for High Feature motor starter with order number suffix -.AB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of High Feature motor starter with order number suffix -.AB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.12 4.9 4.9.1 4.9.2 4.9.3 4.10 4.11 4.11.1 4.11.2 4.11.3 4.11.4 3-29 3-36 3-38 4-3 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-13 4-14 4-23 4-23 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-30 4-31 4-32 4-32 4-33 4-34 4-35 4-36 4-39 4-40 4-40 4-41 4-44 4-45 4-46 4-46 4-46 4-46 4-47 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters viii GWA-4NEB950007202-15 5 General technical specifications 5.1 5.2 5.3 Shipping and storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Terminal modules 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.8 6.4 Assignment of the terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-D power module . . . . . . . Terminal modules for motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM-DS45 terminal modules for the DS1-x direct starter; standard . . . TM-DS65 terminal modules for DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters . . . Technical specifications, TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65 . . . . . . TM-RS90 terminal modules for RS1-x reversing starter; standard. . . . TM-RS130 terminal modules for RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature. TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters . Technical specifications - TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130 . . . . Power bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 PM-D power module 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 PM-D power module for motor starters . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - PM-D . . . . . . Power supply for High Feature motor starter number suffix -.AB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Direct and soft starters 8.1 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4 8.4.5 8.4.6 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS1-x direct starter; standard . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . DS1e-x direct starter; high feature F-DS1e-x Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional features of the F-DS1e-x . . . . . Module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature . . Physical principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application and use. . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on configuration . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . with order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fail-safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5-3 5-4 6-2 6-4 6-6 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7-3 7-4 . . . . . . . . 7-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . direct starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8-5 8-5 8-7 8-8 8-11 8-11 8-14 8-19 8-20 8-23 8-27 8-27 8-31 8-32 8-39 8-42 8-45 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 ix 9 Reversing starters 9.1 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS1-x reversing starter; standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional features of the F-RS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 9-4 9-4 9-6 9-7 9-10 9-10 9-13 9-18 9-19 9-22 10.1 Functions - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 Basic function / basic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.1 Rated operating current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.2 Load type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.3 Non-resetting on voltage failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.4 Behavior with supply voltage switching element missing . . . . . . . . 10.4 Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.1 Electronic / mechanical switch technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.2 Reversing starter control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 Brake output (actuation via expansion modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6 Thermal motor model - motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7 System monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7.1 Current limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7.2 Asymmetry monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7.3 Shortcircuit protection (power switch / repair switch). . . . . . . . . . 10.8 Field bus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8.1 Response to CPU/master STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8.2 Group diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8.3 Wait for startup parameter data records (from order number suffix -.AB4) 10.9 Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9.2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9.3 Plausibility check of data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9.4 Output of messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9.5 Local device interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10 PROFIenergy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10.1What is PROFIenergy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10.2PROFIenergy (version V1.0) in the ET 200S motor starter . . . . . . . 10.11 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12 Cold run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13 Emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.14 Trip Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15 Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.17 Log book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.18 Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 10-5 10-6 10-6 10-7 10-8 10-8 10-9 10-9 10-10 10-11 10-13 10-18 10-18 10-22 10-23 10-25 10-25 10-26 10-26 10-27 10-27 10-30 10-31 10-32 10-33 10-34 10-34 10-34 10-38 10-47 10-48 10-49 10-50 10-52 10-53 10-54 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters x GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution 11.1 11.2 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 11.2.5 11.2.6 11.2.7 11.3 11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.6.1 11.6.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal modules TM-PF30 S47 and TM-X15 S27-01 . . . . . . Assignment of the terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . Terminal assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power modules PM-D F1 through F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - PM-D F1 to F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . PM-X connection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200S with "local" safety-integrated system . . . . . . . . . Safety-integrated system configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety circuit with safety-integrated system combination . . . Two safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.3 Two cascaded safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations (potential group, potential subgroup) . . . . . . . 11.6.4 Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system combination 3TK2824 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.5 Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system combination 3TK2823 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.6 Emergency stop combined with protective door . . . . . . . . 11.6.7 Emergency stop circuit with cascaded time delay PL d or PL e. 11.6.8 One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails . . . 11.6.9 Potential-free connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and autonomous safety circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.10 DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature to PL e . . . . . . . . 11.6.11 ET 200S safety-integrated system with AS-i Safety at work . . 12 Expansion modules 12.1 12.2 12.2.1 12.3 12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3 Overview of expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal modules TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 . . . Assignment of the terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal modules TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 . . . Signal response of xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control module and DS1-x, DS1e-x, and F-DS1e-x motor starters . . . . . . . . . . Signal response of the xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control module and RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . Externally powered brake xB1, xB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internally powered brake xB2 and xB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake xB5, xB6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the brake control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3.4 12.3.5 12.3.6 12.3.7 12.3.8 12.3.9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 11-6 11-6 11-7 11-7 11-8 11-9 11-11 11-12 11-15 11-17 11-18 11-21 11-23 11-24 11-28 11-28 . . . . 11-31 . . . . 11-33 . . . . 11-37 . . . . . . . . 11-39 11-41 11-43 11-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-47 11-49 11-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 12-3 12-3 12-4 12-4 12-12 . . . . 12-14 . . . . . . 12-16 12-18 12-21 12-25 12-30 12-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 xi 13 Fail-safe modules 13.1 13.1.1 13.2 13.2.1 13.2.2 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 and TM-FCM30-S47 . . . . . . Assignment of the terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM-PFX30 S47 terminal modules for PM-D F X1 power/ expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal module TM-FCM30-S47 for the F-CM contact replicator PM-D F X1 power/expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - PM-D F X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-CM contact replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - F-CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples with fail-safe modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits. Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several stations . . . . . . Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator . . . . . Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator . ET 200S fail-safe motor starter with AS-i Safety at work . . . . . Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200S fail-safe motor starters and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distributed selective detection of safety signals . . . . . . . . . 13.2.3 13.3 13.3.1 13.3.2 13.3.3 13.4 13.4.1 13.4.2 13.4.3 13.5 13.5.1 13.5.2 13.5.3 13.5.4 13.5.5 13.5.6 13.5.7 13.5.8 13.5.9 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 13-3 13-4 13-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 13-7 13-9 13-10 13-11 13-14 13-16 13-17 13-18 13-21 13-23 13-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26 13-28 13-30 13-32 13-34 . . . 13-36 . . . . . . 13-38 13-40 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters xii GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A Data formats and data records A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8 A.9 A.10 A.11 A.12 A.13 A.14 A.15 A.16 A.17 A.18 A.19 A.19.1 A.19.2 A.19.3 A.19.4 Data formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS68 - Read/write process output images DS69 - Read/write process input images . DS72 Read log book - device errors . . . DS73 Read log book - trips . . . . . . . . DS75 Read log book - events . . . . . . . DS81 Read basic (factory) setting . . . . DS92 Read device diagnostics . . . . . . DS93 Write command . . . . . . . . . . DS94 Read measurements . . . . . . . . DS95 Read statistics . . . . . . . . . . . DS96 Read slave pointer . . . . . . . . . DS 100 Read device identification . . . . DS131 Read / write device parameters . . DS134 Read / write maintenance . . . . . DS165 Read / write comment . . . . . . I&M data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS231 Read device identification. . . . . DS232 Read / write equipment identifier . DS233 Read / write installation . . . . . . DS234 Read / write description. . . . . . B Order numbers B.1 B.1.1 Motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200S DS1-x direct starter; standard / ET 200S RS1-x reversing starter; standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200S High Feature motor starters for Motor Starter ES . . . . . . . ET 200S fail-safe motor starters with electronic overload protection (F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components for ET 200S motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components for the safety-integrated system (local safety) . . . . . . Components for expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fail-safe components (PM-D F PROFIsafe, PM-D F X1) . . . . . . . . Manuals for ET 200S distributed I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.2 B.1.3 B.2 B.3 B.4 B.5 B.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 A-6 A-9 A-11 A-12 A-13 A-14 A-15 A-17 A-17 A-20 A-21 A-22 A-23 A-24 A-25 A-32 A-32 A-33 A-33 A-34 A-34 A-34 B-2 B-2 B-3 B-3 B-4 B-6 B-7 B-7 B-8 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 xiii C Dimensioned drawings C.1 C.1.1 C.1.2 Motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS1-x direct starter; standard and TM-DS45 terminal module . . . . . DS1e-x direct starter; high feature, DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature and TM-DS65 terminal module; F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter and TM-FDS65 terminal module . . . . RS1-x reversing starter; standard and TM-RS90 terminal module . . . . RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and TM-RS130 terminal module F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter and TM-FRS130 terminal module . . Power modules, connection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM-D power module and TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module . . . . . . . Power modules PM-D F1 to 5 and terminal modules TM-PF30 S47-B0/-B1/-C0/-C1/-D0; PM-D F PROFIsafe power module and TM-PF30 S47-F1 terminal module; PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47-G0/-G1; F-CM contact replicator and TM-FCM30 S47-E0 terminal module. . . . PM-X connection module and TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module . . . . DM-V15 spacing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake control module xB1 to 4 and terminal module TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 . . . . . . . . . . C.1.3 C.1.4 C.2 C.2.1 C.2.2 C.2.3 C.3 C.4 C.4.1 D C-2 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6 C-6 C-7 C-8 C-8 C-9 C-9 Applications D.1 D.1.1 Examples with brake control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.1.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with external power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.1.3 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with internal power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.1.4 Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve . . . . . . D.1.5 Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor . . . . . . D.2 Examples with reversible-pole motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.2.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.2.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with 2 Dahlander windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 D-2 D-4 D-6 D-8 D-10 D-12 D-12 D-14 Glossary Index SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters xiv GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1 Product overview Section Subject Page 1.1 Overview 1-2 1.1.1 General components 1-2 1.1.2 Components up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width for standard motor starters 1-4 1.1.3 Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for High Feature motor starters 1-6 1.1.4 Fail-safe components 1-8 1.1.5 Components for safety-integrated systems 1-10 1.1.6 Components of the expansion modules 1-12 1.2 ET 200S configuration options 1-13 1.3 Maximum number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration 1-18 1.4 PROFIenergy 1-20 1.5 Guide to the ET 200S manuals 1-21 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-1 Product overview 1.1 Overview 1.1.1 General components The following table shows the general components required for a configuration with motor starters. Component DIN rails Function ... are the mechanical supports onto which the terminal modules of the ET 200S are snapped. Interface module IM 151 ... connects the ET 200S with the control via a field bus system and prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters connected. (See the ET 200S Distributed I/O System manual.) PM-D power module The module monitors the voltage of the electronic components and contactors for a group of motor starters (potential group) (see Section 7). Terminal modules TM-P15 S27-01 ... carry the wiring and take the PM-D power module (with terminating cover) (see Section 6.2). Spacing module DM-V15 ... in the case of specific mounting positions, high ambient temperatures and for operation in the upper current range, it may be necessary to insert a spacing module. Configuration is not necessary. (see Section 3.4.3). Drawing 100 mm Table 1-1: General components SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 1-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Product overview Component Jumper module L1/L2/L3 Function Drawing ... loops L1, L2 and L3 through ... for closing gaps in the power bus, for example when expansion modules and spacing modules are used Available types: * With L1/L2/L3 throughfeed, 15 mm, 30 mm 15/30 mm PE/N jumper module ... adds a PEN conductor (N) and protective ground (PE) to the power bus. ... for closing gaps in the PE/N bus, for example when expansion modules and spacing modules are used Available types: * with PE/N throughfeed, 15 mm, 30 mm Caps ... protect the contacts of the power bus from touching (IP20) and included with the terminal modules with power bus infeed and with the terminal blocks with PE/N infeed (see Section 3.8). Terminating module ... terminates the internal data bus of the ET 200S electrically and is included with the IM module. (see Section 3.8 and ET 200S Distributed I/O System manual). Terminating cover ... prevents the contacts of the motor starters from being touched and is included with the terminal modules TM-P15 S27-01, TMPF30 S47 B1/C1/F1, and TM-PFX30 S47-G1. (see Section 3.8). 3-phase feedin terminal for S0 ... for expanding the conductor cross section for power infeed - if necessary - as follows: * solid or stranded: 2.5 to 25 mm2 * finely stranded with end sleeve: 2.5 to 25 mm2 * solid or stranded: 12 to 4 AWG (see Section B.2) 15/30 mm Table 1-1: General components (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-3 Product overview 1.1.2 Components up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width for standard motor starters Component Direct starter; standard DS-x1 Terminal module TM-DS45 Reversing starters; standard RS1-x Terminal module TM-RS90 Function Drawing direct starter; standard SIRIUS ... switches a motor on or off. ... protects three-phase motors up to 5.5 kW in the event of overloading and short-circuiting. ... also controls a brake control module (xB1 to xB6). Only the brake function of the xB3, xB4 and xB6 is supported, the inputs have no effect. ... also controls a brake control module (xB3 or xB4) (see Section 8.2). ... carries the wiring and takes a DS1-x direct starter; standard. ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the integrated power bus. Available types: * with power bus infeed for a load group (drawing on left), including 3 caps * with power bus throughfeed (drawing on right) (see Section 6.3.1). reversing starter; standard SIRIUS ... switches a motor rotating clockwise or counterclockwise on or off. ... protects three-phase motors up to 5.5 kW in the event of overloading and short-circuiting. ... also controls a brake control module (xB1 to xB6). Only the brake function of the xB3, xB4 and xB6 is supported, the inputs have no effect. ... also controls a brake control module (xB3 or xB4) (see Section 9.2). ... carries the wiring and takes an RS1-x reversing starter; standard. ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the integrated power bus. Available types: * with power bus infeed for a load group (drawing on left), including 3 caps * with power bus throughfeed (drawing on right) (see Section 6.3.5). Table 1-2: Components for motor starters, standard up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 1-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Product overview Component Function PE/N terminal block ... adds a PEN conductor (N) and protective ground (PE) to the power bus. Control kit Control unit for ET 200S Drawing Available types: * with PE/N infeed and connection to right, including 2 caps, 45 mm * with PE/N connection and throughfeed, 45 mm (see Section 6.3.1 and 6.3.5). ... for manual operation of the contactor (only for DS1-x, RS1-x) (see Section 4.2). ... for direct drive of the contactor coils and for checking the wiring and operation of the powers section for commissioning and service purposes. (only for DS1-x, RS1-x) (see Section 4.3). Table 1-2: Components for motor starters, standard up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-5 Product overview 1.1.3 Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for High Feature motor starters Component Function Direct starter DS1e-x; high feature direct starter; high feature with electronic overload protection ... switches a motor on or off. ... protects three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW in the event of overloading and short circuiting. ... also controls a brake control module (xB1 to xB6). ... with integrated fail-safe kit (see Section 8.3). direct soft starter; high feature with electronic overload protection ... switches a motor on or off. ... protects three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW in the event of overloading and short circuiting. ... also controls a brake control module (xB1, xB3) (see Section 8.4). carries the wiring and takes a DS1e-x direct starter; high feature or DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature. ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the integrated power bus. Direct soft starters DSS1e-x; high feature Terminal module TM-DS65 RS1e-x reversingstart er; high feature Terminal module TM-RS130 Drawing Available types: * with power bus infeed for a load group (drawing on left), including 3 caps * with power bus throughfeed (drawing on right) (see Section 6.3.2). reversing starter; high feature with electronic overload protection ... switches a motor rotating clockwise or counterclockwise on or off. ... protects three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW in the event of overloading and short circuiting. ... also controls a brake control module (xB1 to xB6). ... with integrated fail-safe kit (see Section 9.3). ... carries the wiring and takes an RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature. ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the integrated power bus. Available types: * with power bus infeed for a load group (drawing on left), including 3 caps * with power bus throughfeed (drawing on right) (see Section 6.3.6). Table 1-3: Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for motor starters; high feature SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 1-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Product overview Component Function Terminal block and jumper module PE/N ... adds a PEN conductor (N) and protective ground (PE) to the power bus. Control module 2DI COM Control module 2DI LC COM Drawing Available types: * with PE/N infeed and connection to right, including 2 caps, 65 mm * with PE/N connection and throughfeed, 65 mm (see Section 6.3.2, 6.3.3, 6.3.6, and 6.3.7). Digital module with * 2 inputs for parameterizable motor starters; high feature. Actions, e.g., for local operating mode, end position operation, emergency start, etc. (for DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) * Connection possibility on the PC via the 'LOGO! PC cable (order no.: 6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0) (see Section 4.4). Like 2DI COM control module, but also with input for switching to the manual local operating mode. (see Section 4.5). Table 1-3: Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for motor starters; high feature (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-7 Product overview 1.1.4 Fail-safe components Component Function Fail-safe direct starters F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter with electronic overload protection ... switches a motor on or off. ... switches off safely if there is no SG signal. ... protects three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW in the event of overloading and short circuiting. ... also controls a brake control module (xB1 to xB6). (see Section 8.3). Terminal module TM-FDS65 ... carries the wiring and takes a fail-safe FDS1e-x direct starter. ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the integrated power bus. ... contains the coding for the safety group (SG1 to SG6) Drawing Available types: * with power bus infeed for a load group (drawing on left), including 3 caps * with power bus throughfeed (drawing on right) (see Section 6.3.3). Fail-safe reversing starters F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter; high feature with electronic overload protection ... switches a motor rotating clockwise or counterclockwise on or off. ... switches off safely if there is no SG signal. ... protects three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW in the event of overloading and short circuiting. ... also controls a brake control module (xB1 to xB6). (see Section 9.3). Terminal module TM-FRS130 ... carries the wiring and takes a fail-safe FRS1e-x reversing starter. ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the integrated power bus. ... contains the coding for the safety group (SG1 to SG6) Available types: * with power bus infeed for a load group (drawing on left), including 3 caps * with power bus throughfeed (drawing on right) (see Section 6.3.7). Table 1-4: Fail-safe components SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 1-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Product overview Component Function PM-D F X1 power/expansion module ... supplies external safety devices ... loops the 6 SG buses and U1 and M through (see Section 13.3). TM-PFX30 terminal module ... carries the wiring and takes a PM-D F X1 power/expansion module Available types: * Incoming supply from the left for expansion * Without an incoming supply from the left as power module (see Section 13.2). F-CM contact replicator ... used in conjunction with a fail-safe power module PM-D F PROFIsafe 1) or PM-D F X1 ... makes 4 floating relay contacts available for safe shutdown of external components. Switches off the relay contacts safely if there is no SG signal. ... for safe shutdown of external components, such as valves. (see Section 13.4). TM-FCM30 terminal module 1) Drawing SF PWR STAT ... carries the wiring and takes a contact replicator module (see Section 13.2). PM-D F PROFIsafe power module; see the "ET 200S Distributed I/O Device for Fail-Safe Modules" manual. Table 1-4: Fail-safe components (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-9 Product overview 1.1.5 Components for safety-integrated systems The following table shows the components required to set up an emergency stop circuit. Technical data, see Section 11.3 or Table 11-13. Component Power module PM-D F1 through 4 PM-D F5 Function Drawing The module monitors the voltage of the electronic components and contactors for a group of motor feeders (potential group). ... Ensures that all motor starters in a group are switched off in the interests of safety. ... In combination with PM-D F 1 to 4, makes available four additional enabling circuits for safe shutdown. (see Section 11.3). TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules ... carry the wiring and take the PM-D F1 to 5 power module. ... incorporate the terminals for the sensor circuits (PM-D F1, 2). ... incorporate the terminals for the auxiliary voltages (PM-D F1 to 4). ... incorporate the terminals for the enabling circuits (PM-D F5). ... ... types ...B1 and ...C1 with terminating cover (see Section 11.2). Connection module PM-X ... for terminating the release circuit ... for connecting an external infeed contactor/release circuit ... for integrating ET 200S motor starter groups in external safety circuits (see Section 11.4). TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module ... carries the wiring and takes the PM-X connection module. The same model is used for the start and end of a motor starter group (see Section 11.2.7). Table 1-5: Components for safety-integrated systems SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 1-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Product overview Component Function Infeed contactor, e.g. SIRIUS ... is a second circuit-breaking element in the main circuit. (see Section 11.6). Fail-safe kit 1 for DS1-x direct starter; standard ... is necessary to achieve a moderate to high level of diagnostic coverage ... consists of * an auxiliary switch block (a) * a contact holder with a connecting lead for the direct starter (b) * two contact supports for the terminal module (c) ... is already integrated into the DS1e-x and TM-DS65 high feature starters (see Section 11.5). Fail-safe kit 2 for RS1-x reversing starter; standard ... is necessary to achieve a moderate to high level of diagnostic coverage ... consists of * two auxiliary switch blocks (a) * a contact holder with a connecting lead for the reversing starter (b) * four contact holders for the terminal module (c) * a connecting lead (d) ... is already integrated into the RS1e-x and TM-RS130 high feature starters (see Section 11.5). Drawing Infeed contactor c a b d a c b Table 1-5: Components for safety-integrated systems (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-11 Product overview 1.1.6 Components of the expansion modules Component Brake control module Function ... for all motor starters except DS and RS Drawing xB1 DC24V/4A 4 xB1 xB3 xB2 xB4 xB5 xB6 ... with externally powered mechanical brakes (24 V DC/4 A) ... and 2 inputs (see Section 12.3.5). ... with internally powered mechanical brakes (500 V DC/0.7 A) ... and 2 inputs (see Section 12.3.6). ... with internally powered mechanical brakes (400 V AC/0.5 A) (see Section 12.3.7). ... and 2 inputs (see Section 12.3.7). Terminal module TM-xB15 S24-01 ... carries the wiring and takes a brake control module xB1, xB2 or xB5. Terminal module TM-xB215 S24-01 ... carries the wiring and takes a brake control module xB3, xB4 or xB6. 8 X 2 3 4 Stat 3RK19030CB00 (see Section 12.3.2). Table 1-6: Components of the expansion modules SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 1-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Product overview 1.2 ET 200S configuration options Motor starters with the following features can be combined as follows: * Motor starters of installation width 45/90 mm (motor starters; standard) and 65/130 mm (motor starters; high feature) can be used in any combination. * Supply through the backplane bus is compatible. * Power infeed between the motor starters with installation widths of 45/90 mm and 65/130 mm is separate on account of the different installation lengths. Safety note Only applies in fail-safe mode (fail-safe technology) It is not permissible to combine fail-safe modules with standard modules in a single fail-safe potential group, (Exception: expansion racks, e.g. xB1 to xB6 according to performance level, see Section 8.3, 9.3). DS-x1 DS-x1 DS-x1 RS-x1 DS1e-x DS1e-x Terminating modTerminating cover ule IM 151 PM-D ET 200S with motor starters Figure 1-1: ET 200S with motor starters SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-13 Product overview DS1e-x DS1e-x Terminating cover PM-E 2DI DC 24 V Terminating module DS-x1 2DI DC 24 V DS-x1 PM-D 2DI DC 24 V PM-E IM 151 2DI DC 24 V ET 200S with motor starters and electronic modules Figure 1-2: ET 200S with motor starters and electronic modules DS1e-x Infeed contactor RS-x1 PM-X DS-x1 Terminating module DS-x1 PM-D IM 151 PM-D F1 ET 200S with motor starters and safety-integrated systems up to PL e Terminating cover Figure 1-3: ET 200S with motor starters and safety-integrated systems up to PL e SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 1-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Product overview Parts list The following parts list contains all the components required for an ET 200S sample configuration with motor starters and safety-integrated systems (see Figure 1-3). Abbreviation Order number Description IM 151 6ES7151-1AA00-0AB0 IM 151 interface module PM-D 3RK1903-0BA00 Power module for motor starter TM-P15 S27-01 3RK1903-0AA00 Terminal module for power module TM-DS45S32 3RK1903-0AB00 Terminal module for direct starter; standard with power bus infeed DS-x1 3RK1301-0KB00-0AA2 Direct starter; standard, electromechanical, 0.9 to 1.25 A TM-PF30 S47-B1 3RK1903-1AA10 Terminal module with infeed for power module PM-D F1 3RK1903-1BA00 Power module for emergency stop TM-DS45S32 3RK1903-0AB00 Terminal module for direct starter; standard with power bus infeed DS-x1 3RK1301-1EB00-0AA2 Direct starter; standard, electromechanical, 2.8 to 4.0 A Fail-safe kit 1 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1, for direct starter; standard TM-RS90S31 3RK1903-0AC10 Terminal module for reversing starter; standard with power bus throughfeed RS-x1 3RK1301-1BB00-1AA2 Reversing starter; standard, electromechanical, 1.4 to 2.0 A Fail-safe kit 2 3RK1903-1CA01 Fail-safe kit 2, for reversing starter; standard TM-DS65 S32 -01 FS L 3RK1903-0AK00 Terminal module for direct starter; high feature with power bus infeed DS1e-x 3RK1301-0CB10-0AB4 Direct starter; high feature with electronic overload protection, 2.4 to 16 A TM-X15 S27-01 3RK1903-1AB00 Terminal module for connection module PM-X 3RK1903-1CB00 Connection module Terminating cover (component of the terminal modules with power bus infeed for power modules of motor starters) Terminating module (component of the IM 151) 3RT1035-1BB40 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Infeed contactor as 2nd deactivation possibility, e.g. SIRIUS, size 2 1-15 Product overview F-DS1e-x PM-D F X1 IM 151 F-DS1e-x Terminating modTerminating cover ule ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters up to PL e / SIL3 Figure 1-4: ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters up to PL e / SIL3 Terminating module F DO F DI F-DS1e-x PM-E F-DS1e-x Terminating cover PM-D F PROFIsafe F DO F DI IM 151 High Feature PM-E ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters and fail-safe electronic modules up to PL e / SIL3 Figure 1-5: ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters and fail-safe electronic modules up to PL e / SIL3 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 1-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Product overview Potential groups and load groups A potential group (24V) consists of a PM-D power module and all the modules to the right of the power module up to the next PM-D power module. A load group (400V) consists of a motor starter with power infeed and all the motor starters to the right of it up to the next motor starter with a power infeed. DS-x1 Load group 1 DS-x1 DS-x1 DS-x1 DS-x1 Load group 2 RS-x1 DS-x1 Terminating modTerminating cover ule DS-x1 Potential group 2 PM-D PM-D IM 151 Potential group 1 Load group 3 Jumper module Figure 1-6: Potential groups and load groups SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-17 Product overview 1.3 Maximum number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration Please note the following rules when configuring your ET 200S station: * The maximum number of of modules is 64. This includes: - interface module - power modules - electronic modules - modules for reserve - motor starter * The maximum length of the parameters is 244 bytes (depending on the DP master used). The following table contains the parameter length of the different modules in bytes: Module Parameters (bytes) PAA/PAE (bytes) PM-D 3 0/0 DS-x1 3 1/1 1) PM-D F1 3 0/0 RS-x1 3 1/1 1) PM-D F2 3 0/0 DS1e-x 12 2/2 PM-D F3 3 0/0 RS1e-x 12 2/2 PM-D F4 3 0/0 DSS1e-x 12 2/2 PM-D F5 3 0/0 F-DS1e-x 12 2/2 PM-X 1 0/0 F-RS1e-x 12 2/2 PM-D F X1 3 0/0 DS1e-x ab -.AB4 223) 2/2 F-CM 3 0/0 RS1e-x ab -.AB4 223) 2/2 PM-D F PROFIsafe 20 5/5 DSS1e-x ab -.AB4 223) 2/2 xB3 3 1/1 1) xB4 3 1/1 1) xB1 - 2) 0/0 xB2 - 2) 0/0 xB5 - 2) 0/0 xB6 DM V15 3 - 2) 1/1 Module Parameters (bytes) PAA/PAE (bytes) 1) 0/0 1) 2 bits each in PAA/PAE are used; addresses can be packed 2) Not included with the configuration tool 3) This shows that max. 10 starters could be operated on a head-end in the DPV0 operating mode from the point of view of data volume framework: 22 bytes + (10 * 22 bytes) = 242 bytes. Table 1-7: Parameter length of the modules SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 1-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Product overview * The following table shows you the maximum current-carrying capacity of the modules you have to take into consideration: Power modules PM-D Maximum currentcarrying capacity 10 A PM-D F1 PM-D F2 PM-D F3 4A (see Section 11.3.3) Modules that can be connected The number of modules that can be connected depends on the total current of all the modules in this potential group. This must not exceed the relevant maximum current-carrying capacity. PM-D F4 PM-D F5 PM-D F X1 PM-D F PROFIsafe 6A Making current: 10 A Continuous current:5 A Table 1-8: Maximum current-carrying capacity SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-19 Product overview 1.4 PROFIenergy What is PROFIenergy PROFIenergy is a manufacturer-independent profile on PROFINET. The profile supports the shutdown in idle times (energy-saving function), measurement of the energy flow (measurement function) and the status function that is used to export the current status conditions and other information on PROFIenergy. PROFIenergy uses field-tested PROFINET mechanisms ensuring rapid and simple implementation Origination Both standards and regulations are increasingly focussing on environmental protection and energy management as well as the desire to save energy costs in a production plant and thus secure a sustainable competitive advantage. As a result, the aim of industry is to save energy and to actively reduce CO2 emissions. The careful use of valuable resources means that the manacturer-nonspecific PROFIenergy profile defined on PROFINET PROFIenergy makes an active contribution to environmental protection. PROFIenergy (version 1.0) in the ET 200S motor starter (from order suffix: -.AB4) PROFIenergy allows consumption data from the equipment to be read in a standardized format. This data is recorded during operation and displayed on control device, for example, or transferred to higher level energy management software packages. This ensures that these measurements, as currently present in motor starters, are available to the user for onward processing in a standardized, manufacturer-nonspecific defined format and structure. These functions von PROFIenergy therefore form the basis for an active load and energy management system in ongoing operations. The system and device manufacturers provide the user with function blocks for PROFIenergy and implement the relevant commands and status functions in the field devices. The plant and machinery engineer and the plant operator coordinate the switch-on and switch-off sequences as before, as well as the enabling signals for the process. The control stores which components are switched off with which pause type. The system operator does not need to get involved with the technology in detail. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 1-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Product overview 1.5 Guide to the ET 200S manuals The components of the ET 200S are described in various manuals in the ET 200S manual package. The examples below show the possible ET 200S configurations and the manuals required for them. You need the information from the following manuals: Order numbers of the required documentation packages and manuals ET 200S Distributed I/O Device 6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1) 2PULSE ET 200S Distributed I/O Device + ET 200S Process-Related Functions 6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1) 1Posinc/An. ET 200S Distributed I/O Device + ET 200S Positioning 6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1) Modbus/USS You use the following components ... ET 200S Distributed I/O Device + ET 200S Serial Interface Module 6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1) ET 200S Distributed I/O Device + IM 151/CPU Interface Module 6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1) 2AI 2AO 2AO 2DI DO2 1SSI 1Posinc/Dig. 2AI 2AI DO2 2DI DO2 2DI 2DI DO2 DO2 2DI PM-E Available on the Internet Available on the Internet Available on the Internet Available on the Internet DS-x1 PM-D 2AI 2AO DO2 2DI DS-x1 PM-E IM 151 IM 151/ CPU PM-E IM 151 PM-E IM 151 PM-E IM 151 PM-E IM 151 ET 200S consists of the following components: ET 200S Distributed I/O Device + 6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1) ET 200S Motor Starters Fail-Safe Motor Starters Safety-Integrated Systems 1) x = The documentation packages or manuals can be ordered in the following languages: A = German B = English French, Spanish, and Italian are also available on the Internet. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-21 Product overview ET 200S Distributed I/O Device + ET 200S Distributed I/O Device Fail-safe modules F DO PM-D F PROFIsafe DO2 2DI PM-E PM-E F DI F DO F DO F DI F DI PM-E IM 151-1 HF IM 151-1 HF You use the following fail-safe components ... F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-x ET 200S Distributed I/O Device Fail-safe modules + ET 200S Distributed I/O Device + 6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1) Available on the Internet Available on the Internet 6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1) ET 200S Motor Starters Fail-Safe Motor Starters Safety-Integrated Systems 1) x = The documentation packages or manuals can be ordered in the following languages: A = German B = English French, Spanish, and Italian are also available on the Internet. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 1-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Product overview Where do you find information? The following table is designed to help you quickly find the information you need. It tells you which manual you need to refer to and which section deals with the topic you are interested in. Direct and soft starters Reversing starters ET 200S safety-integrated system Interface modules Electronic modules Positioning modules Expansion modules Fail-safe modules Monitoring, cycle, and response times Order numbers Dimensioned drawings Applications Glossary SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Safety-Integrated Systems in S7 System Description S7 Distributed Safety Configuration and Programming 2 2 3 3 4 7 3 2 5 5 6 8 5 ET 200S Serial Interface Module 2 ET 200S Positioning 1 2 4 ET 200S Process-Related Functions Distributed I/O System ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules Components of ET 200S 1 1 Brief instructions 2 2 Configuration options 1 3 Communication Configuration 4 Addressing Mounting 3 4 Electrical layout and wiring of the ET 200S 5 Programming Commissioning and diagnostics 4 6 Functions 10 Function diagrams General technical specifications 5 7 Technical specifications 6, 11-13 Terminal modules 7, 11, 9 13 Power modules 7, 10, 10 12 IM 151/CPU Interface Module ET 200S Distributed I/O Device Subject ET 200S Motor Starters Fail-Safe Motor Starters Manual section/appendix 7 5 8 6 2-5 2 2, 3 8 9 10 8 11-15 3-6 12 13 7 B C D A B Gl Gl Gl 9 12 11 10 13 9 10 9 1-23 Product overview SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 1-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Brief commissioning instructions 2 Brief instructions Section Subject Page 2.1 Introduction and purpose of the example 2-2 2.2 ET 200S components 2-3 2.3 Requirements 2-4 2.4 Installation 2-4 2.4.1 Circuitry for the example setup 2-6 2.5 Wiring and fitting 2-7 2.6 Configuring 2-8 2.7 Integration into the user program 2-10 2.8 Activation 2-11 2.9 Diagnostic options 2-12 2.9.1 Diagnosis via "Hardware configuration (HW Config)" from STEP 7 2-13 2.10 Help 2-14 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2-1 Brief commissioning instructions 2.1 Introduction and purpose of the example Introduction By means of the following example, you will learn how to commission the ET 200S with motor starters step by step. The DS1-x direct starter; standard is controlled by an ON button and an OFF button connected to a 4DI DC24V ST module. The STEP 7 software is used for configuration. The configuration and parameterization is carried out in hardware configuration using STEP 7. Purpose of the example This example shall 1. show you how to commission a simple DS1-x direct starter; standard with ET 200S in a few steps. 2. let you modify this example for your application. 3. help you easily realize other applications. Essential steps The essential steps with ET 200S are always as follows: * Mounting of ET 200S components and the external wiring of control elements (buttons) and actuators (e.g. motors) * Configuration with STEP 7 * Integration into the user program * Activation of the ET 200S * Evaluation of the diagnostics Information on PROFINET commissioning can be found in the SIMATIC PROFINET system description manual. You can download the manual on the internet from the following address: http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 2-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Brief commissioning instructions 2.2 ET 200S components Required components The following table contains the components you need for this example: Number Order number Description 1 According to design Short circuit and overload protection for AC 400 V infeed 1 According to design Power supply unit for DC 24 V 1 According to design Button with normally open contact function for ON 1 According to design Button with normally closed contact function for OFF 1 According to design PLC with master for PROFIBUS-DP according to your selection 1 6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0 Interface modules IM151-1 STANDARD (with terminating module) 1 6ES7193-4CE00-0AA0 Terminal module for PM-E DC24V TM-P15S22-01 1 6ES7138-4CA00-0AA0 Power module for electronic modules PM-E DC24V 1 6ES7193-4CB20-0AA0 Terminal module for 4DI DC24V ST TM-E15S24-01 1 6ES7131-4BD00-0AA0 Digital electronic module with 4 inputs 4DI DC24V ST 1 3RK1903-0AA00 Terminal module for PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 (with terminating cover) 1 3RK1903-0BA00 Power module for motor starter PM-D 1 3RK1903-0AB00 Terminal module for DS1-x with infeed TM-DS45-S32 (with 3 caps) 1 3RK1903-2AA00 Terminal block with infeed PE/N (with 2 caps) 1 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 1) Direct starter; standard DS1-x 1) xx = The current range should be selected according to your connected load. Table 2-1: Components for the example SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2-3 Brief commissioning instructions 2.3 Requirements The requirements for the example are as follows: * You have set up an S7 station, consisting of a power supply module and a DP master (e.g. CPU 315-2 DP). For this example, a CPU 315-2 DP was used as the DP master. Every other DP master (standard: IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1) can naturally be used as well. * STEP 7 (V5.2 or later) is fully installed on your PG. You know how to use STEP 7. * The PG is connected to the DP master. Note Information regarding the operation of STEP 7 can be found in the online help. 2.4 Installation Warning Dangerous electrical voltage! This can lead to electrical shock and burns. Before starting work, de-energize the plant and device. The following diagram shows you in which order you should mount the ET 200S components to the mounting rails. DS-x1 Terminating module PM-D 4DI PM-E Master CPU 315-2 DP Power supply Slot in "STEP 7HW Config" 1 2 3 4 IM 151-1 ET 200S PE/N 3 caps 2 caps PLC Terminating cover TM-P15 S27-01 Profibus-DP Figure 2-1: Components and setup for the example SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 2-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Brief commissioning instructions Installation sequence A precise mounting description can be found for the following: * Installing terminal modules in Section 3.5 * Inserting power modules in Section 3.6 * Installing and removing motor starters in Section 3.7 For mounting, proceed as follows: 1. Mount both profile rails (35 x 7.5 mm or 15 mm) with a length of at least 210 mm to a solid base with a center-to-center-to-center clearance of 100 mm 100 mm. 2. Start mounting the individual modules from the left of the profile rail (suspend - pivot - push to the left). Observe the following sequence: - Interface module IM151-1 STANDARD - Terminal module TM-P15 S22-01 - Terminal module TM-E15 S24-01 - Terminal module TM-P15 S27-01 - Plug together the PE/N terminal block and terminal module TM-DS45-S32 - Mount terminal module TM-DS45-S32 to the mounting rail 3. On the right hand side of the TM-DS45-S32, position the following parts: - The termination module (included with IM151-1) - The end cover (included with TM-P15 S27-01) - The 3 caps for L1 through L3 (included with TM-DS45-S32) - The 2 caps for PE and N (included with PE/N terminal block) (see Figure 2-1) 4. Set PROFIBUS address 3 on the interface module IM151-1 STANDARD. OFF PROFIBUS address 3 ON 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Coding switch under the slide bottom right on the front Figure 2-2: Set PROFIBUS address 3 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2-5 Brief commissioning instructions 2.4.1 Circuitry for the example setup The following diagram shows the circuitry of the main circuit and the control circuit for the example. 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 PM-E DC24V 4DI DC24V ST DI0 1 DI2 2 5 DI1 E 6 DI3 1L1 3L2 5L3 ON 13 Off 22 14 24 VDC M 2 6 3 7 21 3 7 4 8 DC 24 V E Fault IM151-1 E A 24 VDC E 2T1 4T2 6T3 M 1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M N PE 24 VDC L+ U1 M 24 VDC A1+ M 3~ 1 8 2 9 PM-D 6 13 AUX2 7 AUX3 14 4 11 U2 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring A2- 5 12 Figure 2-3: Circuitry for the example SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 2-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Brief commissioning instructions 2.5 Wiring and fitting Perform the following steps: 1. Caution Provide sufficient short circuit and overload protection for the entire setup. 2. Wire the ET 200S as shown in Figure 2-3. The bolded external lines must still be wired. These are: - 400 VAC at L1 - L3 on the terminal module of the motor starter - PE and N on terminal block PE/N - Consumer (motor) at T1 - T3 and PE - 24 VDC at IM151-1 - 24 VDC at terminal module for PM-E - 24 VDC at terminal module for PM-D - Both buttons for ON (normally open contact) and OFF (normally closed contact) 3. Using the PROFIBUS bus connecting plug, connect the DP master with the ET 200S. The PROFIBUS DP interface is located on the IM151-1 STANDARD. 4. Plug the power and electronic modules and the motor starters into the terminal modules. 5. Switch on the voltage supply for the DP master. 6. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master. CPU 315-2 DP: - 5 VDC green - SF DP off - BF flashes red Note on power supply of motor starters; high feature with order number suffix -.AB4 High feature motor starters with order number suffix -.AB4 that are not integrated via GSD/GSDML into the ET200S substation use extended start-up data records: To ensure that the high feature motor starters are automatically assigned the extended start-up data records on the re-start of the ET200S substation, the electronics power supply (U1 of the PM-D module) of the high feature motor starter must be supplied from the same voltage source as the interface module (header module). SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2-7 Brief commissioning instructions 2.6 Configuring 1. Start the SIMATIC Manager and create a new project with a DP master (e.g. CPU315-2 DP) (see Figure 2-4). 2. Generate the PROFIBUS subnet. 3. Add the ET 200S to PROFIBUS from the hardware catalogue. 4. Set PROFIBUS address 3 for ET 200S. 5. Drag the individual ET 200S modules from the hardware catalog into the configuration table (see Figure 2-4). Module/ DP code Order number 1 6ES7138-4CA00-0AA0 2 6ES7131-4BD00-0AA0 3 3RK1903-0BA00 4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 2) 1 Input address Output address Comment Power module PM-E DC24V 0.0 - 0.3 Input module 4DI DC24V ST Power module PM-D 1) 1.0 - 1.3 0.0 - 0.3 Motor starter DS1-x ) Can be found in the module selection under "Motor starters." xx = The current range should be selected according to your connected load. 2) Table 2-2: Configuration table in STEP 7 "hardware configuration" Note Brake modules xB1, xB2 and xB5 are not configured in the hardware configuration of STEP 7. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 2-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Brief commissioning instructions You should then see the following screen. Your file name Figure 2-4: Modules in STEP 7 "hardware configuration" Parameter setting 6. To obtain diagnoses of the modules, set the following parameters for the individual modules: 7. 2.6.1 -In the Properties of DP Slave for ET 200S dialog box Start at setpoint <> actual setup: Enable Module change during operation: Enable - In the Properties of DP Slave for PM-E DC24V dialogue box: Module/DP code 1 (in the configuration table) Diagnosis: Missing load voltage - In the Properties of DP Slave for PM-D dialogue box: Module/DP code 3 (in the configuration table) Diagnosis: Enable collective diagnosis - In the Properties of DP Slave for DS1-x dialogue box: Module/DP Code 4 (in the configuration table) Diagnosis: Enable collective diagnosis Save the configuration. Design of 24 VDC power pack for F-DS1e-x, FRS1e-x failsafe motor starter When configuring the 24 VDC power pack for the voltage U1, ensure that the power pack has a current of 1.5A * number of starters when the test function of several motor starters is activated. See technical specifications page 8-23 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2-9 Brief commissioning instructions 2.7 Integration into the user program 1. Create the user program using the KOP/AWL/FUP editor in OB1. AWL U E S A UN E R A 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.0 And input 0.0 (ON button) Set output 0.0 And not input 0.1 (OFF button) Reset output 0.0 2. Save the project in the SIMATIC Manager. 3. Load the configuration in the DP master. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 2-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Brief commissioning instructions 2.8 Activation 1. Switch on the following voltage supplies on ET 200S. - IM151-1 STANDARD - PM-E DC24V - PM-D with U1 and U2 - Do not yet switch on supply voltage 400 VAC! 2. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master and ET 200S - CPU 315-2 DP: 5 VDC: Lights up SF DP: off BF: Off 3. Observe the status LEDs on IM151-1 STANDARD. - SF off - BF off - ON green 4. Observe the status LEDs on PM-E DC24V - SF off - PWR green 5. Observe the status LEDs on 4DI DC24V ST - DI0 off - DI1 green - DI2 off - DI3 green 6. Observe the status LEDs on PM-D - SF off - PWR green - CON green 7. Observe the status LEDs on motor starter DS1-x - SF off - C-STAT off SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2-11 Brief commissioning instructions Check the wiring Check the correct wiring of the ON and OFF buttons. 8. Press the ON button Watch the LEDs - 4DI DC24V ST, DI0 green - Motor starter DS1-x, C-STAT yellow 9. Press the OFF button Watch the LEDs - 4DI DC24V ST, DI1 off - Motor starter DS1-x, C-STAT off 10. Switch on the supply voltage AC 400 V for the motor starter. Danger Make sure that no dangerous live parts can be touched. 11. Repeat steps 8 and 9 whilst observing the behavior of the connected consumer. Warning Make sure that the actuators connected to the motor starters do not present a danger (e.g. uncontrolled rotary movements of the motor). 2.9 Diagnostic options There are several options for accessing the diagnostics of the ET 200S modules: * via the DP diagnostics modules for SIMATIC S7 "FB125" or "FC125". You can download both modules and a description in PDF format from the following web address: http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26996747 * via STEP 7 "Hardware configuration" S7 (or STEP 7+ in "Devices and power systems"). See following Section 2.9.1 * using the convenient parameterization and diagnostics software "Motor Starter ES". Using this software, which is integrated into S7, it is very easy and convenient to parameterize, operate and observe (diagnosis) the ET 200S High Feature motor starter. Information about functionality and license types can be found online at the following address: DE: http://www.siemens.de/sirius/software EN: http://www.siemens.com/sirius/software SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 2-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Brief commissioning instructions 2.9.1 Diagnosis via "Hardware configuration (HW Config)" from STEP 7 1. Open the "STEP 7 "Hardware configuration"" window in the SIMATIC Manager on your computer or programming device. 2. Open the "Online" station. 3. Simulate the various errors and observe the messages in the "DP Slave diagnosis" status window such as: - Pull out and plug in the motor starter in the ON state and the OFF state -Switch off the U1 and/or U2 voltages at the PM-D - Trip the circuit breaker In the following image, for example, a motor starter has been removed from Slot 7. Figure 2-5: View of the "DP Slave Diagnosis" status window 4. After every performed action, press the F5 on the computer/programming device to update the status window. The IM151-1 module is marked by a red dot with a white cross in case of an error message. 5. Double-click the missing station to display the module state of IM151-1 ("General" tab). For precise error diagnosis, select "DP Slave Diagnosis." The individual diagnoses of the malfunctioning slave are shown in text form. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2-13 Brief commissioning instructions 2.10 Help If you have problems or questions, please contact: Technical Assistance: Telephone: Fax: Email: Website: +49 (911) 895-5900 (8:00 am - 5:00 pm CET) +49 (911) 895-5907 technical-assistance@siemens.com www.siemens.com/sirius/technical-assistance SIEMENS AG Technical Assistance Breslauer Str. 5 D-90766 Furth SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 2-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3 Installation Section Subject Page 3.1 Slot rules 3-2 3.2 Installation rules 3-3 3.3 Installation measurements and clearances 3-5 3.4 Derating 3-6 3.4.1 What is derating? 3-6 3.4.2 Derating factors 3-6 3.4.3 DM-V15 spacing module 3-9 3.4.4 DM-V15 spacing module 3-10 3.5 Installing terminal modules 3-17 3.6 Inserting power modules 3-20 3.7 Installing and removing motor starters 3-22 3.7.1 Standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm 3-23 3.7.2 High feature/failsafe motor starter with installation width of 65 or 130 mm 3-29 3.8 Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover and caps 3-36 3.9 Labeling motor starters 3-38 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-1 Installation 3.1 Slot rules Compliance with the following slot rules is essential in order to ensure correct and reliable operation of an ET 200S system. Rule The slot immediately to the right of an IM 151 module is always occupied by a... Module * PM-E * PM-D * PM-D F1 to 4 * PM-E F PROFIsafe * PM-D F X1 * PM-D F PROFIsafe 1) * Motor starter The slot immediately to the left of an xB1 to xB6 module is always occupied by a ... * * * * Between a PM-D F1 to F5 and a PM-X module there must never be a... * DSS1e-x * F-DS1e-x * F-RS1e-x The slot immediately to the left of a PMD F5 module is always occupied by a... * Motor starter The slot immediately to the right of a PMD F X1 module is always occupied by a... * F-CM * F-DS1e-x * F-RS1e-x * PM-D F X1 The slot immediately to the left of an FCM module is always occupied by a... * * * * * xB1 to xB6 * F-CM 1) 2) 3) 4) DS1-x DS1e-x RS... * PM-D * PM-D F1 to 5 * xB1 to xB6 The slot immediately to the left of a PM-X module is always occupied by a... * RS-x1 * RS1e-x * F-RS1e-x 4) DS-x1 DS1e-x DSS1e-x 3) F-DS1e-x 4) DS... RS... PM-D F X1 PM-D F PROFIsafe F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x * PM-D F1 to 5 * xB1 to xB6 Precondition for PM-D F3, 4 is that another row of the same EMERGENCY STOP group must include a PM-D F1, 2 basic unit The inputs of xB3, xB4 have no function See Section 12.3 Depending on the performance level for xB3, xB4 and xB6, see Section 8.3, 9.3 Table 3-1: Slot rules SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation 3.2 Installation rules Easy installation The ET 200S distributed I/O device is designed for easy installation. To install an ET 200S with power modules, first snap on the terminal modules and then insert the power modules and motor starters into them. Installation rules for the configuration of an ET 200S with motor starters To install an ET 200S, comply with the following installation rules (also see the figures in Section 1.2, ET 200S configuration options): * The components are arranged in a single line in groups. * Each line begins on the left with an IM 151 interface module. * A power module comes after the interface module or at the beginning of each potential group. * Groups with motor starters require special power modules with connections for contactor supply voltage. * The ET 200S distributed I/O device ends with the termination module, motor starters additionally with an end cover and with cover caps for the power bus. Station width, number of modules and usable motor starters of an ET 200S rail The station width, the number of connectable modules, and usable motor starters of an ET 200S rail depend on the IM 151 interface module used. Information regarding the IM 151 interface module can be found in the "ET 200S Distributed I/O Device" manual. Removing the cover cap in the case of a backplane bus connector Remove the cover cap at the rear of the motor starter before you plug the motor starter onto the terminal module! Bild 3-1: Cover cap in the case of a backplane bus connector SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-3 Installation Installation position and station width Both perpendicular and parallel installation positions on a perpendicular mounting surface of a mounting rail are permissible. Here, the following rules apply for motor starters: Motor starters Horizontal profile rails Vertical profile rails standard DS1-x, RS1-x high feature DS1e-x, RS1e-x max. 1 m max. 2 m max. 2 m fail-safe F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x Table 3-2: Installation position and station width . Perpendicular installation on horizontal rails Parallel installation on vertical rails Figure 3-2: Installation on rails Rail The ET 200S distributed I/O device is installed on profile rails complying with EN 50022 (35 x 7.5 mm or 35 x 15 mm). To install an ET 200S with motor starters you need two profile rails installed with center-to-center clearance of 100 mm. Important We recommend screwing the rails to the fixing surface at intervals of 200 mm. Please note: During configuration, please observe the following points: * A suitable IM 151 interface module depending on the used motor starters for the intended station width. * Sufficient parameter capacity. * Sufficient heat dissipation in the switch cabinet. * Any required derating for the motor starter (see Section 3.4). SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation 3.3 Installation measurements and clearances Measurements Module mm Installation width Terminal module for * PM-D power module * DM-V15 spacing module * PM-X connection module (safety-integrated system) * PM-D power module F1 to F5 (safety-integrated system) * PM-D F PROFIsafe power module * PM-D F X1 power module * DS1-x direct starter; standard * DS1e-x direct starter; high feature * DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature * Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter * RS1-x reversing starter; standard * RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature * Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter 15 15 15 30 30 30 45 65 65 65 90 130 130 Installation height Terminal module for direct and reversing starters; standard with installation width of 45 or 90 mm * With 3-pin power bus (L1, L2, L3) * With 5-pin power bus (incl. PE/N) 264 306 Terminal module for direct and reversing starters; high feature or fail-safe, with installation width of 65 or 130 mm * With 3-pin power bus (L1, L2, L3) * With 5-pin power bus (incl. PE/N) 290 332 Installation depth Minimum spacing for installation and wiring ET 200S on rail with 7.5 mm depth: * ET 200S * ET 200S for motor starters; standard with 45 or 90 mm installation width * ET 200S for motor starters; standard with 45 or 90 mm installation width and safety-integrated system * ET 200S for motor starters; high feature or fail-safe with 65 or 130 mm installation width * ET 200S for motor starters; high feature or fail-safe with 65 or 130 mm installation width and 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module * ET 200S for motor starters; high feature or fail-safe with 65 or 130 mm installation width and 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module with LOGO! PC cable * * * * Above and below the terminal module To the left of the IM 151 interface module To the right of the ET 200S terminating module Under the installed shield bus 75 127 152 157 180 220 35 20 20 15 Table 3-3: Installation measurements and clearances SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-5 Installation 3.4 Derating 3.4.1 What is derating? Derating refers to the use of devices in difficult operating conditions by selectively limiting their performance. In the case of motor starters, this generally involves operating at high ambient temperatures. 3.4.2 Derating factors The following applies exclusively to the following motor starters, which are installed side by side in a row. * Standard motor starter: - DS1-x * High Feature motor starters: - DS1e-x 2.4 - 16 - RS1e-x 2.4 - 16A - DSS1e-x 2.4 - 16A * Fail-safe motor starters: - F-DS1e-x - F-RS1e-x In the case of the ET 200S motor starters, the following factors must be taken into account in difficult environmental conditions: * Ambient temperature Tu: The ambient temperature Tu is the temperature surrounding the housing of the motor starter. The lower the max. ambient temperature Tu, the higher the current load within the motor starter can be. * Absolute current load: The lower the current through a motor starter, the lower the heat loss in the device. If the device does not generate much heat, the ambient temperature Tu can be higher. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation Motors with a high efficiency and high motor starting currents High starting currents may have to be taken into consideration when using motor starters on high-efficiency motors. Motor starters are designed for motors with a maximum 8-fold starting current in accordance with IEC 60947-4-2. If motors are operated that have a higher starting current, refer to the following table for the maximum adjustable motor current: Motor starter version Ie [A] at 40C max. motor starting current < 8-fold Ie 9-fold Ie 10-fold Ie 3RK1301-0AB* 3A 2,9 A 2,6 A 3RK1301-0BB* 8A 6,8 A 6A 3RK1301-0CB* 16 A 13 A 12 A ET 200S High Feature motor starters Motor starter version Ie [A] at 40C max. motor starting current < 8-fach Ie 9-fach Ie 10-fach Ie 3RK1301-0BB00* 0,2 A 0,18 A 0,16 A 3RK1301-0CB00* 0,25 A 0,22 A 0,2 A 3RK1301-0DB00* 0,32 A 0,29 A 0,26 A 3RK1301-0EB00* 0,4 A 0,35 A 0,3 A 3RK1301-0FB00* 0,5 A 0,41 A 0,32 A 3RK1301-0GB00* 0,63 A 0,49 A 0,4 A 3RK1301-0HB00* 0,8 A 0,65 A 0,5 A 3RK1301-0JB00* 1A 0,85 A 0,7 A 3RK1301-0KB00* 1,25 A 1A 0,8 A 3RK1301-1AB00* 1,6 A 1,3 A 1A 3RK1301-1BB00* 2A 1,65 A 1,3 A 3RK1301-1CB00* 2,5 A 2,1 A 1,7 A 3RK1301-1DB00* 3,2 A 2,65 A 2,1 A 3RK1301-1EB00* 4A 3,25 A 2,5 A 3RK1301-1FB00* 5A 4,1 A 3,2 A ET 200S standard motor starters SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-7 Installation Motor starter version Ie [A] at 40C max. motor starting current < 8-fach Ie 9-fach Ie 10-fach Ie 3RK1301-1GB00* 6,3 A 5,15 A 4A 3RK1301-1HB00* 8A 6,6 A 5,3 A 3RK1301-1JB00* 10 A 8,5 A 7A 3RK1301-1KB00* 12 A 10 A 8A ET 200S standard motor starters Site altitude If site altitude is above 1000 m, the following are necessary: * A reduction in the rated current for thermal reasons * A reduction in rated voltage on account of the diminished dielectric strength The diagram below plots the reduction in rated device current and rated operating voltage as a function of site altitude: 105 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 Ue reduction Ie reduction 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 Site altitude in m Figure 3-3: Reductions as a function of site altitude SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation 3.4.3 DM-V15 spacing module If operating conditions are difficult and render derating necessary, a DM-V15 spacing module is inserted between the corresponding motor starters. The DM-V15 spacing module is suitable for all motor starter series. It is entirely passive and requires no configuration. The bus and all the other connections are looped through for the following modules. The elements of the spacing module are illustrated below. Ventilation grid Support Bus Supply voltage U1 for electronics AUX1 RF1/2 or SG1/2 Supply voltage U2 for contactors or SG3/4 AUX2/3 or SG5/6 Figure 3-4: DM-V15 spacing module Note No specific measurements are required for the following motor starters: - RS1-x reversing starter; standard - DS1e-x direct starter; high feature, order number suffix -.AA2, -.AA4 - DS1e-x direct starter; high feature, 0.3 - 3A, 2.4 - 8A, order number suffix -.AB4 - DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature, order number suffix -.AA2, -.AA4 - DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature, 0.3 - 3A, 2.4 - 8A order number suffix -.AB4 - RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature, order number suffix -.AA2, -.AA4 RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature, 0.3 - 3A, 2.4 - 8A order number suffix -.AB4 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-9 Installation 3.4.4 Criteria for configurations with/without DM-V15 spacing module The graphics below show under which criteria and designs distance modules are recommended. Criteria for DS1-x Vertical installation on horizontal rails Tu 50 C for xB1 to xB6 60 C PM-D|DS|DS|DS PM-D F1-4|DS|DS|DS PM-D|DSx|xB1-6|DSx|xB1-6|DSx|xB1-6 40 C PM-D|DM-V15|DS|DM-V15|DS|DM-V15|DS PM-D F1-4|DM-V15|DS|DM-V15|DS|DM-V15|DS PM-D|DM-V15|DSx|xB1-6|DM-V15|DSx|xB1-6|DM-V15|DSx|xB1-6 PM-D|DS|DS|DS PM-D F1-4|DS|DS|DS PM-D|DSx|xB1-6|DSx|xB1-6|DSx|xB1-6 Ie Circuit breaker 6.3 A Circuit breaker >6.3 A = without DM-V15, motor current 90 % of Ie or with DM-V15, motor current 100% of Ie = without DM-V15 = with DM-V15 Ie = max. current setting of circuit breaker Figure 3-5: Criteria for vertical installation on horizontal mounting rails with DS1-x SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation Horizontal installation on vertical rails Tu 40 C PM-D|DS|DS|DS PM-D F1-4|DS|DS|DS PM-D|DSx|xB1-6|DSx|xB1-6|DSx|xB1-6 30 C PM-D|DS|DS|DS PM-D F1-4|DS|DS|DS PM-D|DSx|xB1-6|DSx|xB1-6|DSx|xB1-6 Ie Circuit breaker 6.3 A Circuit breaker >6.3 A = without DM-V15 = without DM-V15, motor current 90% of Ie Ie = max. current setting of circuit breaker Figure 3-6: Criteria for horizontal installation on vertical mounting rails with DS1-x SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-11 Installation Criteria for DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x with order number suffix -.AB4 Vertical installation on horizontal rails Tu 60 C 55 C 50 C without DM-V15 40 C with DM-V15 1) 30 C Ie 8 10 Motor current in A 12 14 16 Tu = ambient temperature Ie = max. current setting of circuit breaker With DM-V15: - for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x (with or without brake control module) a DM-V15 is required on both sides. For an RS1e-x (with or without brake control module) a DM-V15 should be provided on the right. The left half of an RS1e-x is equivalent to a DM-V15 for derating. 1) Figure 3-7: Criteria for vertical installation on horizontal rails with DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x 2.4 - 16A with order number suffix -.AB4 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation Horizontal installation on vertical rails Horizontal installation is permissible for an ambient temperature up to Tu = 40C. Derating and therefore a DM-V15 is not required for high feature motor starters installed horizontally up to a temperature of Tu = 40 C. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-13 Installation Criteria for F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x Vertical installation on horizontal rails Tu 60 C Ie 50 C 40 C 30 C 3 A without DM-V15 1) 8 A without DM-V15 1) 16 A without DM-V15 1) 3 A without DM-V15 1) 8 A without DM-V15 1) 16 A with DM-V15 2) 3 A without DM-V15 1) 8 A with DM-V15 2) 16 A not permissible Ie 25 % 50 % 75 % Motor current as % of the maximum current setting Ie 100 % Tu = ambient temperature Ie = max. current setting of circuit breaker 1) without DM-V15: A DM-V15 is not necessary between the motor starters 2) With DM-V15: - A DM-V15 must be placed on the left and right in the case of a F-DS1e-x (with or without brake control module). - A DM-V15 must be placed on the right in the case of a F-RS1e-x (with or without brake control module). The left half of an F-RS1e-x counts as a DM-V15 for the purpose of derating. Figure 3-8: Criteria for vertical installation on horizontal rails with F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x Caution Above an ambient temperature of Tu 50 C, a DM-V15 must be inserted between a PM-D F PROFIsafe and an F-DS1e-x. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation Example: F-RS1e-x 2.4 ... 16 A Ie = 75 % A6 A7 A8 F-DS1e-x 2.4 ... 16 A Ie = 75 % A9 A10 F-DS1e-x 2.4 ... 8 A Ie = 90 % Terminating cover IM 151-1 HF Terminating module F-DS1e-x 0.3 ... 3 A Ie = 100 % A5 DM-V15 PM-D F PROFI safe A4 xB3 A3 A2 DM-V15 A1 DM-V15 The following sample configuration shows you when a DM-V15 spacing module is recommended. Jumper module Figure 3-9: Configuration example for derating The following criteria were taken into consideration in this example: * The ambient temperature Tu is 55C. * A3 is necessary because Tu > 50 C and A4 is an F-DS1e-x on the right of a PM-D F PROFIsafe. * A4 is loaded with 3 A (100%) and therefore a DM-V15 is not necessary. * A5 is loaded with 12 A (75%) and therefore a DM-V15 (A7) is required next to the brake control module. * A8 is loaded with 12 A (75%) and therefore a DM-V15 is required on the right (A9) and left (A7). * A10 is loaded with 7.2 A (90%) and therefore a DM-V15 is required on the left (A9). The DM-V15 to the right of A10 is not necessary because the ET 200S station is finished at this point. The following diagram shows you how to determine when a DM-V15 is necessary. Tu 60 C A5 A8 A10 A4 55 C 50 C Ie 50 % 75 % 90 % 100 % Motor current as % of the maximum current setting Ie Figure 3-10: Determining the derating for a configuration example SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-15 Installation Horizontal installation on vertical rails Horizontal installation is permissible for an ambient temperature up to Tu = 40C. Derating and therefore a DM-V15 is not required for fail-safe motor starters installed horizontally up to a temperature of Tu = 40C. Other configurations The configurations shown above can also be combined, in which case the derating factors specified above change. In these circumstances, please contact your Siemens contact person or Technical Assistance. Technical Assistance: Telephone: Fax: Email: Website: +49 (0) 911-895-5900 (8.00 am - 5.00 pm CET) +49 (0) 911-895-5907 technical-assistance@siemens.com www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/technical-assistance SIEMENS AG Technical Assistance Breslauer Str. 5 D-90766 Furth SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation 3.5 Installing terminal modules Features * Terminal modules replace the control wiring in the switch cabinet and are mechanical carriers for the function modules (e.g. the power modules and the motor starters). * With the terminal modules, you can completely prewire the switch cabinet without the power modules and motor starters being fitted. Requirements * Two rails are installed (center-to-center spacing 100 mm). * Space is left for the IM 151 interface module. Mechanical coding of the modules When the module is first inserted, the terminal module is mechanically coded to ensure that, in the event of a fault, it can only be replaced by a module with identical functions. If a brand-new module is plugged into a terminal module that is already coded, the part of the code element for the terminal module must be removed from the module beforehand. Note the configured structure when installing and identify the terminal modules using the labels (see Section 3.2). Installing terminal modules for motor starters The example below illustrates the installation of terminal modules with an installation width of 45 mm for direct starter; standard. Drawing Procedure 1 Hang the terminal module on the upper rail. Table 3-4: Installing terminal modules - example: direct starter; standard SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-17 Installation Drawing Procedure 2 Tilt the terminal module backwards into the lower rail until you hear it engage. 3 Push the terminal to the left with both hands towards the module you have already installed, keeping it straight, until you can hear it engage with the adjacent module. Table 3-4: Installing terminal modules - example: direct starter; standard (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation Removing terminal modules for motor starters Warning Switch off all the connected supply voltage! You can only remove a terminal module if there are no modules connected on the right. If necessary, you must remove all the modules on the right or move them to the side. The example below illustrates the removal of terminal modules with an installation width of 45 mm for direct starter; standard. Drawing Procedure 1 Use a screwdriver (5 mm) to push down the locking mechanism of the next module to the left. 2 With the locking mechanism of the neighboring module open, pull the module to be removed to the right parallel to the rails. Table 3-5: Removing terminal modules - example: direct starter; standard SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-19 Installation Drawing Procedure 3 Unlock the module by inserting the screwdriver in the opening of the locking mechanism and pushing the locking mechanism downward. This unlocks both the upper and lower rail. 4 With the locking mechanism depressed, tilt the module so that it comes off the lower rail. You can then remove the module from the upper rail. Table 3-5: Removing terminal modules - example: direct starter; standard (Contd.) 3.6 Inserting power modules Requirements Before inserting power modules, the following requirements must be met: * Both rails must be installed. * The terminal module for the power module must be installed. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation Mechanical coding When the modules are inserted, the corresponding terminal module is mechanically coded (two coding elements) to ensure that, in the event of a fault, it can only be replaced by a module with identical functions. You must therefore bear the configured layout in mind when you insert the modules. The illustration on the right shows the coding of a PM-D power module by way of example. Power module Incorrectly inserted code elements can be removed from the terminal module using a 3 mm screwdriver. Code elements Note If a brand-new module is plugged into a terminal module that is already coded, the part of the code element for the terminal module must be removed from the module beforehand. Terminal module Figure 3-11: Mechanical coding of terminal modules Inserting power modules Insert the power module onto the installed and prewired terminal module as shown in the drawing. Power modules can only be connected to the correct terminal modules regardless of the code element. PM-D or PM-D F1 to 4 TM-P15 S27-01 or TM-PF30 S45 Figure 3-12: Inserting power modules SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-21 Installation 3.7 Installing and removing motor starters Requirements * Both rails must be installed. * All the terminal modules for the power modules and motor starters must be installed. Note Before installation, check the socket and plug on the rear wall bus interface. It is not permissible to use any damaged sockets. The plugs must be straight and central in sequence. Note The rear wall bus must only be engaged after the power bus has been connected. Never engage both connections at the same time. Mechanical coding When the motor starters are installed, the terminal modules are mechanically coded to ensure that, in the event of a fault, they can only be replaced by modules with identical functions. If a brand-new module is plugged into a terminal module that is already coded, the part of the code element for the terminal module must be removed from the module beforehand. You must therefore bear the configured layout in mind when you insert the modules. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation 3.7.1 Standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm Installing standard motor starters * The motor starters are inserted in the installed terminal modules, whereby two "latched positions" must be observed. Depending on the position, electrical connections are established or disconnected at removal. The locking spring prevents you removing the motor starters under load. * The following table describes how the motor starters should be installed, using the example of a direct starter; standard. Drawing Procedure/Description 1 Latch piece Slide the motor starter; standard at a slight incline (see figure) from the front into the terminal module. Avoid a lateral slope. Push firmly on the lower part until contact is established with the power bus. 1 Locking spring * The motor starter; standard remains slightly inclined, and the latch piece is not engaged. * The locking spring is not yet engaged. The motor starter; standard is mechanically insecure in this position and connected only to the power bus. Table 3-6: Motor starter; standard with installation width of 45 or 90 mm: installation SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-23 Installation Drawing Procedure/Description 2 2 3 2 Press the latch piece and move the motor starter further towards the rail until the latch piece engages. The motor starter; standard is now located in the parked position. 3 Parked position * * * 4 4 5 The connection to the backplane bus is not yet established. There is no supply to the electronic components. The connection to the power bus is established. The contactors cannot respond, however, because there is no connection to the backplane bus and the electronic components and switching commands thus remain ineffective. Press the latch piece again and move the motor starter further towards the DIN rail until the latch piece engages again. The motor starter; standard is now located in the operating position. 4 5 Operating position * * The connection to the backplane bus is established. The electronic components and contactors are supplied with power. The locking spring is engaged. The locking spring prevents the motor starter from being removed when live. Locking spring Table 3-6: Motor starter; standard with installation width of 45 or 90 mm: installation (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation Removing the standard motor starter A motor starter can be removed from the terminal module during operation. The feeder must be dead, e.g. circuit breaker switched off. Before you can remove the module, the latch piece must be taken beyond both latched positions, thus interrupting the electrical connections. The locking spring prevents you removing the load feeders under load. Important If you remove more than one module from the ET 200S, the substation switches to STOP mode. Danger In version 1 of the IM 151, no modules can be removed during operation. Module replacement is only permitted when the supply of the IM 151 is switched off. The following table describes how the motor starters should be removed, using the example of a reversing starter; standard. Drawing Procedure/Description Ensure that the motor starter is switched off. 1 1 1 2 1 * Press both latches down. * Move the latch piece beyond the first latched position. The connection to the bus and the supply voltages is interrupted. The motor starter is now in its parked position, i.e. the connection to the backplane bus has been interrupted and the module is (still) in a mechanically secure position (see also Table 3-5). * Once you move the latch piece beyond the second latched position, the motor starter is released, the locking spring is disengaged and the motor starter is no longer mechanically secure. 2 2 Locking spring Table 3-7: Motor starter; standard with installation width of 45 or 90 mm: removal SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-25 Installation Drawing Procedure/Description 3 Take hold of the load feeder in both hands using the upper and lower grip recesses, and pull the motor starter out. Pull the module from the bottom in a continuous movement (approx. 30 N tensile force) at an angle out of the plug-in connection. 3 Locking spring Table 3-7: Motor starter; standard with installation width of 45 or 90 mm: removal (Contd.) Note It is advisable to inform maintenance and service personnel in detail about correct handling of the motor starters before the system is handed over to ensure that the advantages of ET 200S will be available immediately in the event of replacement. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation Electrical connections during installation and removal The figures below show the various installation and removal positions of a standard motor starter and the resultant electrical connections. Drawing Description Insertion or release position The motor starter; standard is electrically connected only to the power bus in this position. The locking spring is in the release position, and the load feeder is mechanically insecure in this position. Parked position The motor starter; standard is electrically connected only to the power bus in this position. The connection to the backplane bus is not established. The supply to the contactors is established but remains ineffective because there is no connection to the ET 200S backplane bus. In this position, the feeder is mechanically secured against falling out. Table 3-8: El. connections with installation/removal of motor starter; standard (45 or 90 mm) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-27 Installation Drawing Description Operating position The connections to the backplane bus and the supply to the electronic components and to the contactors have been established. The locking spring is engaged, which means the motor starter cannot be removed. Table 3-8: El. connections with installation/removal of motor starter; standard (45 or 90 mm) (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation 3.7.2 High feature/failsafe motor starter with installation width of 65 or 130 mm Requirements * Both rails must be installed. * All the terminal modules for the power modules and motor starters must be installed. * The safety group (SG) must be specified in the terminal modules of the failsafe motor starters before the fail-safe motor starters are installed. Specifying the safety group Only relevant for the fail-safe motor starters. One of the six safety groups can be coded for each terminal module. The terminal modules can be arranged in any order. The terminal modules are supplied coded for the SG1 safety group. Use the light gray coding connector to set the safety group. The indentation indicates the connection to which the contact of the coding connector applies. The two dark gray coding connectors do not have any contacts. To change the coding to another safety group, proceed as follows * Coding for safety group SG2. Pull the light gray coding plug (see the illustration below) from the terminal module, turn it by 180, and reinsert it. * Coding for safety groups SG3 through SG6. First pull out the dark gray coding plug for safety group SG3/4 or SG5/6. After that, insert the light grey coding plug into the corresponding position. Insert the dark gray coding plug in the free position. State on delivery Example for SG2 Example for SG5 Figure 3-13: Specifying the safety group Safety note Only one safety group can be selected for each terminal module. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-29 Installation Mechanical coding When the motor starters are installed, the terminal modules are mechanically coded to ensure that, in the event of a fault, they can only be replaced by power modules with identical functions. You must therefore bear the configured layout in mind when you insert the modules. Installing the motor starter; high feature/failsafe * The motor starters are inserted in the installed terminal modules, whereby two "latched positions" must be observed. Depending on the position, electrical connections are established or disconnected at removal. The locking hook prevents you removing the motor starters under load. * The following table describes how the motor starters should be installed, using the example of a direct starter; high feature. Drawing Procedure/Description 1 Latch piece Slide the motor starter; high feature at a slight incline (see figure) fron the front into the terminal module. Avoid a lateral slope. Push firmly on the lower part until contact is established with the power bus. 1 1 * The motor starter; high feature remains slightly inclined, and the latch piece is not engaged. * The locking hook is not yet engaged. The motor starter; high feature is mechanically insecure in this position and connected only to the power bus. Table 3-9: Installing high feature/failsafe motor starter with installation width of 65 or 130 mm SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation Drawing Procedure/Description 2 2 3 Press the latch piece and move the motor starter further towards the rail until the latch piece engages. The motor starter; high feature is now located in the parked position. 2 Parked position 3 * * * 4 4 4 5 The connection to the backplane bus is not yet established. There is no supply to the electronic components. The connection to the power bus is established. The contactors cannot respond, however, because there is no connection to the backplane bus and the electronic components and switching commands thus remain ineffective. Press the latch piece again and move the motor starter further towards the DIN rail until the latch piece engages again. The motor starter; high feature is now located in the operating position. Operating position 5 * * The connection to the backplane bus is established. The electronic components and contactors are supplied with power. The locking hook is engaged. The locking hook prevents the motor starter from being removed when live. "A" "A" Locking hook Table 3-9: Installing high feature/failsafe motor starter with installation width of 65 or 130 mm (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-31 Installation Removing the motor starter; high feature/failsafe A motor starter can be removed from the terminal module during operation. The feeder must be dead, e.g. circuit breaker switched off. Before you can remove the module, the latch piece must be taken beyond both latched positions, thus interrupting the electrical connections. The locking hook prevents you removing the load feeders under load. Important If you remove more than one module from the ET 200S, the substation switches to STOP mode. Danger In version 1 of the IM 151, no modules can be removed during operation. Module replacement is only permitted when the supply of the IM 151 is switched off. The following table describes how the motor starters should be removed, using the example of a reversing starter; high feature. Drawing Procedure/Description Ensure that the motor starter is switched off. 1 2 1 * Press both latches down. 2 * Move the latch piece beyond the first latched position. The connection to the bus and the supply voltages is interrupted. The motor starter is now in its parked position, i.e. the connection to the backplane bus has been interrupted and the module is (still) in a mechanically secure position (see also Table 3-5). * Once you move the latch piece beyond the second latched position, the motor starter is released, the locking hook is disengaged and the motor starter is no longer mechanically secure. 1 1 2 Table 3-10: Removing high feature/failsafe motor starter with installation width of 65 or 130 mm SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation Drawing Procedure/Description 3 Take hold of the load feeder in both hands using the upper and lower grip recesses, and pull the motor starter out. Pull the module from the bottom in a continuous movement (approx. 30 N tensile force) at an angle out of the plug-in connection. 3 "A" "A" Locking hook Table 3-10: Removing high feature/failsafe motor starter with installation width of 65 or 130 mm (Contd.) Note It is advisable to inform maintenance and service personnel in detail about correct handling of the motor starters before the system is handed over to ensure that the advantages of ET 200S will be available immediately in the event of replacement. Caution Check the F-DS1e-x or F-RS1e-x after the exchange (see Section 8.3, 9.3). SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-33 Installation Electrical connections during installation and removal The figures below show the various installation and removal positions of a high feature/failsafe motor starter and the resultant electrical connections. Drawing Description Insertion or release position The motor starter; high feature is electrically connected only to the power bus in this position. The locking hook is in the release position, and the load feeder is mechanically insecure in this position. Parked position The motor starter; high feature is electrically connected only to the power bus in this position. The connection to the backplane bus is not established. The supply to the contactors is established but remains ineffective because there is no connection to the ET 200S backplane bus. In this position, the feeder is mechanically secured against falling out. Table 3-11: El. connections with installation/removal of high feature/failsafe motor starter (65 or 130 mm) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-34 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation Drawing Description Operating position The connections to the backplane bus and the supply to the electronic components and to the contactors have been established. The locking hook is engaged, which means the motor starter cannot be removed. Table 3-11: El. connections with installation/removal of high feature/failsafe motor starter (65 or 130 mm) (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-35 Installation 3.8 Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover and caps Terminating module The last module to be installed in the ET 200S distributed I/O device is the terminating module. The ET 200S is ready for operation only when the terminating module is inserted. The terminating module module is included with the delivery of the IM 151interface module. More information can be found in the SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O Device manual. Terminating cover In a configuration with motor starters, a terminating cover has to be fitted to the last terminal module of a potential group if it is followed by a PM-E or a terminating module in order to ensure that open contacts are protected against dirt and that the ET 200S is "finger-proof". The terminating cover is supplied with the TM-P15 S27-01, TM-PF30 S47-B1/C1/ F1 and TM-PFX30 S47-G1 terminal modules for the power modules. Caps Warning In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the open contacts must be sealed with caps on the power bus (L1, L2, L3, N, PE) prior to commissioning, so that they are safe from touching (push the caps on firmly). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an electric shock (400 V AC). When you add to the ET 200S station, you must remove the caps. Use a 1 mm screwdriver to do this. Then replace the caps on the power bus of the new last motor starter. The caps are included in the delivery package of the terminal module for motor starters with power bus infeed and of the terminal block with PE/N infeed. If any caps are lost, replacements can be ordered using the following order number: 3RK1903-0AF20. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-36 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Installation Concluding the line of an ET 200S configuration You can conclude the installation of the ET 200S distributed I/O device with motor starters by inserting the following components: Terminating module Terminating cover Caps to cover the power bus L1, L2, L3 and PE/N Figure 3-14: Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover and caps Installing the terminating module 1. Hang the terminating module on the upper rail. 2. Tilt the terminating module backwards onto the rail until you hear it engage. 3. Move the terminating module to the left until you hear it engage with the last terminal module. Removing the terminating module 1. Use a screwdriver (5 mm) to push the locking mechanism on the last terminal module to the stop, and move the terminating module to the right. 2. Tilt the terminating module so that it comes off the rail. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-37 Installation 3.9 Labeling motor starters The labels for the ET200S motor starter, terminal and power modules can be produced simply and efficiently from STEP 7 using the S7 Smartlabel program (2XV9450-1SL03-0YX0). Further information can be found online at the following web address: https://www.industry.siemens.com/services/global/en/IT4Industry/products/ simatic_add_ons/s7_smartlabel/Pages/Default.aspx SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 3-38 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics Section Subject 4 Page 4.1 Commissioning 4-3 4.2 Control kit 4-7 4.3 Control unit 4-8 4.4 2DI COM control module 4-9 4.5 2DI LC COM control module 4-13 4.6 Configuration 4-14 4.7 Diagnostics 4-23 4.7.1 Diagnosis and monitoring through the user program 4-23 4.7.2 Diagnosis by LEDs 4-27 4.8 LED indicators 4-27 4.8.1 Diagnosis of the PM-D power module 4-27 4.8.2 Diagnosis of the PM-D F1 power module 4-28 4.8.3 Diagnosis of the PM-D F2 power module 4-29 4.8.4 Diagnosis of the PM-D F3 power module 4-30 4.8.5 Diagnosis of the PM-D F4 power module 4-31 4.8.6 Diagnosis of the PM-D F5 power module 4-32 4.8.7 Diagnosis of the PM-X connection module 4-32 4.8.8 Diagnosis of the PM-D F X1 fail-safe power/expansion module 4-33 4.8.9 Diagnosis of the F-CM fail-safe contact replicator 4-34 4.8.10 Diagnosis of the DS1-x and RS1-x motor starters; standard 4-35 4.8.11 Diagnosis of DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x motor starters; high feature F-DS1e-x and FRS1e-x fail-safe motor starters 4-36 4.8.12 Diagnosis of brake control modules xB3, xB4, xB6 4-39 4.9 Process mappings 4-40 4.9.1 Process mapping of DS1-x and RS1-x motor starters; standard 4-40 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-1 Commissioning and diagnostics Section Subject Page 4.9.2 Process mapping of DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x motor starters; high feature F-DS1e-x and FRS1e-x fail-safe motor starters 4-41 4.9.3 Process mapping of xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control modules 4-44 4.10 Motor Starter ES 4-45 4.11 High Feature motor starter with order number suffix -.AB4 4-46 4.11.1 Device replacement of HF starters -.AA3 and -.AA4 with -.AB4 starters 4-46 4.11.2 Device response during parameterization 4-46 4.11.3 Power supply for High Feature motor starter with order number suffix -.AB4 4-46 4.11.4 Configuration of High Feature motor starter with order number suffix -.AB4 4-47 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.1 Commissioning Attention It is essential that you comply with the voltage tolerance for the U2 contactor supply up to 60 C: 20.4 V to 28.8 V (does not apply to F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x). Current setting * For standard motor starters with an installation width of 45/90 mm (see Figure 4-1): Use a screwdriver to adjust the current setting for overload tripping on the scale of the circuit breaker before commissioning the motor starter. Note the two possible setting marks: - Line marking: Setting mark for the circuit breaker with reverse combination starters or spacing modules - Triangular marking: Setting mark for the circuit breaker in side-by-side installation. A Ie 360 ok Figure 4-1: Current setting Warning The adjusting knob can be rotated 360 clockwise. You can only turn it back within the setting range. * For high feature/failsafe motor starters with installation width of 65/130 mm: Parameterize the current setting via the Motor Starter ES or from STEP 7 or STEP 7+ in "Devices and power systems" SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-3 Commissioning and diagnostics External short-circuit protection Safety note External short-circuit protection If the short-circuit current at the installation position of the motor starter can exceed the rated short-circuit breaking capacity (50 kA) of the circuit breaker or starter protection switch, you must provide additional external short-circuit protection (fuse or circuit breaker). Overload tripping test Only for motor starters; standard with 45/90 mm installation width You can test overload tripping. To do this, proceed as follows: 1. Switch the toggle switch from 0 to 1. 2. Put a screwdriver in the test opening and push it to the left. Overload tripping works when the toggle switch moves from 1 to 0. Scale for set current Toggle switch of the power switch Test opening 45/90 mm installation width Figure 4-2: Overload tripping test SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics After overload or short-circuit tripping * For standard motor starters with installation width of 45/90 mm: After an overload or short-circuit release during operation, the circuit breaker must be reset. 1. Switch the toggle switch from 0 to 1. 2. Check that the contactor is working. * For high feature/failsafe motor starters with installation width of 65/130 mm: - After short-circuit tripping (knob switch of the power switch is between 0 and 1), you must turn the knob switch all the way to 0 (reset function) and then back to 1. - After overload tripping (power switch not tripped), there are two ways of resetting overload tripping: a) Using the toggle switch on the motor starter on site: Turn the toggle switch from 1 to 0 and then back from 0 to 1 within 2 seconds. b) Via remote reset: Using a rising signal at the DO 0.3 output. Disconnecting a load from the power supply By switching the toggle switch on the circuit breaker or motor circuit protector from 1 to 0, you can electrically isolate a connected load from the power supply. Wiring of the contactors with diodes not permitted The contactors of the motor starters must not be wired with diodes because Zener diodes are already integrated as induction protection and additional diodes would thus prolong the switch-off times. Reversing starters Before a change of direction, use the user program to ensure that the drive is switched to "STOP" mode and remains in stop until the motor has stopped turning. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-5 Commissioning and diagnostics Preventing unauthorized persons from switching on You can prevent the motor starter from being switched on without authorization by attaching a padlock (with a bow diameter of 3.5 to 4.5 mm) at position 0 * of the toggle switch of the circuit breaker in motor starter; standard * in the projecting tip of the power switch knob in motor starter; high feature/ failsafe O 3.5 mm to 4.5 mm Motor starter; standard Motor starter; high feature falsafe Figure 4-3: Preventing unauthorized persons from switching on This protection loses its effect if a locked motor starter is replaced by an unlocked motor starter. To ensure isolation, we therefore recommend that you remove the motor starter and affix a padlock to the terminal module. Opening for padlock to prevent installation for motor Terminal module 45 mm installation width Terminal module 65 mm installation width Figure 4-4: Lock in the terminal module preventing unauthorized persons from switching on SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.2 Control kit The control kit is only intended for motor starters; standard with installation widths 45 and 90 mm. The control kit is for the manual operation of the contactors for initial operation and for troubleshooting. Note Before connecting the control kit to the contactor or removing it again, always deenergize the motor starter in order to avoid unnecessary wear on the contacts of the contactor. The load can be switched on and off only by means of the power circuit breaker. Warning Do not use the control kit in conjunction with safety-oriented applications (with power module PM-D F1 to 5), or with motor starters together with brake control modules xB1 to xB6! SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-7 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.3 Control unit The control unit is only intended for motor starters; standard with installation widths 45 and 90 mm. The control unit is for direct drive of the contactor coils of ET 200S devices (manual control) for commissioning, servicing, and troubleshooting purposes. Mounting Set the control unit cable end up on the open coil auxiliary connections of the ET 200S contactor and press it in until seated. Warning Do not use the control unit in conjunction with safety-oriented applications (with power module PM-D F1 to 5), or with motor starters together with brake control modules xB1 to xB6! Wiring Use non-overlapping switching elements for the "manual/automatic" selector switch. The cable of the control unit is 1 m in length. Wire the control unit in accordance with the circuit diagram below. A1+ Automatic / Manual to other motor starters Manual ON Manual ON U2 24 VDC Control unit ET 200S bus AUX2 4/11 Motor starters DS... / RS... PM-D Terminal module TM-P15 S27-01 K1 A2- 5/12 K2 AUX3 Figure 4-5: Wiring diagram for control unit SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.4 2DI COM control module The 2DI COM control module is intended for high feature/failsafe motor starters of installation widths 65 and 130 mm: Note The 2DI COM control module can only be used for motor starters; high feature from order number suffixes -.AA3 or -.AB4 and failsafe motor starters. Description The 2DI COM control module has two inputs for the integration of internal control cabinet signals; these inputs can be parameterized by means of the motor starter on which the module is mounted. Each input has a green LED which indicates the status. PC interface 2 3 The signal states of the inputs are as follows: LED IN3, 4 1 Status 2 3 4 M Off Low signal Green High signal L+ 24 VDC Input 3 Input 4 Table 4-1: Signal states, control module 2DI NO or NC switching elements or 2-wire or 3-wire sensors (PNP) can be connected to the inputs. The 2DI COM control module also has a computer interface for the integration of the "Motor Starter ES" parameterization and diagnostics software (from Version 2.0). A short description of the software can be found in Section 4.10. Warning The inputs are not floating and do not have a diagnostic message for faults such as: wire break, overload and short-circuit. In the event of the fault stated, it is not possible to simultaneously recognize and execute the respective input function to be dealt with. It may therefore not be used in safety-related system sections. Safety note The 2DI COM control module can only be used in conjunction with F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x depending on the performance level (see Section 8.3 and 9.3). SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-9 Commissioning and diagnostics Parameter assignment The inputs can be parameterized independently of each other for different actions. Parameterization is described in: * 8.3.4 for direct starter; high feature/failsafe * 8.4.5 for direct soft starter; high feature * 9.3.4 for reversing starter; high feature/failsafe Installation - removal To install the 2DI COM control module, slide down the clear cover on the front of the high feature/failsafe motor starter. After that, clip the 2DI COM control module onto the motor starter. Remove the 2DI COM control module by pressing the recessed grips on each side toward each other and pulling off the high feature/failsafe motor starter. After removal, push the transparent cover up to protect the connections. Open the dust cap on the 2DI COM control module on the corresponding motor starter to insert the cable for the connection to the PC. Insert the other end of the cable in your PC in the port for the serial interface. Supply voltage The 2DI COM control module is supplied by the U1 voltage. This applies both to connected sensors and contact elements. Wiring Wire the inputs in accordance with the circuit diagram below. 2-wire U1 DI 0.7 DI 0.6 3-wire 4 L+ 3 IN4 2 IN3 1 M Figure 4-6: 2DI COM control module wiring diagram The "LOGO! PC Cable" (order no.: 6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0) is used as a connecting line between the 2DI COM control module and the computer. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics Technical specifications of the 2DI COM control module Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) (installed) 23.8 x 45 x 23.3 Weight (g) approx. 15 Module-specific data Ambient temperature operation storage Degree of protection 0 to 60 C -40 to 80 C IP20, IEC 60529 Inputs IN3 and IN4 (terminals 2 and 3) Input IN LC (terminal 1) (only with 2DI LC COM control module) Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131 Type 1 Low input current Iin <1.5 mA High input current Iin >5 mA Max. input current Input delay max. 8 to 10 mA tin approx. 10 ms Supply from U1 (terminals 1 and 4) short circuit-proof and overload-proof Operating voltage range (relative to mass U1) 20.4 to 28.8 VDC Current limitation on short-circuit against mass of U1 approx. 100 mA Assignment of the inputs Control module 2DI COM IN3 IN4 Motor starter; high feature/failsafe Input 3 (DI 0.6) Input 4 (DI 0.7) Conductor cross-sections Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) to IEC 60947 Single-wire or finely stranded (mm2) 2 x (0.14 to 1) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947 AWG cables, single- or multi-core 1 x (18 to 22) Wiring Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 1 Tightening torque (Nm) 0.4 to 0.7 Table 4-2: Technical specifications of the 2DI COM control module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-11 Commissioning and diagnostics Protective measures In case of a single high-energy pulse (surge) at the digital inputs according to IEC 61000-4-5, lightning protection elements (e.g. those manufactured by Dehn: DCO RK D 5 24 order number: 919986) are recommended (see the DP master manual and the description of the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS networks). Table 4-2: Technical specifications of the 2DI COM control module (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.5 2DI LC COM control module The control module 2DI LC COM possesses the same characteristics as the control module 2DI COM described in Section 4.4. In this section only the additional input point IN LC is described. Description The 2DI LC COM control module is suitable for motor starters with installation widths of 65 and 130 mm: PC interface * High feature with order number suffix -.AA3 (from product version E02) or from order number suffix -.AB4 * Fail-safe motor starters (revision level E05 or higher). 2 3 1 If the input point IN LC is connected to L+ 24 VDC, the motor starter is switched to "Manual Operation Local" mode. 2 3 4 L+ 24 VDC IN LC Input 3 Input 4 Regardless of the parameterized input function, IN3 (input point 3) for clockwise and IN4 (input point 4) for counterclockwise operation of the motor starter are then required. In the manual operation local mode the brake is automatically disengaged by a pending ON signal (IN3/IN4). If IN LC is open, then this module behaves like the control module 2DI COM. The parameterized input measures are performed. Warning Switching the input point IN LC while simultaneously parameterizing the input functions of the input points 3 and 4 can lead to unforeseeable motor starter states (e. g. unwanted switching on and off, if the motor starter is in the end position and then switched to the manual operation local mode). Wiring Wire the inputs in accordance with the circuit diagram below. 2-wire U1 DI 0.7 DI 0.6 3-wire 4 L+ 3 IN4 2 IN3 1 IN LC M The 3-wire ground should be connected to the ground of the potential group (e.g. PM-D). Figure 4-7: 2DI LC COM control module wiring diagram SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-13 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.6 Configuration Configuring means configuring and parameterizing the ET 200S. More information can be found in Section l 7.1 of the 'SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O Device' manual. The STEP 7 versions from which the individual modules are included are listed in the table below. Product label MLFB Brief description STEP 7 version PM-D DC24V 3RK1903-0BA00 Power module; PM-D; 2 x 24 V DC 5.0 SP3 PM-D F1 3RK1903-1BA00 Power module; emergency stop; monitored start; 2-channel 5.0 SP3 PM-D F2 3RK1903-1BB00 Power module; protective door; automatic start; 2-channel 5.0 SP3 PM-D F4 3RK1903-1BC00 Power module; expansion board of F1/2 for another potential group 5.0 SP3 PM-D F3 3RK1903-1BD00 Power module; expansion board of F1/2 for another potential group; time-delayed 5.0 SP3 PM-X 3RK1903-1CB00 Connection module for infeed contactor; external safety circuit 5.0 SP3 RS-x1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 Reversing starter; electromechanical; unfused; can be expanded (brake, local control) 5.1 xB3 DC24V/4A 3RK1903-0CE00 Brake control module 24 V DC/4A, DI 2 x 24 V DC local control 5.1 xB4 DC500V/0.7A 3RK1903-0CF00 Brake control module 500 V DC/0.7 A, DI 2 x 24 V DC local control 5.1 xB1 xB2 non-configurable, so not included in STEP 7 HW Config / STEP 7+ in "Devices and power systems"! xB5 DM-V15 DS-x1 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 Direct starter; electromechanical; unfused; can be expanded (brake, local control) 5.1 SP1 PM-D F5 3RK1903-1BE00 Power module; expansion board for F1 through 4; contact multiplier 5.1 SP1 Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics STEP 7 version Product label MLFB Brief description F-DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A high feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB13-0AA2 Safe direct starter; switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.1 SP4 F-DS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A high feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB13-0AA2 Safe direct starter; switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.1 SP4 F-DS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A high feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB13-0AA2 Safe direct starter; switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 control module 2DI (LC) COM 5.1 SP4 F-RS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB13-1AA2 Safe reversing starter; switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.1 SP4 F-RS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB13-1AA2 Safe reversing starter; switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.1 SP4 F-RS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB13-1AA2 Safe reversing starter; switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.1 SP4 F-CM 3RK1903-3CA00 Fail-safe contact replicator 5.1 SP4 PM-D F X1 3RK1903-3DA00 Fail-safe power/expansion module 5.1 SP4 1) Switching to the manual operation local mode is possible with the 2DI LC COM control module, beginning with revision level 02. Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-15 Commissioning and diagnostics STEP 7 version Product label MLFB Brief description DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB10-0AA3 Direct starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.2 DS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB10-0AA3 Direct starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.2 DS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB10-0AA3 Direct starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.2 DSS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB20-0AA3 Direct soft starter; high feature: switch electronically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/ 400V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.2 DSS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB20-0AA3 Direct soft starter; high feature: switch electronically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.2 DSS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB20-0AA3 Direct soft starter; high feature: switch electronically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.2 1) Communication possibility via the 2DI COM control module with the "Motor Starter ES" software through the front device interface. From revision level 02, switchover into "Manual Operation Local" mode possible using the 2DI LC COM control module. Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics STEP 7 version Product label MLFB Brief description RS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB10-1AA3 Reversing starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.2 RS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB10-1AA3 Reversing starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.2 RS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB10-1AA3 Reversing starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.2 1) Communication possibility via the 2DI COM control module with the "Motor Starter ES" software through the front device interface. From revision level 02, switchover into "Manual Operation Local" mode possible using the 2DI LC COM control module. Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-17 Commissioning and diagnostics STEP 7 version Product label MLFB Brief description DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB10-0AA4 Direct starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.4 DS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB10-0AA4 Direct starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.4 DS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB10-0AA4 Direct starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.4 DSS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB20-0AA4 Direct soft starter; high feature: switch electronically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.4 DSS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB20-0AA4 Direct soft starter; high feature: switch electronically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.4 DSS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB20-0AA4 Direct soft starter; high feature: switch electronically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.4 Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics STEP 7 version Product label MLFB Brief description RS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB10-1AA4 Reversing starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.4 RS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB10-1AA4 Reversing starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.4 RS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB10-1AA4 Reversing starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.4 F-DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A high feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB13-0AA4 Safe direct starter; switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.4 SP4 F-DS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A high feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB13-0AA4 Safe direct starter; switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.4 SP4 F-DS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A high feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB13-0AA4 Safe direct starter; switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.4 SP4 F-RS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB13-1AA4 Safe reversing starter; switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.4 SP4 Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-19 Commissioning and diagnostics STEP 7 version Product label MLFB Brief description F-RS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB13-1AA4 Safe reversing starter; switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.4 SP4 F-RS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB13-1AA4 Safe reversing starter; switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.4 SP4 1) Communication possibility via the 2DI COM control module with the "Motor Starter ES" software through the front device interface. From revision level 02, switchover into "Manual Operation Local" mode possible using the 2DI LC COM control module. Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics STEP 7 version Product label MLFB Brief description DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB10-0AB4 Direct starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.5 SP1 DS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB10-0AB4 Direct starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.5 SP1 DS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB10-0AB4 Direct starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.5 SP1 DSS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB20-0AB4 Direct soft starter; high feature: switch electronically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.5 SP1 DSS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB20-0AB4 Direct soft starter; high feature: switch electronically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.5 SP1 DSS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB20-0AB4 Direct soft starter; high feature: switch electronically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.5 SP1 Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-21 Commissioning and diagnostics STEP 7 version Product label MLFB Brief description RS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB10-1AB4 Reversing starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.5 SP1 RS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB10-1AB4 Reversing starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.5 SP1 RS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB10-1AB4 Reversing starter; high feature: switch mechanically; electronic UE protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A Option: Brake control module xB1 to xB6 2DI (LC) COM control module 5.5 SP1 xB6 AC400V/0.5A 3RK1903-0CK00 Brake control module AC 400 V/0.5 A, DI 2 x DC 24 V Local Control 5.5 SP1 1) Communication possibility via the 2DI COM control module with the "Motor Starter ES" software through the front device interface. From revision level 02, switchover into "Manual Operation Local" mode possible using the 2DI LC COM control module. Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.7 Diagnostics 4.7.1 Diagnosis and monitoring through the user program Diagnostics and monitoring for ET 200S motor starters take place via the user program and/or the diagnostics channel of the field bus system. For comprehensive diagnostic analysis and demo programs using STEP 5 and STEP 7, see SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O Device manual. The S7 modules FB125 and FC125 are available for diagnostic analysis in the user program. The S7 blocks and the accompanying descriptions are available as free downloads from: http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/26996747 DE: http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/5362473 http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/5362473 In the following tables you will find the respective error types and their meanings as a supplement to the channel-based diagnostics. Power module fault types Power modules PM-D PM-D F2 PM-D F3 PM-D F4 PM-D F5 F-CM 1) PM-D F1 1) 01001: Fault Meaning Module fault has occurred Remedy Replace the module 1) 1) 1) 1) PM-D PM-D F1 1) PM-D F2 1) PM-D F3 1) PM-D F4 1) PM-D F5 1) F-CM 1) PM-D F X1 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 1) PM-D F1 PM-D F2 1) PM-D PM-D PM-D PM-D PM-D Fault type 1) 1) Check whether EMERGENCY STOP was unlatched with ON circuit jumpered 10001: No supply voltage U1 or U2 not measurable or too low Correct the process wiring. Check the voltage supply 11000: Actuator shutdown Safety relay OFF Press ON button to acknowledge 11001: Safety-oriented tripping Emergency stop actuated or crossover has occurred between the cables of the emergency stop Rectify the cause of the shutdown, e.g. disengage the emergency stop or rectify crossover. 1) 1) 1) 1) Fault type is mapped correctly only as of revision level 5 of IM 151. Table 4-4: Power module fault types SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-23 Commissioning and diagnostics Expansion module fault types Expansion modules Brake control * xB3 * xB4 Fault type 00100: Fault Meaning * Brake overload Remedy Rectify overload Table 4-5: Expansion module fault types Motor starter fault types The following table applies to standard motor starters up to 5.5 kW. Motor starters Direct starter * DS-x1 Reversing starters * RS-x1 Fault type Meaning Remedy 01001: Fault * Contactor jammed or welded * Internal failure/ device fault Replace the module. Check the contactor 11000: Actuator shutdown * The circuit breaker has been tripped. * All designated faults/ asymmetry/motor blockage (additional fault entry for more detailed fault description may exist) Rectify the cause of the shutdown and reset. Check the components Table 4-6: Fault types for motor starters up to 5.5 kW SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics The following table applies for high feature/failsafe motor starters up to 7.5 kW. Motor starters Direct starter * DS1e-x, * DSS1e-x * F-DS1e-x Reversing starters * RS1e-x * F-RS1e-x Fault type Meaning/cause Remedy 00001: Short-circuit (F1) 1) * Power switch has tripped / is switched off Correct short-circuit and switch power switch back on. 00100: Overload (F4) * Thermal motor model overload 00111: Upper limit violated (F7) * Ie upper current limit violated * Allow the motor to cool down * Check the motor's current consumption * Check the set current limits 01000: Lower limit violated (F8) * Ie lower current limit violated 01001: Fault (F9) * Internal failure/device fault * Switching element defective (contactor is fused or jammed) Switch supply voltage U1 off and on; replace the motor starter if the fault persists. 10000: Parameter error (F16) * Invalid parameter value Check parameter values. * Asymmetry 11000: Actuator shutdown * Motor blocked * Residual current (F24) detected * Or in conjunction with another type of fault in this table * Cold run shutdown * Power switch has tripped / is switched off Check phases L1 to L3. Clear stalled rotor. Check main phases L1 to L3 for interruption. 11001: Safety-oriented shutdown (F25) 2) * EMERGENCY STOP Remove the cause of the emergency stop 11001: (F17) * Switching element Check A1+/A2- (PM-D) power supply missing 1) Altered response of the circuit breaker for motor starters with order number suffix -.AA3 with revision level E02 and for fail-safe motor starters with revision level E05. If the circuit breaker is switched to the status O/TRIPPED when the starter is tripped (DI 0.0 and DI 0.1 = 0) , no "short circuit" diagnosis is generated. During acceleration, a circuit breaker in the O/TRIPPED position likewise generates no "short circuit" diagnosis. If the circuit breaker is activated with the motor running (DI 0.0 and DI 0.1 = 1)(due to short circuit or operation in the O/TRIPPED position), a "short circuit" diagnosis is generated as previously. 2) Only applicable to F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x Table 4-7: Fault types for motor starters up to 7.5 kW SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-25 Commissioning and diagnostics Motor starters Direct starter * DS1e-x, * DSS1e-x * F-DS1e-x Fault type Meaning/cause Remedy 11010: External fault (F26) * Input tripping * Eliminate the external fault * Input tripping limit (withdraw from limit position, for position example) * Process mapping * Start in opposite direction of error rotation (RS1e-x only: simulta- * Actuate in only one direction of neous actuation of rotation. motor clockwise and motor counterclockwise). 00101 Overload switching element (F5) * Thermal motor type is loaded to >178 %. Shutdown occurs to protect device with parameter "thermal motor type" = alert. * For DSS1e-x startup current overshoot I>5xIe1) Reversing starters * RS1e-x * F-RS1e-x Check system configuration Increase starting time Reduce starting voltage. 1) with DSS1e-x from order number suffix: -.AB4 startup current overshoot I > 5 x Iemax applies Table 4-7: Fault types for motor starters up to 7.5 kW (Contd.) Note The group error bit is cleared when the cause of the shutdown is remedied and acknowledged using "Trip Reset" (DO 0.3 or by turning the knob from 1-0-1 on the circuit breaker). Exception - device fault: This can only be acknowledged by means of an OFF - ON supply voltage (module replacement recommended). Note (only for F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x). An emergency stop always generates a fault of type F24 and F25. An emergency stop does not have to be acknowledged on the motor starter with a "Trip Reset." SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.7.2 Diagnosis by LEDs The LEDs on the power modules and on the direct and reversing starters display the status of the relevant modules. Note If a power module (PM-D, PM-D F1 to 5, PM-D F X1, F-CM) returns a diagnostic message of the type "Error" or "Sensor or load voltage missing", the diagnostic messages of the modules downstream from the power module as far as the next power module are suppressed. 4.8 LED indicators 4.8.1 Diagnosis of the PM-D power module SF Group error Red PWR Power U1 Green CON Contactor U2 Green LEDs 1) Status/Cause/Remedy PWR CON Off Green Green Normal operation Red Green Green Group error Red Off Green No supply voltage U1 for electronic components Red Green Off No supply voltage U2 for contactors Red Off Off No supply voltages U1 and U2 SF 1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated Table 4-8: LED status and error displays on the PM-D power module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-27 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.8.2 Diagnosis of the PM-D F1 power module SF Group error Red PWR Power (electronic power supply U 1) Green CON Contactor (contactor supply U 2) Green STAT Status indicator for safety relay Red/green LEDs SF 1) Safety relay EMERGENCY STOP switch ON button Status/Cause/Remedy PWR CON STAT Off Green Green Green On Not actuated Once actuated Normal operation Red Green Green Green On 2) 2) Bus fault Red Green Green Off Off Not actuated Not actuated Safety relay switched off. Press the ON button to start. Red Green Green Red Off actuated 2) Switch-on not possible: Unlock EMERGENCY STOP. If the status LED goes red again there is a cross-circuit in the EMERGENCY STOP system (rectify the external fault) or the power module is defective. (Replace the device). Red Green Green Red Off Transition from actuated to not actuated actuated Emergency stop disengaged when ON circuit closed Red Green Green Red Off Not actuated 2) Power module defective: replace the device. Red Off Green Red Off 2) 2) No supply voltage U1 for electronics. Red Green Off 2) 2) 2) 2) No supply voltage U2 for motor starter. Red Off Off Red Off 2) 2) No supply voltages U1 and U2 1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated 2) Not relevant Table 4-9: LED status and error displays on the PM-D F1 power module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.8.3 Diagnosis of the PM-D F2 power module SF Group error Red PWR Power (electronic power supply U 1) Green CON Contactor (contactor supply U 2) Green STAT Status indicator for safety relay Red/green LEDs SF 1) Safety relay Protective door switch ON button Status/Cause/Remedy PWR CON STAT Off Green Green Green On Closed Once actuated (jumpered) Normal operation Red Green Green Green On 2) 2) Bus fault Red Green Green Off Off Closed Not actuated Safety relay switched off. Press the ON button to start. Red Green Green Red Off Open 2) Switch-on not possible: close protective doors. If the status LED goes red again there is a cross-circuit in the sensor system (rectify the external fault) or the power module is defective. (Replace the device). Red Green Green Red Off Closed 2) Power module defective: replace the device. Red Off Green Red Off 2) 2) No supply voltage U1 for electronics. Red Green Off 2) 2) 2) 2) No supply voltage U2 for motor starter. Red Off Off Red Off 2) 2) No supply voltages U1 and U2 1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated 2) Not relevant Table 4-10: LED status and error displays on the PM-D F2 power module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-29 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.8.4 Diagnosis of the PM-D F3 power module SF Group error Red PWR Power (electronic power supply U 1) Green CON Contactor (contactor supply U 2) Green STAT Status indicator for safety relay Red/green LEDs SF 1) Safety relay Status/Cause/Remedy PWR CON STAT Off Green Green Green On Normal operation Red Green Green Green On Bus fault Red Green Green Off On/off Timeout or safety relay switched off. Red Green Green Red Off Power module defective: replace the device. Red Off Green Red Off No supply voltage U1 for electronics. Red Green Off 2) 2) No supply voltage U2 for motor starter. Red Off Off Red Off No supply voltages U1 and U2 1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated 2) Not relevant Table 4-11: LED status and error displays on the PM-D F3 power module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.8.5 Diagnosis of the PM-D F4 power module SF Group error Red PWR Power (electronic power supply U 1) Green CON Contactor (contactor supply U 2) Green STAT Status indicator for safety relay Red/green LEDs SF 1) Safety relay Status/Cause/Remedy PWR CON STAT Off Green Green Green On Normal operation Red Green Green Green On Bus fault Red Green Green Off Off Safety relay switched off. Red Green Green Red Off Power module defective: replace the device. Red Off Green Red Off No supply voltage U1 for electronics. Red Green Off 2) 2) No supply voltage U2 for motor starter. Red Off Off Red Off No supply voltages U1 and U2 1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated 2) Not relevant Table 4-12: LED status and error displays on the PM-D F4 power module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-31 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.8.6 Diagnosis of the PM-D F5 power module SF Group error Red PWR Power (electronic power supply U 1) Green STAT Status indicator for safety relay Red/green LEDs SF 1) Safety relay Status/Cause/Remedy PWR STAT Off Green Green On Normal operation Red Green Green On Bus fault Red Green Off Off Safety relay switched off. Red Green Red Off Power module defective: replace the device. Red Off Red Off No supply voltage U1 for electronics. 1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated Table 4-13: LED status and error displays on the PM-D F5 power module 4.8.7 Diagnosis of the PM-X connection module LED SF Status Off Normal operation Red Group error Table 4-14: Diagnosis of the PM-X connection module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.8.8 Diagnosis of the PM-D F X1 fail-safe power/expansion module SF Group error Red PWR Power (electronic power supply U 1) Green SGx Status display for SG1 to SG6 Green LEDs SF 1) PWR Status/Cause/Remedy SGx Off Green Normal operation Red Green Bus fault Red Off No supply voltage U1 for electronics. 1) Green Emergency stop not activated Normal operation Off Emergency stop on SGx bus Bus not wired (unused) Wire break at SGx input Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated Table 4-15: Status and error displays with LEDs on the fail-safe PM-D F X1 power/expansion module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-33 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.8.9 Diagnosis of the F-CM fail-safe contact replicator SF Group error Red PWR Power (electronic power supply U 1) Green STAT Status indicator for safety relay Red/green LEDs SF 1) Safety relay Status/Cause/Remedy PWR STAT Off Green Green On Normal operation Red Green Green On Bus fault Red Green Off Off Safety relay switched off. Red Green Red Off F-CM faulty: replace the device. Red Off Red Off No supply voltage U1 for electronics. 1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated Table 4-16: Status and error displays with LEDs on the fail-safe F-CM contact replicator SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-34 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.8.10 Diagnosis of the DS1-x and RS1-x motor starters; standard SF Group error Red C-STAT Contactor status Red/green/ yellow LEDs Status/Cause/Remedy SF 1) C-STAT Operating status Off Yellow Motor on (clockwise or counterclockwise in the case of the RS1-x) Off Off Motor off Device fault Red Green Contactor jammed or coil defective (cannot be switched on) In the case of a DS1-x and RS1-x, the limit switch might be actuated in conjunction with xB3 or xB4 Red Red Contactor welded Red Off Contactor defective System fault Red Off Power switch tripped, contactor off Red Yellow Power switch tripped, contactor on Group error via bus Red 1) Off/yellow Header module sets group error Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated Table 4-17: Status and error displays via LEDs on the motor starters; standard (5.5 kW) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-35 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.8.11 Diagnosis of DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x motor starters; high feature F-DS1e-x and FRS1e-x fail-safe motor starters Red Group error SF Red/ green/ yellow Contactor status C-STAT Green Safety group SGx DEVICE Device status Red/ green/ yellow (nur bei F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) LEDs SF 1) Status/Cause/Remedy C-STAT Device Operating status Control by bus Off Yellow Green Motor on (clockwise or counterclockwise in the case of the RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x) Off Off Flashing green 2) No startup parameters received Off Off Green Motor off Off Flickering green 2) Green Shutdown via input action quick stop Off Off Flickering green 5) Energy-saving mode active 4) 4) Manual operation local Control via 2DI COM/ -2DI LC COM control modules Off Flickering yellow 2) Green Motor on (clockwise or counterclockwise in the case of the RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x) Off Flickering green 2) Green Motor off Off Flashing green 3) Green Lost connection in manual operating mode 4) Soft starting/coasting down (only with DSS1e-x) Off 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Flashing yellow 3) Green Motor is in soft start Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated Flicker frequency: 8 to 10 Hz Flash frequency: 0.5 Hz Display/function only from order number suffix: -.AB4 Flash sequence: 0.25 s on / 1.75 s from unique flashing rhythm for power-saving mode Table 4-18: LED status and error displays for DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-36 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics Status/Cause/Remedy LEDs SF 1) C-STAT Device Group error Category: Device fault Red Red Red Current flow without switch-on command (e.g. contactor welded, connection through thyristor) Safety shutdown due to faults in the fail-safe area Red Off Red Defective electronics, self test error (e.g. contactor actuation defective, communication fault) Fault in the fail-safe area (defective electronic component) Category: System fault Red Green Yellow No current flow despite switch-on command (residual current detected) (e.g. contactor jammed, coil defective, no 400 V incoming supply, no load connected) Red Off Yellow Power switch tripped Overload, thermal motor model Overload, switching element Motor blocked Asymmetry Current limit violated Shutdown on account of input action (e.g.: end position shutdown through xB3, 4 or 2DI COM/2DI LC COM control module) Process mapping error Faulty parameterization Safety shutdown (SGx/U2 missing) Switching element power supply missing Cold run shutdown 4) Off Off Off Electronics supply voltage missing Red Off Off Electronics power supply too low General warning Category: System fault Off -.AA3: Off -.AA4 and -.AB4: Green Yellow Flashing yellow 2) * No current flow despite switch-on command (residual current detected) (e.g. contactor jammed, coil defective, no 400 V incoming supply, no load connected) Flashing yellow 2) * * * Thermal motor model overload Asymmetry Current range violation Group warning regarding input action (e. g. via 2DI COM/ -2DI LC COM control modules) Switching element power supply missing Power switch tripped/switched off Maintenance timer limit value exceeded 4) * * * 1) 2) 3) 4) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated Flash frequency: 0.5 Hz Flicker frequency: 8 to 10 Hz Display/function only from order number suffix: -.AB4 Table 4-18: LED status and error displays for DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-37 Commissioning and diagnostics Only for F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x LEDs Status/Cause/Remedy SGx Off not parameterized and EMERGENCY STOP on mechanically selected rail Flashing green 1) no EMERGENCY STOP and not configured or EMERGENCY STOP and configured Green No EMERGENCY STOP and configured 1) Flash frequency: 0.5 Hz Table 4-19: LED status and error displays for F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x From order number suffix -.AA4, the following applies for the self test after POWER ON: LEDs SF Red C-STAT Yellow Device Yellow SGx Running light Note If two different SGx LEDs are flashing, the configuration does not correspond to the mechanically selected SG bus. Please check the mechanical selection or configuration. Running light over all SGx LEDs: Error in decoder for SG bus. Remedy: replace the motor starter SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-38 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.8.12 Diagnosis of brake control modules xB3, xB4, xB6 SF Group error Red 2 Input limit switch, clockwise rotation Green 6 Input limit switch, counterclockwise rotation Green STAT Circuit state of brake Yellow LEDs SF 1) Status/Cause/Remedy 2 6 STAT Off Green Green Off Limit switch 4) not activated Brake is active, motor braked Off Green Green Yellow Limit switch 4) not activated Brake released Off Off Green Off Limit switch 4) for clockwise rotation activated, brake active motor braked Off Green Off Off Limit switch 4) for counterclockwise rotation activated, brake active motor braked Red x 2) x 2) Yellow Brake overload Motor braked 5) Red x 2) x 2) 3) Bus fault 1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated 2) Circuit state is irrelevant 3) Depending on the parameterization in the motor starter (for response in case of CPU/master STOP, see Section 8.2.2, 8.3.4, 8.4.5, 9.2.2, and 9.3.4) 4) With normally closed contact function 5) does not apply with xB6 Table 4-20: Status and error displays via LEDs for xB3, xB4, xB6 Note The brake control modules xB1, xB2 and xB5 are not active modules and cannot therefore provide diagnostics, i.e. they cannot be configured in the control either. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-39 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.9 Process mappings 4.9.1 Process mapping of DS1-x and RS1-x motor starters; standard Input signals DI 0.0 Readiness for operation DI 0.1 Return message from contactor 0 Contactor jammed or fused (device fault) 0 Off 1 Ready for operation, no problems 1 On (clockwise/counterclockwise rotation in the case of RS-x 1) DI 0.2 Circuit breaker DI 0.3 Not set 0 Switched on (ON) 1 Tripped (OFF) Output signals for DS1-x and RS1-x DO 0.0 Signal to contactor DO 0.1 Signal to contactor (RS1-x only) 0 Motor off Clockwise rotation off (in case of RS1-x) 0 Counterclockwise rotation off (only RS1-x) 1 Motor on Clockwise rotation on (in case of RS1-x) 1 Counterclockwise rotation on (only RS1-x) DO 0.2 Drive for expansion module (e.g. brake control) DO 0.3 Not set 0 No drive (e.g. brake control - brake active - motor braked) 1 Drive (e.g. brake control - brake released - motor unbraked) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-40 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.9.2 Process mapping of DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x motor starters; high feature F-DS1e-x and FRS1e-x fail-safe motor starters Input signals DI 0.0 Ready (automatic) 0 Starter cannot be operated by host/PLC 1 Starter can be operated by host DI 0.1 Motor on 0 Off 1 On (clockwise/counterclockwise rotation) DI 0.2 Group error 1) DI 1.0 Bit 0 DI 1.1 No faults 1 Fault DI 0.3 General warning 0 No warning 1 Warning DI 0.4 Input 1 2) 0 4) Motor current Iact 5) Bit 1 DI 1.2 (If one or more faults described in Table 4-7 occur, "Group error" is reported irrespective of whether the "Group diagnosis" parameter (see Section 8.3.4, 8.4.5, and 9.3.4) is set to "Disable" or "Enable"). 0 Motor current Iact 5) Motor current Iact 5) Bit 2 DI 1.3 Motor current Iact 5) Bit 3 DI 1.4 Motor current Iact 5) Bit 4 1 DI 0.5 Input 2 2) 0 4) DI 1.5 Motor current Iact 5) Bit 5 1 DI 0.6 0 Input 3 3) DI 1.6 Manual operation local 4) 0 No manual operation local 1 1 Manual operation local DI 0.7 Input 4 3) DI 1.7 Ramp operation (for soft starter) 0 4) 0 Not active 1 1 Active 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Signal is 1 if the motor current is >18.75% of the set rated current From the expansion module, e.g. brake control xB3,4 (optional) From 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module (optional) See following Section "Input behavior" See Section 10.3 For parameter description see Section 10 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-41 Commissioning and diagnostics Input behavior Inputs 1 to 4 of the fail-safe F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x motor starters behave in accordance with the motor starter profile of the PNO (PROFIBUS User Organization). Inputs 1 to 4 on the DS1e-x, DSS1e-x and RS1e-x motor starter; high feature with order number suffixes -.AA2 up to revision level E03 respond differently than do order number suffixes -.AA2 from revision level E04 and order number suffix -.AA3 and order number suffix -.AB4 when parameterizing NC function in process mapping of the inputs (PII). There is no variation in behavior for the parameterization of the inputs for the normally open contact function. The table below presents an overview of the differences: Input parameterized for With order number suffix -.AA2 and revision level up to E03 NO Not active With order number suffix -.AA2 and revision level from E04 or order number suffix -.AA3 or order number suffix -.AA4 or order number suffix -.AB4 Active LED 1 0 PII NC Not active Not active Active Active LED PII 1 0 1 0 Table 4-21: Input behavior Caution When replacing a motor starter with revision level up to E03 with order number suffix -.AA2 with a motor starter with revision level from E04 and order number suffix -.AA2; -.AA3 or -.AB4 , care should be taken in the PLC user program because of the different behavior of an input when parameterizing NC function. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-42 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics Output signals DO 0.0 Motor cw 0 Motor off DO 1.0 Not used 1 Motor on DO 0.1 Motor ccw (for RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) DO 1.1 Not used 0 Motor off 1 Motor on DO 0.2 Drive for expansion module (e.g. brake control) DO 1.2 Not used 0 No drive (e.g. brake control - brake active - motor braked) 1 Drive (e.g. brake control - brake released - motor unbraked) DO 0.3 Trip Reset (edge 0 > 1) DO 1.3 Not used 0 Trip Reset inactive 1 Trip Reset active DO 0.4 Emergency start 0 Not active DO 1.4 Not used 1 Active DO 0.5 Self-test (edge 0 > 1) (F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x only) DO 1.5 Not used 0 Not active 1 Active DO 0.6 Not used DO 1.6 Not used DO 0.7 Not used DO 1.7 Quick stop lock (from order number suffixes: .AB4) 0 not activated 1 activated SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-43 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.9.3 Process mapping of xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control modules Input signals DI 0.0 Input 1 DI 0.1 Input 2 0 No current flow 0 No current flow 1 Current flow present 1 Current flow present Output signals DO 0.0 Reserved DO 0.1 Reserved 0 - 0 - 1 - 1 - SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-44 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.10 Motor Starter ES Features The "Motor Starter ES" diagnostics and commissioning tool (version 2.0 and above) offers: * Structured and tool-supported configuration of low-voltage switching devices * Quick diagnosis Local commissioning and monitoring on site such as: * Parameter assignment during operation of the programmable controller and control system * Observation * Diagnostics and testing * Factory setting * Read individual phase currents as direct values * Residual current detection * A parameterization block can be set * Integrated online help * Read statistics and measured values Application The "Motor Starter ES" diagnostic and commissioning tool is suitable for the following motor starters: * High feature with order number suffixes -.AA3 * High feature with order number suffixes .AA4 * High feature with order number suffixes -.AB4 (from software motor starter ES 2007 + SP4) * Fail-safe motor starters: The connection between the PC or programming device and the motor starter is set up using a LOGO! PC cable and 2DI COM/2DI LC COM control module (see Section 4.4/4.5 for a description) that is installed on the corresponding motor starter. You can find additional information on the software in the online help. Order numbers You will require the following order numbers: * LOGO! PC cable: 6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0 * The diagnostic and commissioning tool "Motor Starter ES": - Basic package, Floating License 3ZS1310-4CC10-0YA5 - Standard package, Floating License 3ZS1310-5CC10-0YA5 - Premium package, Floating License 3ZS1310-6CC10-0YA5 * 2DI COM control module: 3RK1903-0CH10 or 2DI LC COM control module: 3RK1903-0CH20 Note When using the high feature starter -.AB4 with Motor Starter ES and a STEP 7, special diagnosis is not possible for an online diagnosis. The diagnosis can be carried out using Motor Starter ES. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-45 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.11 High Feature motor starter with order number suffix -.AB4 4.11.1 Device replacement of HF starters -.AA3 and -.AA4 with -.AB4 starters The new motor starters (-.AB4) are backwards-compatible, i.e. when replacement is required (old -.AA3 or -.AA4 starters), they are replaced with new starters with no S7 re-configuration or modification of the user program), the new starters runs in DPV0 operation with 12 bytes of parameter data and can be operated like the replaced unit in terms of data technology. For active use of the newly integrated DPV1 functionality, the new starter must be re-configured on the control. In the startup, the following differences in the telegram length parameter data are generated: Motor starter; high feature with order number suffixes -.AA3 12 bytes Motor starter; high feature with order number suffixes -.AA4 12 bytes Motor starter; high feature with order number suffixes -.AB4 22 Byte (required due to DPV1 support) Note If a -.AA3 starter is replaced by a -.AB4 starter, a change in the device response is generated with power switch OFF (see Section 10.7.3, table 10-18). 4.11.2 Device response during parameterization With a DPV0 start-up, the parameter values of all parameters not accessible via DPV0. This has the advantage that a full parameterization previously carried out using the DS131 (via DPV1 start-up mode, C2 channel or Motor Starter ES) is effective apart from the DPV0 part (= differential parameterization). If backup of all DS131 parameters against overwriting in the new startup operating state is desired, this can be achieved by setting a parameter lock (command). A basic factory setting can be carried out directly on the device with motor starters; high feature with order number suffixes -.AB4 (see Section 10.18). 4.11.3 Power supply for High Feature motor starter with order number suffix -.AB4 Note Motor starters; high feature with order number suffix -.AB4 that are not integrated via GSD/GSDML into the ET200S station use extended start-up data records To ensure that the motor starters; high feature are automatically assigned the extended start-up data records on the re-start of the ET200S station, the electronics power supply (U1 of the PM-D module) of the motor starter; high feature are supplied from the same voltage source as the interface module (header module). SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-46 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.11.4 Configuration of High Feature motor starter with order number suffix -.AB4 4.11.4.1 Configuration and parameterization with STEP When configuring the motor starter via STEP 7, the complete parameterization is set in hardware config and automatically sent to the motor starters. The following interface modules support the complete parameterization of the motor starters: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 151-1AA04-0AB0 151-1AA05-0AB0 151-1AB05-0AB0 151-1BA02-0AB0 151-7AA20-0AB0 151-7FA20-0AB0 151-3AA23-0AB0 V6.1 151-3AA23-0AB0 V7.0 151-3BA23-0AB0 V6.1 151-3BA23-0AB0 V7.0 151-3BB23-0AB0 V6.1 151-3BB23-0AB0 V7.0 151-8AB00-0AB0 151-8FB00-0AB0 151-8AB01-0AB0 151-8FB01-0AB0 Table 4-22: Interface modules with support of the complete parameterization scope On interface modules that do not support the complete parameterization scope of the motor starters, a motor starter; high feature with order number suffix .AB4 must be configured as motor starter; high feature with order number suffix -.AA4. For example: a 3RK1301-0AB10-0AB4 must be configured as 3RK1301-0AB100AA4 Note In the following cases, the full scope of the parameters is reduced as a function of the system by the calculation tool to the standard parameters: - Activated DPV0 alarm mode (for PROFIBUS IMs) - Activated option handling (for PROFIBUS IMs) - For configuring via GSD/GSDML SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-47 Commissioning and diagnostics 4.11.4.2 Configuration and parameterization with GSD/GSDML When configuring the motor starter with GSD/GSDML, only the default parameters are available. Setting the parameter "Wait for startup data records" means that it is possible to send the complete parameterization scope to the starter as startup data records from the user program. This applies in particular to field bus masters from other manufacturers. For complete startup parameterization, multiple parameter data records are required. If associated data records are to be sent for the startup, the list data set DS128 must be sent to the starter first. List data set DS128 must contain the data record numbers for all data records to be sent to the starter. Layout of the DS128: Byte Meaning Value 0 Coordination 32 1 ... 6 Reserved 0 ... 6 7 Number of startup data records 0 8 ... 13 DS131: DS134: DS165: DS232: DS233: DS234: 131 134 165 232 14 ... 27 Device parameters (see Section A.16) Maintenance (see Section A.17) Comment (see Section A.18) Equipment identifier (see Section A.19.2) Installation (see Section A.19.3) Description (see Section A.19.4) Reserved 233 234 0 The startup data records must be written to the device in the sequence as listed in the data record 128 (bytes 8 ... 13). The number of startup data records can vary between one and six data records. The time between sending the individual startup data records must not exceed 5 seconds. If no list data record (DS128) is used, the device accepts each data record individually. This also occurs with an empty DS128 (number of data records = 0). After receiving the specified data records, the motor starter is ready for operation and can be operated via the control. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 4-48 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 General technical specifications Section Subject 5 Page 5.1 Shipping and storage conditions 5-2 5.2 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions 5-3 5.3 Electromagnetic compatibility 5-4 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 5-1 General technical specifications 5.1 Shipping and storage conditions Shipping and storage conditions The motor starters fulfill the requirements of IEC 61131, part 2 in respect of shipping and storage conditions. The following information applies to modules that are shipped and stored in their original packaging. Type of condition Permissible range Free fall 0.35 m Temperature from -40 C to +70 C Temperature variation 20 K/h Air pressure from 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to an altitude of -1000 to 3500 m) Relative humidity from 5 to 95 %, without condensation Insulation resistance Circuits with rated voltage Ue against other circuits or earth Test voltage in accordance with IEC 61131, part 2 0 V < Ue 50 V 500 VDC 300 V < Ue 600 V 2.6 kVDC to ground SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 5-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 General technical specifications 5.2 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions Installation position The preferred installation position is horizontal on a vertical wall. to do this, please also observe the information in Section 3.4 'Derating'. Mechanical environmental conditions Oscillations tested in accordance with IEC 60068, part 2-6 (sine) * * Oscillation type: Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave a minute - 10 Hz f 58 Hz Constant amplitude: 0.15 mm - 58 Hz f 150 Hz Constant acceleration: 2 g Oscillation time: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of the 3 axes arranged vertically in relation to each other Shock tested in accordance with IEC 60068, part 2-27 (right angle) * * * Type of shock: Intensity of shock: Direction of shock: Half sine 5 g peak value, 11 ms duration 3 shocks in the +/- directions in each of the 3 axes arranged vertically in relation to each other Climatic environmental conditions Betriebstemperatur Temperature variation 0C to 60C, from +40C with derating (See Section 3.4 'Derating') Permissible rated current Relative humidity from 5 to 95 % Air pressure from 1080 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of -1000 to 2000 m Contaminant concentration SO2 : < 0.5 ppm rel. humidity < 60 %, no condensation Test: 10 ppm; 4 days H2S: < 0.1 ppm rel. humidity < 60 %, no condensation 1 ppm; 4 days SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 5-3 General technical specifications 5.3 Electromagnetic compatibility Definition of "EMC" Electromagnetic compatibility is the capability of an electrical device to work satisfactorily in an electromagnetic environment without influencing the environment. ET 200S motor starters and their modules also fulfil the requirements of the EMC Directive of the European Single Market. The prerequisite for this is that the ET 200S distributed I/O device meets the requirements and guidelines regarding the electrical structure. Pulse-shaped disturbance variables The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the fail-safe modules in comparison with pulse-shaped disturbance variables. Pulse-shaped disturbance variable Corresponds to degree of severity Tested with Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000-4-4 8 kV 4 kV 3 (air discharge) 3 (contact discharge) Burst pulse (fast, transient disturbance variables) according to IEC 61000-4-4. 2 kV (supply line) 1 kV 3 3 High-energy individual pulse (surge) according to IEC 61000-4-5. For degrees of severity 2 and 3, an external safety circuit is required (see paragraph below). * Asymmetrical coupling 2 kV (supply line) 2 kV (signal line/data line) * Asymmetrical coupling 1 kV (supply line) 1 kV (signal line/data line) 3 Sinusoidal disturbance variables The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200S motor starters and their respective modules in comparison with sinusoidal disturbance variables. * HF irradiation according to IEC 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic HF field, amplitude-modulated 80 to 1000 MHz, 1.4 to 3 GHz 10 V/m 80% AM (1 kHz) HF decoupling according to IEC 61000-4-6 0.15 MHz to 80 MHz 10 Veff unmodulated 80% AM (1 kHz) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 5-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 General technical specifications Emission of radio interference Emitted interference of electromagnetic fields according to EN 55011/CISPR 11: limit value class A, Group 1 (measured at a distance of 10 m). Frequency Emitted interference from 30 to 230 MHz < 40 dB (V/m) Q from 30 to 230 MHz < 47 dB (V/m) Q Protecting the ET 200S motor starters from overvoltage If your plant requires protection from overvoltage, an external safety circuit (surge filter) should be placed upstream of the electronics/contactor supply of the terminal modules to guarantee the surge resistance of the ET 200S motor starters. Note Lightning protection measures always require an individual assessment of the plant as a whole. An almost complete protection from overvoltage can only be achieved, however, when the entire surrounding building has been designed for protection against overvoltage. In particular, this includes applying structural measures to the building right from the planning stage. For comprehensive protection from overvoltage, get in touch with your Siemens contact person or a company that specializes in lightning protection. Fail-safe modules/motor starters Fail-safe modules/motor starters were additionally tested according to the IEC 61326-3-1 and IEC 62061 standards. Explosion protection The ET 200S Standard starters (3RK1301-xxB00-xAA2) have ATEX approval in accordance with EU Directive 94/9/EC. They are suitable for protecting motors of the "Increased Safety e" type of protection. The EC type test certificate for Category (2) G/D is available. It has the number DMT 02 ATEX F OO1. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 5-5 General technical specifications SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 5-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6 Terminal modules Section Subject Page 6.1 Assignment of the terminal modules 6-2 6.2 TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-D power module 6-4 6.3 Terminal modules for motor starters 6-6 6.3.1 TM-DS45 terminal modules for the DS1-x direct starter; standard 6-6 6.3.2 TM-DS65 terminal modules for DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature 6-7 6.3.3 TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters 6-8 6.3.4 Technical specifications, TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65 6-9 6.3.5 TM-RS90 terminal modules for RS1-x reversing starter; standard 6-10 6.3.6 TM-RS130 terminal modules for RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature 6-11 6.3.7 TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters 6-12 6.3.8 Technical specifications - TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130 6-13 6.4 Power bus 6-14 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6-1 Terminal modules 6.1 Assignment of the terminal modules The following tables show which power modules, motor starters, expansion modules, and fail-safe modules you can use with the various terminal modules. You can find information on the terminal modules in the following sections: * Safety-integrated systems in Section 11 * Section 12 for expansion modules such as the brake control module * Fail-safe modules in Section 13 Power modules Terminal modules TM-P15 S27-01 TM-PF30 S47 TM-X15 S27-01 ... -B0 ... -B1 ... -C0 ... -C1 ... -D0 -1AA10 -1AA00 -1AC10 -1AC00 -1AD10 PM-D F1 X X PM-D F2 X X PM-D F3 X X PM-D F4 X X 3RK1903 PM-D -0AA00 -1AB00 X PM-D F5 PM-X X X Table 6-1: Assignment of the terminal modules for power modules SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 6-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Terminal modules Motor starters 3RK1903 DS1-x direct starter; standard Terminal modules TM-DS45 -S32 TM-RS90 -S32 TM-DS65 -S32 TM-RS130 -S32 TM-DS45 -S31 TM-RS90 -S31 TM-DS65 -S31 TM-RS130 -S31 -0AB00 -0AB10 -0AC00 -0AC10 -0AK00 -0AK10 -0AL00 -0AL10 X DS1e-x direct starter; high feature X DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature X RS1-x reversing starter; standard X RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature X Table 6-2: Assignment of the terminal modules for motor starters Fail-safe modules Terminal modules TM-FDS65 TM-FRS130 TM-PFX30 TM-FCM30 -S32 -S32 S47-G1 S47 TM-FDS65 TM-FRS130 TM-PFX30 -S31 -S31 S47-G0 3RK1903 Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter -3AC00 -3AC10 -3AD00 -3AD10 -3AE00 -3AE10 -3AB10 X X PM-D F X1 power/expansion module F-CM contact replicator X X PM-D F PROFIsafe power module See the "ET 200S Distributed I/O Devcie for Fail-Safe Modules." Table 6-3: Assignment of the terminal modules for fail-safe modules SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6-3 Terminal modules 6.2 TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-D power module Features * The terminal module consists of a support and a terminal block. * TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PMD power module * Connection by screw-type terminal * Prewiring of the terminal module * AUX1 cable fed through without terminals Terminal block Support Color coding labels 1. You can apply the color coding labels in the opening provided next to the terminal directly from the strip. 2. Push the color coding labels onto the terminal module with your finger. Looping the potentials through Terminals 1/8, 2/9, 4/11, 5/12, 6/13 and 7/14 are bridged in the terminal module and can be used to loop the potentials through. Terminal assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module: View Terminal Meaning 1/8 L+ U1: Voltage supply for electronic components URATED = 24 V DC 1 8 2/9 M 2 9 4/11 A1+ 5/12 A2- 6/13 AUX2 For safety-integrated systems, see Section 11.6.6 For safety-integrated systems, see Section 11.6.6 Fed through without terminals 4 1 1 5 1 2 7/14 AUX3 6 1 3 - AUX1 7 1 4 U2: Voltage supply for contactor URATED = 24 V DC Table 6-4: Terminal assignment of the TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for the PM-D power module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 6-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Terminal modules Note on power supply of motor starters; high feature with order number suffix -.AB4 Motor starters; high feature with order number suffix -.AB4 that are not integrated via GSD/GSDML into the ET200S station use extended start-up data records To ensure that the motor starters; high feature are automatically assigned the extended start-up data records on the re-start of the ET200S station, the electronics power supply (U1 of the PM-D module) of the motor starter; high feature are supplied from the same voltage source as the interface module (header module). Technical specifications - TM-P15 S27-01 Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 15 x 196.5 x 102 Depth with power module (mm) 117.5 Weight (g) approx. 175 Insulation voltages and rated currents Insulation voltage 500 V Rated operating voltage 24 VDC Rated operating current 10 A Conductor cross-sections Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) to IEC 60947 1 x 2.5 Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947 AWG cables, single- or multi-core 1 x (18 to 22) Wiring Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 1 Tightening torque (Nm) 0.4 to 0.7 Table 6-5: Technical specifications - TM-P15 S27-01 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6-5 Terminal modules 6.3 Terminal modules for motor starters 6.3.1 TM-DS45 terminal modules for the DS1-x direct starter; standard Features * TM-DS45... terminal modules for the DS1-x direct starter; standard - with TM-DS45 S32 power bus infeed - with TM-DS45 S31 power bus throughfeed * * * * Connection by screw-type terminals Prewiring possible AUX1 cable fed through without terminals Expansion possible with PE/N terminal block TM-DS45 terminal modules To load max. 5.5 kW / 12 A -S 32 Infeed max. 40 A 31 -S U1 supply voltage for electronics L2 AUX1 U2 supply voltage for contactors L3 L1 Coding N Terminal block for power bus Terminal blocks PE/N PE Warning In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the open contacts must be sealed with caps on the power bus (L1, L2, L3, N, PE) prior to commissioning, so that they are safe from touching (push the caps on firmly). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an electric shock (400 V AC). Figure 6-1: TM-DS45 terminal modules for the DS1-x direct starter; standard Important Install the PE/N terminal blocks before connecting the terminal modules for motor starters. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 6-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Terminal modules 6.3.2 TM-DS65 terminal modules for DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature Features * TM-DS65... terminal modules for DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature - with TM-DS65 S32 power bus infeed - with TM-DS65 S31 power bus throughfeed * * * * * Connection by screw-type terminals Prewiring possible AUX1 cable fed through without terminals Expansion possible with PE/N terminal block Fail-safe-kit functionality is integrated TM-DS65 terminal modules U1 supply voltage for electronics To load max. 7.5 kW / 16 A 32 -S Infeed max. 50 A 31 -S AUX1 L2 RF1, 2 U2 supply voltage for contactors L3 AUX2, 3 Coding L1 N Terminal blocks PE/N Terminal block for power bus PE Warning In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the open contacts must be sealed with caps on the power bus (L1, L2, L3, N, PE) prior to commissioning, so that they are safe from touching (push the caps on firmly). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an electric shock (400 V AC). Figure 6-2: TM-DS65 terminal modules for DS1e-x direct starter and DSS1e-x soft starter; high feature Important Install the PE/N terminal blocks before connecting the terminal modules for motor starters. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6-7 Terminal modules 6.3.3 TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters Features * TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters - with TM-FDS65 S32 power bus infeed - with TM-FDS65 S31 power bus throughfeed * * * * * * Connection by screw-type terminals Prewiring possible AUX1 cable fed through without terminals Coding connector for SG1 to SG6 Expansion possible with PE/N terminal block The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips. TM-FDS65 terminal modules Coding connector for SG1 to SG6 To load max. 7.5 kW / 16 A U1 supply voltage for electronics -S 32 Infeed max. 50 A 31 -S AUX1 SG1/2 L2 SG3/4 SG5/6 L3 Coding L1 N Terminal blocks PE/N Terminal block for power bus PE Warning In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the open contacts must be sealed with caps on the power bus (L1, L2, L3, N, PE) prior to commissioning, so that they are safe from touching (push the caps on firmly). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an electric shock (400 V AC). Figure 6-3: TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters Important Install the PE/N terminal blocks before connecting the terminal modules for motor starters. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 6-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Terminal modules 6.3.4 Technical specifications, TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65 Dimensions and weight TM-DS45 TM-DS65/TM-FDS65 Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 45 x 264 x 100 65 x 290 x 100 Height with PE/N terminal block (mm) 306 332 Depth with motor starter (mm) 127 150 Depth with motor starter and fail-safe kit (safety-integrated system) (mm) 152 - Depth with motor starter and 2DI COM control module (mm) - 173 Weight (g) approx. 305 approx. 400 Shock protection Type of protection according to IEC 60529 IP20, (IP00 im Anschlussraum von L1 - L3, T1 - T3, N und PE) Rated voltages, currents and frequencies for the power bus Rated insulation voltage Ui 690 V Rated operating voltage Ue 500 V AC Rated impulse strength Uimp 6 kV Rated operating current Ie Rated frequency 40 A 50 A 50/60 Hz Conductor cross-sections Single-core (mm2) 1 x 10 2 x (1 to 2.5) or 2 x (2.5 to 6) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) 2 x (1 to 2.5 ) or 2 x (2.5 to 6) in acc. with IEC 60947 AWG cables, single- or multi-core 2 x (14 to 10) With 3-phase feed-in terminal, if necessary Single-core or multi-core (mm2) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) AWG cables, single- or multi-core 1 x 2.5 to 25 1 x 2.5 to 25 1 x 12 to 4 Wiring Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 2 and Pozidriv 2 Tightening torque (Nm) 2.0 to 2.5 Table 6-6: Technical specifications - TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6-9 Terminal modules 6.3.5 TM-RS90 terminal modules for RS1-x reversing starter; standard Features * TM-RS90... terminal modules for RS1-x reversing starter; standard - with TM-RS90 S32 power bus infeed - with TM-RS90 S31 power bus throughfeed * * * * Connection by screw-type terminal Prewiring possible AUX1 cable fed through without terminals Expansion possible with two PE/N terminal blocks TM-RS90 terminal modules To load max. 5.5 kW / 12 A 3 -S 2 -S 31 Infeed max. 40 A L2 PE/N terminal block L3 L1 U1 supply voltage for electronics AUX1 U2 supply voltage for contactor Coding N PE Terminal block for power bus Warning In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the open contacts must be sealed with caps on the power bus (L1, L2, L3, N, PE) prior to commissioning, so that they are safe from touching (push the caps on firmly). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an electric shock (400 V AC). Figure 6-4: TM-RS90 terminal modules for RS1-x reversing starter; standard Important Install the PE/N terminal blocks before connecting the terminal modules for motor starters. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 6-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Terminal modules 6.3.6 TM-RS130 terminal modules for RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature Features * TM-RS130... terminal modules for RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature - with TM-RS130 S32 power bus infeed - with TM-RS130 S31 power bus throughfeed * * * * * Connection by screw-type terminal Prewiring possible AUX1 cable fed through without terminals Expansion possible with two PE/N terminal blocks Fail-safe-kit functionality is integrated TM-RS130 terminal modules To load max. 7.5 kW / 16 A -S 32 U1 supply voltage for electronics -S 31 AUX1 Infeed max. 50 A L2 L3 L1 RF1, 2 U2 supply voltage for contactor AUX2, 3 Coding N Terminal blocks PE/N Terminal block for power bus PE Warning In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the open contacts must be sealed with caps on the power bus (L1, L2, L3, N, PE) prior to commissioning, so that they are safe from touching (push the caps on firmly). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an electric shock (400 V AC). Figure 6-5: TM-RS130 terminal modules for RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature Important Install the PE/N terminal blocks before connecting the terminal modules for motor starters. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6-11 Terminal modules 6.3.7 TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters Features * TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters - with TM-FRS130 S32 power bus infeed - with TM-FRS130 S31 power bus throughfeed * * * * * * Connection by screw-type terminal Prewiring possible AUX1 cable fed through without terminals Coding connector for SG1 to SG6 Expansion possible with two PE/N terminal blocks The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips. TM-FRS130 terminal modules Coding connector for SG1 to SG6 To load max. 7.5 kW / 16 A -S 32 U1 supply voltage for electronics -S 31 AUX1 Infeed max. 50 A L2 SG1/2 SG3/4 L3 L1 SG5/6 Coding N Terminal blocks PE/N Terminal block for power bus PE Warning In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the open contacts must be sealed with caps on the power bus (L1, L2, L3, N, PE) prior to commissioning, so that they are safe from touching (push the caps on firmly). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an electric shock (400 V AC). Figure 6-6: TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters Important Install the PE/N terminal blocks before connecting the terminal modules for motor starters. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 6-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Terminal modules 6.3.8 Technical specifications - TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130 Dimensions and weight TM-RS90 TM-RS130/TM-FRS130 Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 90 x 264 x 100 130 x 290 x 100 Height with PE/N (mm) 306 332 Depth with motor starter (mm) 127 150 Depth with motor starter and fail-safe kit (safety-integrated system) (mm) 152 - Depth with motor starter and 2DI COM control module (mm) - 173 Weight (g) approx. 600 approx. 800 Shock protection Type of protection according to IEC 60529 IP20, (IP00 im Anschlussraum von L1 - L3, T1 - T3, N und PE) Rated voltages, currents and frequencies for the power bus Rated insulation voltage Ui 690 V Rated operating voltage Ue 500 V AC Rated impulse strength Uimp 6 kV Rated operating current Ie Rated frequency 40 A 50 A 50/60 Hz Conductor cross-sections Single-core (mm2) 1 x 10 2 x (1 to 2.5) or 2 x (2.5 to 6) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) 2 x (1 to 2.5 ) or 2 x (2.5 to 6) in acc. with IEC 60947 AWG cables, single- or multi-core 2 x (14 to 10) With 3-phase feed-in terminal, if necessary Single-core or multi-core (mm2) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) AWG cables, single- or multi-core 1 x 2.5 to 25 1 x 2.5 to 25 1 x 12 to 4 Wiring Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 2 and Pozidriv 2 Tightening torque (Nm) 2.0 to 2.5 Table 6-7: Technical specifications - TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6-13 Terminal modules 6.4 Power bus Features * The power bus consists of components that have fixed links to the terminal modules for the motor starters. * The power bus distributes the power in a load group. * The maximum current-carrying capacity at 60 C is: - In terminal modules with an installation width of 45/90 mm, 40 A for motor starter; standard - For terminal modules with 65/130 mm installation width 50 A for motor starter; high feature/fail-safe * The wiring is done automatically when the terminal module is installed. * Terminal blocks with an installation width of 45 or 90 mm and 65 or 130 mm - with power bus infeed (for one load group) and motor connection - with power bus throughfeed and motor connection * Power bus: 3 pins (L1, L2, L3), expandable to 5 pins with PE/N terminal block. View Terminal module Opening for padlock to prevent installation for motor starter Motor connection Power bus infeed PE/N terminal block (not in delivery package) Figure 6-7: TM-DS45 terminal module - example for DS1-x direct starter; standard Warning In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the open contacts must be sealed with caps on the power bus (L1, L2, L3, N, PE) prior to commissioning, so that they are safe from touching (push the caps on firmly). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an electric shock (400 V AC). SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 6-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Terminal modules PE/N terminal block accessories The power bus can be supplemented by a PE/N terminal block. Terminal blocks with installation widths of 45 and 65 mm are available as follows: * with infeed at the beginning of a new load group (i.e. contacts on the right only). This terminal block is supplied with caps for N and PE * with throughfeed (i.e. with contacts on the right and left) PE N PE PE N N PE PE N PE N 45 mm installation width for motor starter; standard PE PE PE N N PE N 65 mm installation width for motor starter; high feature PE with infeed PE with throughfeed Figure 6-8: PE/N terminal block Warning In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the open contacts must be sealed with caps on the power bus (L1, L2, L3, N, PE) prior to commissioning, so that they are safe from touching (push the caps on firmly). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an electric shock (400 V AC). Important Install the PE/N terminal blocks before connecting the terminal modules for motor starters. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6-15 Terminal modules Load group All the motor starters supplied via a single power bus infeed are referred to as a load group. A load group does not have to be identical to a potential group. Within a group of motor starters supplied by the same power module, an additional power bus infeed may be required to ensure that the rated operating current (aggregate current) of the terminal modules is not exceeded. The aggregate current of the power bus may amount to the following: * for terminal modules with an installation width of 45 or 90 mm: 40 A (for motor starter; standard) * for terminal modules with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm: 50 A (for motor starter; high feature/fail-safe) Current flow via the power bus The following image shows the current flow via the power bus: To load max. 12 A 1) or 16 A 2) T1 L1 Infeed max. 40 A 1) or 50 A 2) L2 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 L2 L2 L2 L3 L3 L3 L1 L1 L1 L3 1) for installation width of 45/90 mm 2) for installation width of 65/130 mm Motor starter; standard Motor starter; high feature/fail-safe Figure 6-9: Current flow in the power bus SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 6-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 7 PM-D power module Power modules Section Subject Page 7.1 PM-D power module for motor starters 7-2 7.1.1 Parameters 7-3 7.1.2 Technical specifications - PM-D 7-4 7.1.3 Power supply for High Feature motor starter with order number suffix -.AB4 7-4 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 7-1 PM-D power module 7.1 PM-D power module for motor starters Features * A new potential group begins with the power module - together with the associated terminal module. The motor starters of a potential group are connected to the right of the power module. * The power module conducts the voltages for supplying the electronic components to the voltage buses of the terminal modules. It does this for all the motor starters in a potential group. * The PM-D monitors the U1 (PWR) voltage supply for the electronics and the U2 (CON) power supply for contactors. Power failures are displayed using LEDs and indicated via bus if the group diagnostics are enabled. Caution Power modules can be neither inserted nor removed during operation. View LEDs: SF group error PWR (power) (U1) CON (contactor) (U2) Figure 7-1: PM-D power module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 7-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 PM-D power module 7.1.1 Parameters The following table indicates the parameter that can be set for the PM-D power module. Action, value range Parameters Group diagnosis * * Disable Enable Factory setting Disable Applicability Module Table 7-1: Parameters for the PM-D power module Group diagnosis: This parameter enables diagnosis messaging (error types are listed in Section 4.8). Note The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults on the SF-LED. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 7-3 PM-D power module 7.1.2 Technical specifications - PM-D Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) (incl. terminal module) 15 x 196.5 x 117.5 Weight (g) approx. 65 Voltages, currents, potentials Rated control supply voltage Us 20.4 to 28.8 V DC; 0 up to 60 C Rated operating current Ie 10 A Recommended upstream short-circuit protection: * Fuse * Circuit breaker gL/gG 10 A 10 A, trip characteristic B Insulation between U1 and U2 tested with 500 V Supply of: * Motor starters * Motor starters for safety-integrated systems * Electronic modules * Ex[i] modules * Frequency converters yes no no no yes Power draw from the backplane bus 10 mA Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts None Diagnostic functions: * Group error/device fault * Monitoring of the supply voltage for electronic components U1 (PWR) * Monitoring of supply voltage for contactors U2 (CON) * Diagnostic information readable yes red SF LED green PWR LED green CON LED yes Table 7-2: Technical specifications - PM-D SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 7-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 PM-D power module 7.1.3 Power supply for High Feature motor starter with order number suffix -.AB4 Note Motor starters; high feature with order number suffix -.AB4 that are not integrated via GSD/GSDML into the ET200S station use extended start-up data records To ensure that the motor starters; high feature are automatically assigned the extended start-up data records on the re-start of the ET200S station, the electronics power supply (U1 of the PM-D module) of the motor starter; high feature are supplied from the same voltage source as the interface module (header module). If the electronics supply of the motor starters fails and reactivates during ongoing operation of the header group, the motor starters1) do not receive any extended startup data records. In this case, the motor starter issues the following error after three minutes: Parameterization error (F16). If a common power supply with the header group is not possible, a re-parameterization is provided by the user program is carried out. 1) from an order number suffix: -.AB4 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 7-5 PM-D power module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 7-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8 Direct and soft starters Fail-safe direct starter Section Subject Page 8.1 Overview 8-2 8.2 DS1-x direct starter; standard 8-5 8.2.1 Features 8-5 8.2.2 Parameters 8-7 8.2.3 Technical specifications 8-8 8.3 DS1e-x direct starter; high feature F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter 8-11 8.3.1 Features 8-11 8.3.2 Additional features of the F-DS1e-x 8-14 8.3.3 Module replacement 8-19 8.3.4 Parameters 8-20 8.3.5 Technical specifications 8-23 8.4 DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature 8-27 8.4.1 Physical principles 8-27 8.4.2 Application and use 8-31 8.4.3 Features 8-32 8.4.4 Notes on configuration 8-39 8.4.5 Parameters 8-42 8.4.6 Technical specifications 8-45 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-1 Direct and soft starters 8.1 Overview Three versions of the ET 200S motor starters are available: * Standard series (code: DS1-x) * High feature series, characterized by properties that boost system availability and improve diagnosis (code for direct starters: DS1e-x, for direct soft starters: DSS1e-x). A distinction is made between the following: - If there is no communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: -.AA2 - If there is a communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: -.AA3 via the 2DI COM control module for the "Motor Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0) - If there is a communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: -.AA3 from revision level E02 and -.AA4 via the 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module for the 'Motor Starter ES' software (from version 2.0) - If there is a communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: -.AB4 via the 2DI COM control module for the motor starter ES 2007 + SP4 software * Fail-safe series that ensures safe shutdown of the motor starter after an emergency stop command by means of the mechanically selected SG bus (code: F-DS1e-x). A distinction is made between the following: - With front communication interface via the 2DI COM control module for the "Motor Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0). - With front communication interface from revision level E05 via the 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module for the "Motor Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0) All motor starters have full protection against short-circuit and overload. Due to the integrated electronic overload protection, a cover of the power range up to 16 A with only two device versions is possible with motor starter; high feature/ fail-safe. They also have more extensive diagnostics and additional parameters for system control and monitoring. The motor starter series with installation widths of 45/90 mm and 65/130 mm; high feature can be used in conjunction with the ET 200S safety-integrated system components for safety applications to PL e / SIL3. The fail-safe motor starter series (F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x) in conjunction with fail-safe power modules (PM-D PROFIsafe and PM-D F X1) is suitable for use in safety applications up to SIL3 according to IEC 62061 / PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1. Warning If the circuit breaker or starter protection switch is switched on again after being tripped as a result of an overload or a short circuit, and there is a pending On signal for the contactor, the motor starts up. Caution Due to the operation of star-connected three-phase motors, high EMC interference may occur. Interference above the IEC limit values can lead to an impairment of functions or failure of the electronics. In case of high EMC interference, we recommend the use of motors with EMC protection circuits. (Exception: electronic starters may not be operated with a EMC protection circuit). The best filtering effect is achieved with three-phase RC interference inversion modules. Varistor interference inversion modules should not be used since they only insufficiently filter out fast transients. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters The table below presents an overview of the properties of the direct and soft starters. Feature DS-x1 DS1e-x DSS1e-x F-DS1e-x Installation width [mm] 45 65 for power rating up to [kW] 5.5 7.5 Integrated switching devices for SIRIUS components of the size S00 S0 Short-circuit protection with 3RV circuit breaker with instantaneous overcurrent release X Short-circuit protection with 3RV circuit breaker with instantaneous overcurrent release Overload protection with thermal overload release integrated into circuit breaker X X Programmable electronic overload protection Switching function X mechanical Rated operating current 0.14 - 12 A Rated operating voltage Ue * IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 * UL, CSA 400 V AC 600 V AC Parameterizable Tripping class CLASS electronic 0.3 - 16 A 480 V 600 V AC no 10 yes 5 5),10,15 5), 10A, 10 20 Asymmetry recognition yes Residual current detection no yes Parameterizable current limits no yes Anti-blocking function with rapid shutdown Type of coordination (2 at 400 V) Use up to SIL (IEC 62 061) Up to performance level (DIN EN ISO 13849-1) Feedback contact for safety-integrated system Compatible expansion modules (brake control modules) no yes 2 (up to 1.6 A) SIL3 1) PLe1) with failsafe kit 1 2 1 SIL3 1) SIL2 3) PLe 2) PLd 3) SIL1 PLc integral xB1 to xB6 xB1, xB3, xB56), xB66) Table 8-1: Overview of direct starters and soft starters SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-3 Direct and soft starters Feature DS-x1 DS1e-x DSS1e-x F-DS1e-x Free inputs through 2DI COM control module no yes 3) 2DI LC COM control module usable? no yes 4) "Motor Starter ES" usable? no yes 3) Derating necessary at top end of performance range? yes yes Diagnosis, fault types see Section 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 2) no 4.7 Only with failsafe kit and additional infeed contactor With additional infeed contactor From order number suffix -.AA3 and for F-DS1e-x; see Section 8.3.2 As of order number suffix -.AA3 and revision level E02, as well as for F-DS1e-x from revision level E05 From order number suffix -.AB4 Only in combination with a separately protected power supply of the brake Table 8-1: Overview of direct starters and soft starters (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters 8.2 DS1-x direct starter; standard 8.2.1 Features ET 200S DS1-x ... direct starter; standard (see Figure 8-2) * Are motor starters for a single direction of rotation that can be can be used in the ET 200S distributed I/O device. * Are suitable for switching and protecting three-phase loads up to 5.5 kW at 400 and 500 V AC * Are available with setting ranges of 0.14 - 0.2 A to 9 - 12 A * Are equipped with electromechanical SIRIUS switchgear * The contactor coils are controlled directly via integrated outputs. * The switching states of circuit breaker and contactor are indicated via integrated inputs. * Available diagnostic information of the direct starter: - overload or short-circuit tripping/disconnection of the motor starter - fault at the motor starter * * * * The circuit state and status are displayed via LEDs. Integrated disconnection functions via circuit breaker Upgradable with fail-safe kit 1 for safety system applications Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) for driving an additional module (e.g. brake control module xB1 to xB6) * The inputs of the xB3, xB4 or xB6 brake control module (e.g. limit-position switches) act directly on the contactor and brake drive circuit (for signal response, see Section 12.3.3). Important A protection circuit for the contactor coils is already integrated in the motor starter. Additional protection circuits connected to the contactor are not permissible. Note Input 1 (clockwise limit switch) has a direct effect on the contactor for the DS1-x and on the activation of the brake control module. Input 2 (counter-clockwise limit switch) only affects activation of the brake control module. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-5 Direct and soft starters View Scale for set current Toggle switch Opening to test the overload protection Circuit breaker SF group error C-STAT contactor status Channel for connecting lead to auxiliary switch block LEDs relevant for safetyintegrated system Caution Aperture only for 1-pole auxiliary switch block Warning Additional protective circuit not allowed. Only for control unit (see Section 4.3) Figure 8-1: DS1-x direct starter; standard Circuit diagram 1L1 3L2 5L3 DI 0.0 Readiness for operation DI 0.1 Contactor on DI 0.2 Circuit-breaker tripped Input 1 expansion module (only with DS1-x) (e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, clockwise rotation) Logic K1 DO 0.0 Motor on DO 0.2 Brake (only for DS1-x) Output point to expansion module (only for DS1-x) (e.g. brake control modules xB1 to xB6 drive for brake) 2T1 4T2 6T3 K1 Input 2 expansion module (only with DS1-x) (e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, counterclockwise rotation) Figure 8-2: Circuit diagram - DS1-x direct starter; standard SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters 8.2.2 Parameters The following table indicates the parameters that can be set for the direct starter. Parameters Action, value range Factory setting Applicability Group diagnosis * * Disable Enable Disable Module Response to CPU/ master STOP * * Disconnect Keep circuit state Disconnect Module Table 8-2: Parameters for DS1-x direct starter; standard Group diagnosis: This parameter enables diagnosis messaging (error types are listed in ). Note The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults on the SF-LED. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-7 Direct and soft starters 8.2.3 Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) * Reversing starter incl. terminal module * Height with PE/N block * Depth with fail-safe kit (safety-integrated system) Weight * Reversing starter incl. terminal module * Direct starter incl. PE/N terminal block Module-specific data Assignment type Pollution severity * At 400 V * At 500 V Safety class Degree of protection Power loss Pv 1) at Ie 1.0 kg 1.1 kg Type 1 to Ie 12 A, IEC 60947-4-1, DIN VDE 0660, Part 102 Type 2 to Ie 1.6 A 3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) 2, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) I, DIN EN 61140 (VDE 140-1) IP20, IEC 60529 1.25 A approx. 9 W 1.6 to 6.3 A approx. 10 W 8 to 12 A approx. 11 W 0C to 60C Ambient temperature range * Derating, see Section 3.4 * Order number suffix -.AB4 UL/CSA (vertical installation on horizontal rails) without DM-V15 with DM-V15 (horizontal installation on vertical rails) without DM-V15 Control circuit Rated operating voltage for electronic components: U1 Reverse polarity protection Rated operating voltage for contactor: U2 Reverse polarity protection power input * From electronic component supply: U1 * From contactor supply: U2 * From the backplane bus Main circuit Rated operating voltage Ue * IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 * Protective separation between main and auxiliary circuits UL, CSA Rated insulation voltage Ui Rated impulse strength Uimp Rated frequency 1) 45 x 264 x 120 306 144.5 60C/14A 55C/16A 60C/15.2A 40C/14A 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) yes 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) yes approx. 20 mA approx. 100 mA 10 mA 400 V AC 400 V 600 V AC 500 V AC 6 kV 50/60 Hz For motor starter and terminal module as a function of rated operating current Ie (upper setting range). Table 8-3: Technical specifications - DS1-x direct starter; standard SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters Technical specifications - circuit breaker, contactor Circuit breaker Tripping class Class 10 Max. rated operating current 12 A Adjustment ranges * Thermal overload release * Instantaneous overcurrent release 0.14 - 0.2 A to 9 - 12 A fixed setting at 12 x Ie Minimum tripping current in the event of phase failure (= 100 % current asymmetry) 0.85 x Ie Rated short-circuit breaking capacity to Ie = 12 A 50 kA at 400 V Mechanical life Electrical life 100 000 switching cycles 100 000 contactor Rated operational current Ie at 60C * AC-1 * AC-2, AC-3 - At 400 V - At 500 V * AC-4 at 400 V Max. permissible output of the threephase induction motors at 500 V AC Positively driven operation - auxiliary contacts, contactor 12 A 12 A 9A 4.1 A 5.5 kW yes Mechanical life * contactor * Contactor with safety functionality 30 million switching cycles 10 million switching cycles Electrical life B10 see Figure 8-3. 1,000,000 1) Surge suppression Zener diodes integrated Operating times in the case of DC operation (total break time = contact parting time + arcing time) * At 0.85 to 1.1 x Us - Closing time - Contact parting time * Arcing time * 1) At 1.0 x Us - Closing time - Contact parting time 25 to 100 ms 20 to 50 ms 10 to 15 ms typ. 25 ms typ. 20 ms This information refers only to the mechanical switching element under its reference conditions. Table 8-4: Technical specifications DS... - circuit breaker, contactor, auxiliary switch block SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-9 Direct and soft starters Operating cycles at 400 V Electrical life 107 8 6 4 2 106 8 6 4 2 105 8 6 4 2 Ia = Breaking current 104 8 6 4 Ie = Rated operating current 2 103 2 3 4 5 6 10 9 12 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 4 5,5 200 Ia(A) 400 Ie(A) PN = Rated power of threephase motors at 400 V PN (kW) Figure 8-3: Electrical service life, contactor SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters 8.3 DS1e-x direct starter; high feature F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter 8.3.1 Features ET 200S DS1e-x direct starter; high feature ET 200S F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter * Are motor starters for a single direction of rotation that can be can be used in the ET 200S distributed I/O device. * Are suitable for switching and protecting three-phase loads up to 7.5 kW at 400 and 500 V AC * Are available in 3 setting ranges with 0.3 - 3 A, 2.4 - 8 A, 2.4 - 16 A * fitted with electro-mechanical SIRIUS switchgear (power switch, contactor) * Have parameterizable electronic overload protection * Upper and lower current limits can be defined and monitored for system and process supervision * The motor starter can be parameterized for warning or shutdown as the response to an overload event or if a current limit is violated * The integral protective mechanism recognizes a blocked motor and triggers a rapid shutdown * Integrated residual current detection * Integrated asymmetry detection * The as-is current is measured and the information transmitted to analyzers * The contactor coils are controlled directly via integrated outputs. * The switching status of the power switch is registered by means of an auxiliary switch * Detection of the circuit state of the contactor on the basis of current flow evaluation Detection of the circuit state in the case of the F-DS1e-x using an auxiliary switch block as well * Available diagnostic information of the direct starter (see Table 4-7) * Circuit state and motor-starter status are indicated by LEDs * Integrated disconnection functions via circuit breaker * For DS1e-x: auxiliary switch for ET 200S safety engineering (failsafe kit) already integrated For F-DS1e-x: Fail-safe partial shutdown integrated * The motor starters can be expanded using front-mounted standard SIRIUS accessories (e.g. auxiliary switch block, time relay) for contactor size S0 * Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) at the side for driving an expansion module (e.g. brake control module xB1 to xB6) * "Response to circuit breaker off" parameterizable (from order number suffix .AA4) * The 2 parameterizable inputs (DI 0.4 and DI 0.5, e.g. limit-position switches) of the expansion interface (expansion module, e.g. brake control module xB3, xB4, xB6) act directly on contactor and brake drive * 2 additional parameterizable inputs (DI 0.6 and DI 0.7) are available through the 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module that can be plugged into the front * Basic factory settings via the rotary switch of the power switch possible (see Section 10.18) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-11 Direct and soft starters * Communication interface at the front for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x with order number suffix -.AA3 and for F-DS1e-x via the 2DI COM control module for the "Motor Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0) * With the 2DI LC COM control module for the "Manual Operation Local" mode for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x with order number suffix: -.AA3 from revision level E02 and for F-DS1e-x from revision level E05. * For DS1e-x, from order number suffix -.AB4: -Quick stop -Cold run -Integrated log book functions with 3 device log books -Has expanded parameter options - PROFIenergy - Comprehensive diagnostics via data records - I&M data More information can be found in Section 10 View of DS1e-x direct starter; high feature Rotary switch SF group error DEVICE device status C-STAT contactor status Circuit breaker LEDs Slot for 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module with clear cover sealable Aperture for standard SIRIUS accessories Latch indicator Figure 8-4: DS1e-x direct starter; high feature SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters Circuit diagram of DS1e-x direct starter; high feature 1L1 3L2 5L3 DI 0.0 Ready from host/PLC DI 0.1 Motor ON/current flow DI 0.2 Group error General warning DI 0.3 Input 1 expansion module (e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, clockwise rotation) Logic DI 0.4 Input 2 expansion module (e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, counterclockwise rotation) DI 0.5 Input 3 control module 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 3) DI 0.6 Input 4 control module 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 4) DI 0.7 DI 1.0 - 1.5 Motor current Iact K1 Auxiliary switch for feedback loop in the safety-integrated system Manual operation local DO 0.0 Motor cw DO 0.2 Brake DO 0.3 Trip Reset DO 0.4 Emergency start DO 0.5 Self-test1) DO 1.7 Lock quick stop1) Output to the expansion module (e.g. xB1 to xB6 brake control, brake actuation) 2T1 4T2 6T3 K1 DI 1.6 Figure 8-5: Circuit diagram of DS1e-x direct starter; high feature More detailed descriptions: * * * * * * 1) Input signals, in section 4.9.2 Output signals in section 4.9.2 Motor current IAct in section 10.3 Inputs/actions in section 10.11 Emergency start in section 10.13 Trip reset in section 10.14 Order number suffix -.AB4 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-13 Direct and soft starters 8.3.2 Additional features of the F-DS1e-x Additional features that only apply to the F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starters are: * 6 safety groups (SG1 to SG6) can be set using coding connectors in the terminal module * The safety groups are supplied via a fail-safe power module with overvoltage protection (PM-D F PROFIsafe, PM-D F X1) * 2 processors that monitor each other, for controlling the safety function: Safe shutdown in the event of emergency stop via the mechanically selected SG bus * The motor starter is safely shut down if the two processors produce varying results * A shunt release for the power switch is integrated to ensure a safe shutdown in the event of one of the contactors being welded. This feature can also be used in non-fail-safe mode to ensure a shutdown in the event of a welded contactor (see note) * It is possible to test the shunt release/power switch via the bus (DO 0.5) * Storage of the U1 operating voltage using a capacitor to ensure a safe shutdown in the event of U1 failure * Monitoring of the functioning of the capacitor for the U1 * Redundant configuration of the fail-safe components in the motor starter * The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips. Note A fail-safe motor starter can also be used in non-fail-safe mode with a PM-D power module. To do this, the coding for the safety group in the terminal module of the fail-safe motor starter must be set to SG3 and the U1 and U2 supply voltages must have the same potential. Safety note When using expansion modules (brake modules xB1 to xB6, 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module ), make sure that these modules are not fail-safe modules with fail-safe technology. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters Expansion module Operating mode of the F-Starter Non-fail-safe mode PLc/ SIL1/ PLd/ SIL2 PLe /SIL3 xB1 X X X X xB2 X X X X xB3 X X 1) X 1) xB4 X X 1) X 1) xB5 X xB6 X X 1) X 1) 2DI COM control module 2DI LC COM control module X X 1) X 1) PL according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 SIL according to IEC 62061 1) X X X X 1) No feedback to the fail-safe technology may occur through the inputs, i.e. cross-circuits to the sensor cables should be eliminated (cross-circuit proof cable installation) Safety note Only applies in fail-safe mode (fail-safe technology) The F-DS1e-x can only be operated in the potential group of a PM-D F PROFIsafe or PM-D F X1 that safely limits the voltage to within the SIMATIC range. Safety note Cyclic test of the F-DS1e-x - Shunt release/circuit breaker Starter protector must be in position "1" Request self-test (DO 0.5) (signal-triggered) Starter protector must move to "Trip" position If the starter protector changes to the "Trip" position the test has been successful Turn starter protector to position "0" Turn starter protector to position "1" The test can also be carried out when the motor side switch is switched on. After this test, the motor starter is automatically switched back on if a switching command (D0.0 / D0.1) is pending. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-15 Direct and soft starters Safety note Only one SG bus can be selected in the terminal module for each motor starter. Safety note You must only use the F-DS1e-x motor starter to control motors that do not constitute a danger to persons or to the environment if they suddenly shut down. Important After U1 has been applied, the F-DS1e-x requires approximately 30 s until the internal self-test is completed. DI 0.0 ready is then set in the process mapping via the host/PLC. Once the internal self-test is completed, the selected SG bus is monitored. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters View of the F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter Rotary switch SF group error DEVICE device status C-STAT switching status contactor Circuit breaker LEDs Safety group SG1 to SG6 Slot for 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module with clear cover sealable Aperture for standard SIRIUS accessories Latch indicator Figure 8-6: Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-17 Direct and soft starters Circuit diagram of the F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter 1L1 3L2 5L3 SG1 to SG6 Mechanical selection of the safety group DI 0.0 Ready from host/PLC DI 0.1 Motor ON/current flow DI 0.2 Group error General warning DI 0.3 Input 1 expansion module (e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, clockwise rotation) DI 0.4 Input 2 expansion module (e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, counterclockwise rotation) DI 0.5 Logic Input 3 control module 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 3) DI 0.6 Input 4 control module 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 4) DI 0.7 DI 1.0 - 1.5 Motor current Iact K1 DI 1.6 Manual operation local DO 0.0 Motor cw DO 0.2 Brake DO 0.3 Trip Reset DO 0.4 Emergency start DO 0.5 Self-test Output to the expansion module (e.g. xB1 to xB6 brake control, brake actuation) Auxiliary switch for circuit state monitoring 2T1 4T2 6T3 K1 Figure 8-7: Circuit diagram of the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter More detailed descriptions: * * * * * * 1) Input signals, in section 4.9.2 Output signals in section 4.9.2 Motor current IAct in section 10.3 Inputs/actions in section 10.11 Emergency start in section 10.13 Trip reset in section 10.14 Order number suffix -.AB4 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters 8.3.3 Module replacement If a module has to be replaced, an acceptance test is not necessary. With the F-DS1e-x, however, it is necessary to repeat the safety function test (see cyclic test). Warning If there is a pending ON signal for the contactor, the motor starts up automatically. This applies to an F-DS1e-x motor starter after the self-test if there is no emergency stop present on the selected SG bus. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-19 Direct and soft starters 8.3.4 Parameters A description of the parameters can be found in Section 10. The table below lists the actions and value ranges that can be set with the various parameters for the DS1e-x and F-DS1e-x direct starters. Parameters Action, value range Rated operating current (Increment 10 mA) * Range 1 * * Range 2 * * Range 3 * Load type * * 1, 2) Non-resetting on voltage failure 1, 2) Prewarning limit value (Motor heating) 1) Response to overload - thermal motor model Tripping class Recovery time 1, 2) Idle time Reset the thermal overload model through functional switching Prewarning limit value 1) (time-based triggering) Response to current limit violation Lower current limit Upper current limit 1) 2) 3) 4) * * Factory setting 0.3 to 3 A (0.05 to 1.1 kW) 2.4 to 8 A (1.1 to 3 kW) 2.4 to 16 A (1.1 to 7.5 kW) 3 - phase motor 1 - phase motor (only with electromechanical starters) no yes * * 0 ... 95 % Ie 0 = deactivated (increment: 5 %) * Shutdown without restart * Shutdown with restart * Warning * CLASS 5 (10a)1) * CLASS 10 * CLASS 151) * CLASS 20 * 1 ... 30 min (increment: 0.5 min) * 0 ... 255 s * 0 = deactivated (increment: 1 s) * 0 to 500 s * 0 = deactivated (increment: 1 s) * Warning * Shutdown4) * 18.75 to 100 % 3) (increment: 3.125 %) * 50 ... 150 % Ie 3) * 50 ... 400 % Ie 1) (increment: 3.125 %) * 3A * 8A * 16 A 3 - phase motor yes 0 = deactivated Shutdown without restart CLASS 10 1.5 min 0 (deactivated) 0 (deactivated) Warning 18.75 % 112.5 % from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed Up to order number suffix: -.AA4: value present, but cannot be changed (fixed on factory setting) Of rated operational current Possible with DS1e-x direct starter with order number suffix -.AA3, and with F-DS1e-x Table 8-5: Parameters for DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters Parameters Blocking current Action, value range 1,2) * * 1, 2) * Response with power supply switching element missing 1, 2) * * Blocking time Response to residual current detection Response with power switch OFF Asymmetry limit value 1, 2) Response to asymmetry vInput signal extension Input signal delay 1) 1) * * * * * * * * * * * * Input 1, 2 - signal level (x-increment, expansion module) Input 3, 4 - signal level 2DI COM control module 2DI LC COM control module) (see Section 10) Input 1 to 4 - action * * * * * * * NO NO NO NO NO only only only only only Inputs 1 to 4 signal 1) Response to CPU/master STOP 1) 2) 4) 5) 6) * * * * * * * * * * * * Factory setting 150 ... 1000 % Ie (DS1e-x, RS1e-x) 150 ... 800 % Ie (DSS1e-x) (increment: 50 %) 1...5s (increment: 0.5 s) Group error Group error only with ON command 4, 1) Group warning1) Warning Disconnect Group error Group error with ON command 5, 1) Group warning 1) 30 ... 60 % Ie 0 = deactivated (increment 10 %) Warning Disconnect 0 ... 200 ms (increment: 10 ms) 10 ... 80 ms (increment: 10 ms) NC NO 800 % No action Shutdown without restart Shutdown with restart Shutdown at limit position, clockwise rotation Shutdown at limit position, counterclockwise rotation Group warning 6) "Manual Operation Local" mode6) Quick stop1) Cold run1) Emergency start 6) Motor-cw 6) Motor ccw 6) Trip reset 1) non-retentive Retentive Use dummy value Keep last value No action 1s Group error Disconnect Group error 30 % Disconnect 0 ms 10 ms NO non-retentive Use dummy value = disconnect from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed Up to order number suffix: -.AA4: value present, but cannot be changed (fixed on factory setting) Possible with DS1e-x direct starter with order number suffix -.AA3, and with F-DS1e-x Possible from order number suffix -.AA4 Also possible with inputs 1 and 2 for DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x with order number suffix -.AA3, and with F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x Table 8-5: Parameters for DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-21 Direct and soft starters Parameters Replacement values 1) Wait for startup parameter - data record 1) Enable delay of the brake when starting 1) Holding time of the brake when stopping 1) Group diagnosis Safe shutdown group 1) 7) 7) Action, value range * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Motor cw Motor ccw (only with reversing starters) Brake actuation Trip Reset Emergency start Self-test Quick stop lock no yes - 2.5 ... 2.5 s (increment: 0.01 s) 0 ... 25 s (increment: 0.01 s) Disable Enable Not assigned SG1 to SG6 Factory setting No action no 0s 0s Disable Not assigned from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed Only with F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x Table 8-5: Parameters for DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter (Contd.) Group diagnosis: This parameter enables diagnosis messaging (error types are listed in Section 4.7). Note The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults on the SF-LED. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters 8.3.5 Technical specifications Direct starter DS1e-x F-DS1e-x Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) * Reversing starter incl. terminal module * Height with PE/N block * Depth with brake control module 2DI 65 x 290 x 150 332 173 Weight * Reversing starter incl. terminal module * Direct starter incl. PE/N terminal block 1.6 kg 1.7 kg Ambient temperature range 0C to 60C Module-specific data Assignment type Type (up to Ie 16 A at 400 V) 2 Pollution severity * At 400 V * 3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) 2, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) At 500 V Safety class I, DIN EN 61140 (VDE 140-1) Degree of protection Power loss Pv 1) IP20, IEC 60529 approx. 9 W approx. 10 W approx. 18 W at Ie 0.3 up to 3 A 2.4 to 8 A 2.4 to 16 A Ambient temperature range * For derating see Section 3.4 * Order number suffix -.AB4 UL/CSA (vertical installation on horizontal rails) without DM-V15 0C to 60C 60C/14A 55C/16A 60C/15.2A with DM-V15 (horizontal installation on vertical rails) without DM-V15 40C/16A Maximum attainable safety classes: * * SIL2) according to IEC 62061 2) PL according to DIN EN ISO 13849) 34) e4) 2 d Table 8-6: Technical specifications - DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-23 Direct and soft starters Direct starter DS1e-x F-DS1e-x Safety parameters: * SFF (IEC 62061) - * * * * * * DC (DIN EN ISO 13849) HFT (DIN EN / IEC 61508 - - - - - 99.64 %/ 99.70 % >99 0 1 365 24 - - 3.5 x 10-5 8.0 x 10-5 - - - 8.1 x 10-10 1.8 x 10-9 20 nOP (DIN EN ISO 13849) dOP (DIN EN ISO 13849) hOP (DIN EN ISO 13849) * Low demand - PFDAVG (10a) Test interval 3 mos. Test interval 6 mos. High demand/continuous mode - PFH Test intervall 3 mos. 1/h Test intervall 6 mos. 1/h years Proof test interval T1 * B10 * 1,000,0003) Control circuit Rated operating voltage for electronic com24 VDC ponents: U1 (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) (21.6 to 26.4 VDC) Reverse polarity protection yes Rated operating voltage for contactor: U2 24 V DC (20.4 to 28.8 V DC) Reverse polarity protection power input * From electronic component supply: U1 * From contactor supply U2 Pick-up: (for 800 ms) Hold-in: * From SG1 to SG6 Pick-up: (for 200 ms) Hold-in: * Test function of the shunt release/ power switch (50 ms) from U1 * From the backplane bus 5) yes approx. 40 mA approx. 100 mA 250 mA max. 150 mA approx. 250 mA max. 55 mA approx. 1.5 A6) approx. 20 mA Main circuit Rated operating voltage Ue * IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 * Protective separation between main and auxiliary circuits 400 V AC 400 V UL, CSA 600 V AC Rated insulation voltage Ui 500 V AC Rated impulse strength Uimp 6 kV Rated frequency 50/60 Hz 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) For motor starter and terminal module as a function of rated operating current Ie (upper setting range). Max. achievable values This information refers only to the mechanical switching element under its reference conditions. Only in conjunction with a PM-D F module and an external additional infeed contactor with feedback loop monitoring. For motor starters with order number suffix -.AA3 from revision level E02, the frame potential for the contactor supply U2 is connected to the frame potential of the electronics supply U1. Connect the frame potential of U1 and U2 to the power module in order to prevent high compensating current. In the event of simultaneous activation of the test function of several starters, the currents are cumulative. Table 8-6: Technical specifications - DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters Technical specifications - circuit breaker, contactor Direct starter DS1e-x F-DS1e-x Circuit breaker Rated operating current 3/8/16 A Instantaneous overcurrent release Fixed setting at 13 x Ie max Rated short-circuit breaking capacity to Ie = 16 A (motor starter) 50 kA at 400 V Mechanical life Electrical life 100,000 operating cycles 100,000 operating cycles Contactor Rated operational current Ie at 60C * AC-1 * AC-2, AC-3 - At 400 V - At 500 V * AC-4 at 400 V Max. permissible output of the threephase induction motors at 500 V AC Positively driven operation - auxiliary contacts, contactor 16 A 16 A 11 A 9A 7.5 kW yes Mechanical life contactor 10 million switching cycles Electrical life Switching frequency see Figure 8-8. 80/hr Surge suppression Zener diodes integrated Operating times in the case of DC operation (total break time = contact parting time + arcing time) * At 0.85 to 1.1 x Us - Closing time (ms) - Contact parting time (ms) * Arcing time (ms) * At 1.0 x Us - Closing time (ms) - Contact parting time (ms) 25 to 100 20 to 50 10 to 15 50 to 170 40 to 100 10 to 15 typ. 25 typ. 20 typ. 50 typ. 40 Table 8-7: Technical specifications of the DS1e-x and F-DS1e-x - power switch, contactor SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-25 Direct and soft starters Operating cycles at 400 V Electrical life 107 8 6 4 2 106 8 6 4 2 105 8 6 4 Ia = Breaking current Ie = Rated operating current 2 104 8 6 4 PN = Rated power of threephase motors at 400 V 2 103 1 2 4 5 6 3 8 1,1 3 10 12 20 16 7,5 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 Ia(A) 400 Ie(A) PN (kW) Figure 8-8: Electrical service life, contactor SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters 8.4 DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature The electrical features of the DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature are identical to those of the SIRIUS soft starter 3RW30. The same power electronics are used. 8.4.1 Physical principles Starting current Three-phase asynchronous motors have a higher making current I(startup). This inrush current can be between three and fifteen times as high as the rated operating current, depending on the type of motor. A figure between seven and eight times the rated motor current can be postulated as typical. I Istartup Irated I0 (idle) nrated nsyn n Mpull-out M Mmotor Mstartup Mload Mdip Maccel Mrated Mmotor Mload nrated nsyn n Figure 8-9: Typical current and torque curve of a three-phase asynchronous motor SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-27 Direct and soft starters Reducing the starting current There are various ways of reducing the starting current: * by star delta starter * by frequency converter * by soft starter Star delta starter After a certain delay, the motor windings are switched over from a star to a delta configuration. Motor current for star starting is only about 1/3 of that required for delta starting (motor torque is also reduced to approximately 1/3 of the delta torque). Disadvantages: * * * * * * 6 motor cables are necessary Occurrence of switching surges (in the current and torque transients) Startup cannot be matched to the system environment Installation is relatively complicated and time-consuming Contactor switching calls for an extra time relay or PLC programming More space needed in the control cabinet I IAd M Starting current in d MAd Mmotor atd Mload Starting current for */d start IA*= 1/3 IA d Mmotor at* =1/3 MAd MA* n n nsyn *nrated n n nsyn *nrated Figure 8-10: Current and torque curves for star-delta starting SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters Soft starter With a soft starter, motor voltage is increased from a selectable starting voltage to the rated voltage by phase firing within a defined starting time. Motor current is proportional to the motor voltage, so the starting current is reduced by the factor of the defined starting voltage. The illustration below shows how the DSS1e-x soft starter works: UL1- L3 L2 UL2- L3 M 3~ L1 L3 G1 Figure 8-11: Phase firing of the supply voltage by semiconductor elements in the DSS1e-x soft starter Example: Starting voltage 50 % of Ue => starting current equals 50 % of the motor starting current for direct-on-line starting. A soft starter also reduces motor torque. This is the reason why a soft-started motor does not jerk into action. The relationship is as follows: motor torque is proportional to the square of motor voltage. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-29 Direct and soft starters Example: Starting voltage 50 % of Ue => starting torque 25 % of the starting torque for direct-on-line starting. Advantages: * Less space needed in the control cabinet * No protective circuitry (e.g. filter elements) needed for compliance with radio interference suppression requirements * Lower installation costs * Straightforward system startup * Only 3 motor feeder cables, half as many as are needed for a star delta starter * Local adjustments make the unit easy to configure in accordance with system requirements. Disadvantages: * Long-term speed settings not possible. * Lower torque at reduced voltage I M 100 % Usystem Istartup Istartup 0.7 x Istartup 0.5 x 100 % Usystem Mstartup 70 % Usystem 70 % Usystem 50 % Usystem Mstartup 0.49 x 50 % Usystem Mstartup 0.25 x nsyn n nsyn n Figure 8-12: Current and torque curves for a soft starter SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters 8.4.2 Application and use Areas of application and criteria for selection The ET 200S DSS1e-x soft starters are an alternative to star-delta starters and frequency converters (for comparison and advantages, see Section 8.4.1). The most important advantages are soft starting and soft rundown, interruptionfree switching without current spikes that could interfere with the supply system, and the compact size. Many drives that needed frequency converters in the past, can be changed to soft-start operation with the DSS1e-x, if the applications do not call for variations in speed. Applications Typical applications include, for example: Conveyor belts, conveyor systems: * smooth starting * smooth slowing, Rotary pumps, piston-type pumps * avoidance of pressure surges * service life of the piping system is extended Agitators, mixers: * reduced starting current Fans: * less strain on gearing and drive belts Drive for a motor with electromechanical brake An electromechanical brake with infeed from the main voltage (L1/L2/L3) should not be connected directly to the output of the soft starter. An internally powered electromechanical brake should be supplied via a separate contactor. Important Do not use a soft starter to supply an internally powered brake (xB2, xB4). Brakes xB5 and xB6 must only be operated with externally supplied voltage (see Section 12.3). SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-31 Direct and soft starters 8.4.3 Features ET 200S DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature * Are motor starters for a single direction of rotation that can be can be used in the ET 200S distributed I/O device. * Are suitable for switching and protecting three-phase loads up to 7.5 kW at 400 V AC * Are available in 3 setting ranges with 0.3 - 3 A, 2.4 - 8 A, 2.4 - 16 A * Are equipped with electromechanical SIRIUS switchgear (circuit breaker) to monitor short circuits and for line protection * The 2-phase power electronics from the SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starter are integrated * When the motor starts the power thyristors of the soft starter are jumpered by integrated relays in the current ranges 2.4 - 8 A and 2.4 - 16 A * Have parameterizable electronic overload protection * Upper and lower current limits can be defined and monitored for system and process supervision * The motor starter can be parameterized for warning or shutdown as the response to an overload event or if a current limit is violated * The integral protective mechanism recognizes a blocked motor and triggers a rapid shutdown * Integrated residual current detection * Integrated asymmetry detection * The as-is current is measured and the information transmitted to analyzers * The soft starter is controlled directly via integrated outputs * The switching status of the power switch is registered by means of an auxiliary switch * The switching status of the soft starter is registered by means of current flow analysis * Local adjustments by potentiometers for - starting time - starting voltage - Coasting down time * * * * * * * * * Available diagnostic information of the soft starter (see Table 4-7) Circuit state and motor-starter status are indicated by LEDs Integrated disconnection functions via circuit breaker Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) at the side for driving an expansion module (e.g. brake control module xB1, 3) The 2 parameterizable inputs (DI 0.4 and DI 0.5, e.g. limit-position switches) of the expansion interface (expansion module, e.g. brake control module xB3) act directly on soft-starter and brake drive 2 additional parameterizable inputs (DI 0.6 and DI 0.7) are available through the 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module that can be plugged into the front With the 2DI LC COM control module for the "Manual Operation Local" mode for DSS1e-x with order number suffix: -.AA3 from revision level E02. "Response to circuit breaker off" parameterizable (from order number suffix -.AA4) For DSS1e-x, from order number suffix -.AB4: -Quick stop -Cold run -Integrated log book functions with 3 device log books -Has expanded parameter options - PROFIenergy - Comprehensive diagnostics via data records - I&M data More information can be found in Section 10 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters View Rotary switch SF group error DEVICE device status C-STAT switching status Soft starter Slot for 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module with clear cover sealable Coasting down time starting voltage starting time Circuit breaker LEDs Latch indicator Figure 8-13: DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-33 Direct and soft starters Circuit diagram 1L1 3L2 5L3 DI 0.0 Ready from host/PLC DI 0.1 Motor ON/current flow DI 0.2 Group error DI 0.3 General warning Input 1 expansion module (e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, clockwise rotaDI 0.4 Input 2 expansion module (e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, counterclockwise rotation) DI 0.5 Logic Input 3 control module 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 3) DI 0.6 Input 4 control module 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 4) DI 0.7 DI 1.0 - 1.5 Motor current Iact DI 1.6 Manual operation local DI 1.7 Ramp operation DO 0.0 Motor cw DO 0.2 Brake DO 0.3 Trip Reset DO 0.4 Emergency start DO 0.5 Self-test1) DO 1.7 Lock quick stop1) Output to the expansion module (e.g. xB1 to xB6 brake control, brake actuation) Drive 2T1 4T2 6T3 only on version 2.4 - 8 A 2.4 - 16 A Figure 8-14: Circuit diagram of DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature More detailed descriptions: * * * * * * Input signals, in section 4.9.2 Output signals in section 4.9.2 Motor current IAct in section 10.3 Inputs/actions in section 10.11 Emergency start in section 10.13 Trip reset in section 10.14 Caution Phase L1 is not looped through the semiconductors in the DSS1e-x. Always switch off the power switch before commencing work on the output. 1) Order number suffix -.AB4 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-34 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters Settings The devices can be set as follows (see Figure 8-13): By means of 3 potentiometers for setting: * Starting time in the range from 0 to 20 s * Starting voltage in the range from approx. 30 to 100 % of rated voltage for motor * Coasting-down time in the range from 0 to 20 s Soft starting function Torque-reduced start for three-phase asynchronous motors: Triggering is two-phase, which means that the current is kept low throughout the run-up phase. Current peaks such as those that occur in a star-delta start at the changeover from star to delta are prevented by continuous voltage management. Transient current peaks (inrush peaks) are automatically avoided in each switchon procedure by a special control function of the power semiconductors. Soft coasting-down function The integrated soft rundown function prevents the drive coming to an abrupt halt when the motor is switched off. Warning The soft run down time set locally on the soft starter is also effective in controlling the brake or shutdown function via one of the parameterizable inputs (for example, the 2DI COM control module or the xB1 to xB6 brake control module) for an additional 1-2 seconds. This leads to a delay in an immediate standstill of the motor following a shutdown function without motor brake. For a shutdown function with motor brake, the soft run down and the delay time thereof act against the braked motor. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-35 Direct and soft starters Time ramp The illustration below shows the time ramp of the DSS1e-x for parameterized ramp operation (DI 1.7 = 1): U UN Us tR on tR off t DSS1e-x: time ramp Figure 8-15: Time ramp/timing diagram, DSS1e-x Changing settings The potentiometer settings are scanned before each switching operation ("ON" or "OFF"). If, for example, the setting of the potentiometer for starting time is changed while the motor is running up, the change does not come into effect until the next start. Starting voltage The starting voltage should be set to a value at which the motor starts rapidly. Ramp time (start time) The ramp time should be set such that the motor can run up within the defined time. If the star time for star-delta starting is known, the ramp time can be set to this value. Coasting down time (stop time) The "Coasting-down time" potentiometer is used to set the duration of the voltage ramp for coasting down. This parameter can be used to make motor rundown longer than it would be if the motor were merely to coast to a stop. The motor coasts to a stop on its own if this potentiometer is set to a value of 0. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-36 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters Cyclic duration factor CD The cyclic duration factor CD in % is the ratio between load duration and freewheeling duration for loads that are switched frequently on and off. This factor can be calculated with the aid of the formula below: ts + tb ED = -----------------------ts + tb + tp In this formula: * * * * CD ts tb tp cyclic duration factor [%] starting time [s] operating time [s] idle time [s] The illustration below shows the procedure. Ie ts tb tp t Figure 8-16: Cyclic duration factor CD SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-37 Direct and soft starters Switching frequency It is essential to comply with the maximum permissible switching frequency in order to avoid exposing the devices to thermal overload. The "response to overload - thermal motor model" parameter has to be deactivated (shutdown without restart). It is also necessary to deactivate the idle time for cooling in the thermal motor model by selecting the default = 0 = deactivated (see Section 10.6, "Idle time parameters"). The table below presents an overview of switching frequencies per hour in accordance with the influencing factors. 3RK1301-0AB20-0AA2 (0.3 to 3 A) CLASS 10A Device orientation Ambient temperature vertical horizontal 40 C 50 C 60 C 40 C Ie = 3 A, CD = 30 %, start 3 x Ie/2 s 240 200 160 160 Ie = 3 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 180 150 120 120 CLASS 10 Device orientation Ambient temperature vertical horizontal 40 C 50 C 60 C 40 C Ie = 3 A, CD = 30 %, start 3 x Ie/4 s 120 100 80 80 Ie = 3 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/4 s 80 70 60 60 3RK1301-0BB20-0AA2 (2.4 to 8 A) CLASS 10A Device orientation Ambient temperature vertical horizontal 40 C 50 C 60 C 40 C Ie = 8 A, CD = 30 %, start 3 x Ie/2 s 80 70 60 60 Ie = 8 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 60 50 40 40 3RK1301-0CB20-0AA2 (2.4 to 16 A) CLASS 10A Device orientation Ambient temperature vertical horizontal 40 C 50 C 60 C 40 C Ie = 3 A, CD = 30 %, start 3 x Ie/2 s 240 200 160 160 Ie = 3 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 180 150 120 120 Ie = 8 A, CD = 30 %, start 3 x Ie/2 s 80 70 60 60 Ie = 8 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 60 50 40 40 Ie = 16 A, CD = 30 %, start 3 x Ie/2 s 35 25 12 12 Ie = 16 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 25 14 6 6 Table 8-8: Switching frequency for DSS1e-x soft starter SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-38 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters 8.4.4 Notes on configuration In order for a motor to reach its rated speed, motor torque at any given time during run-up must be greater than the torque needed by the load, as otherwise a stable operating point would be reached before the motor achieved its rated speed (the motor would "drag to a stop"). The difference between motor torque and load torque is the accelerating torque that is responsible for the increase in the speed of the drive. The lower the accelerating torque, the longer is the time the motor needs to run up to its operating speed. Starting torque Reducing the terminal voltage of a three-phase asynchronous motor reduces the motor's starting current and the starting torque. Current is directly proportional to voltage, whereas voltage is proportional to the square root of motor torque. Example: Motor = 5.5 kW, rated current = 11.4 A, starting current = 6.3 x rated current, motor torque = 36 Nm, starting torque = 2.4 x rated torque Settings for the soft starter: starting voltage 50% of rated voltage for motor The reductions are thus as follows: * Starting current is reduced to half the starting current for a direct start: 50 % of (6.3 x 11.4 A) = 36 A * Starting torque is reduced to 0.5 x 0.5 = 25 % of the starting torque for a direct start: 25% of 2.4 x 36 Nm = 21.6 Nm Notes On account of the ratio between starting voltage and torque, it is important to ensure that starting voltage is not too low. This applies particularly in the case of a pronounced pull-up torque, the lowest motor torque that occurs during runup to rated speed. If the current through the soft starter exceeds five times the current setting, there is an immediate shutdown. This can happen during the starting and rundown phases in particular. If this happens you should increase the starting time or the coasting down time, as applicable, and also reduce the starting voltage, if necessary. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-39 Direct and soft starters Mmotor M Mstartup MMotor with SIRIUS soft starter Mload MB MB = accelerating torque of the motor Mstartup with SIRIUS soft starter n U Ue US tR t Figure 8-17: Load and motor torques and motor terminal voltage for operation with soft starter Criteria for selection Note For the ET 200S DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature, the corresponding soft starter must be selected according to the rated current of the motor (rated current of the soft starter must be rated current of the motor). The 3 potentiometers on the starter are used for setting the starting voltage, the starting time, and the coasting-down time. The soft starter is correctly set when the motor starts smoothly and runs up rapidly to its rated speed. The ramp time can be set to any value up to 20 seconds. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-40 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters Starting time In order to obtain optimum operating conditions for the DSS1e-x soft starter, the the starting time should be set approx. 1 s longer than the resultant motor runup time, in order to ensure that the internal jumpering contacts do not have to carry the starting current. This protects the internal jumpering contacts and increases their service life. Longer starting times increase the thermal load on the devices and the motor unnecessarily and lead to a reduction in the permissible switching frequency. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-41 Direct and soft starters 8.4.5 Parameters Parameter assignment Define the parameters for the IM 151 interface module with the STEP 7 parameterization software or COM PROFIBUS. To do this, you need the "SIEM806A.GSD" or "SIEM806B.GSD" device master file (see Section 6.1 in the "SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System" manual). Parameters A description of the parameters can be found in Section 10. The table below lists the actions and value ranges that can be set with the various parameters for the DSS1e-x soft starter. Parameters Action, value range Rated operating current (Increment 10 mA) * Range 1 * * Range 2 * Range 3 Non-resetting on voltage failure 1, 2) Prewarning limit value (Motor heating) 1) Response to overload - thermal motor model Tripping class Recovery time 1, 2) Idle time Reset the thermal overload model through functional switching Prewarning limit value 1) (time-based triggering) Response to current limit violation Lower current limit Upper current limit 1) 2) 3) 0.3 to 3 A (0.05 to 1.1 kW) * 2.4 to 8 A (1.1 to 3 kW) * 2.4 to 16 A (1.1 to 7.5 kW) * no * yes * 0 ... 95 % Ie * 0 = deactivated (increment: 5 %) * Shutdown without restart * Shutdown with restart * Warning * CLASS 5 (10A) * CLASS 10 only at 0.3 -3 A * 1 ... 30 min (increment: 0.5 min) * 0 ... 255 s * 0 = deactivated (increment: 1 s) * 0 ... 500 s * 0 = deactivated (increment: 1 s) * Warning * Disconnect * 18.75 ... 100 % 3) (increment: 3.125 %) * 50 ... 150 % Ie 3) * 50 ... 400 % Ie 1) (increment: 3.125 %) Factory setting * 3A * 8A * 16 A yes 0 = deactivated Shutdown without restart CLASS 5 (10A) 1.5 min 0 (deactivated) 0 (deactivated) Warning 18.75 % 112.5 % from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed Up to order number suffix: -.AA4: value present, but cannot be changed (fixed on factory setting) Of rated operational current Table 8-9: Parameters for the DS1e-x direct starter; high feature SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-42 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters Parameters Blocking current Blocking time 1,2) * * 1, 2) Response with power supply switching element missing 1, 2) Response to residual current detection Response with power switch OFF Asymmetry limit value 1, 2) Response to asymmetry Input signal extension Input signal delay Action, value range 1) 1) Input 1, 2 - signal level (x-increment, expansion module) Input 3, 4 - signal level 2DI COM control module 2DI LC COM control module) (see Section 10) Input 1 to 4 - action 150 ... 1000 % Ie (DS1e-x, RS1e-x) 150 ... 800 % Ie (DSS1e-x) (increment: 50 %) * 1...5s Increment: 0.5 s) * Group error * Group error only with ON command 4, 1) * Group warning1) * Warning * Disconnect * Group error * Group error with ON command 5, 1) * Group warning 1) * 30 ... 60 % Ie * 0 = deactivated (Increment 10 %) * Warning * Disconnect * 0 ... 200 ms (increment: 10 ms) * 10 ... 80 ms (increment: 10 ms) * NC * NO 800 % * * * * No action * NO NO NO NO NO 1) 2) 5) only only only only only Factory setting * * * * * * * * No action Shutdown without restart Shutdown with restart Shutdown at limit position, clockwise rotation Shutdown at limit position, counterclockwise rotation General warning Manual operation local Quick stop1) Cold run1) Emergency start Motor cw Motor ccw Trip reset 1) 1s Group error Disconnect Group error 30 % Disconnect 0 ms 10 ms NO from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed Up to order number suffix: -.AA4: value present, but cannot be changed (fixed on factory setting) Possible from order number suffix -.AA4 Table 8-9: Parameters for the DS1e-x direct starter; high feature (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-43 Direct and soft starters Parameters Inputs 1 to 4 signal 1) Response to CPU/master STOP Replacement values 1) Wait for startup parameter - data record 1) Enable delay of the brake when starting 1) Holding time of the brake when stopping 1) Group diagnosis 1) Action, value range * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * non-retentive Retentive Use dummy value Keep last value Motor cw Motor ccw (only with reversing starters) Brake actuation Trip Reset Emergency start Self-test Quick stop lock no yes -2.5 ... 2.5 s (increment: 0.01 s) 0 ... 25 s (increment: 0.01 s) Disable Enable Factory setting non-retentive Use dummy value = disconnect No action no 0s 0s Disable from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed Table 8-9: Parameters for the DS1e-x direct starter; high feature (Contd.) Group diagnosis: This parameter enables diagnosis messaging (error types are listed in Section 4.7). Note The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults on the SF-LED. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-44 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Direct and soft starters 8.4.6 Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) * Reversing starter incl. terminal module * Height with PE/N block * Depth with 2DI COM control module Weight * Reversing starter incl. terminal module * Direct starter incl. PE/N terminal block Module-specific data Assignment type Pollution degree at 400 V Safety class Degree of protection Power loss Pv 1) at Ie 1 kg 1.1 kg Type 1 to Ie 16 A, IEC 60947-4-1, DIN VDE 0660, Part 102 3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) I, DIN EN 61140 (VDE 140-1) IP20, IEC 60529 0.3 up to 3 A approx. 12 W 2.4 to 8 A approx. 9 W 2.4 to 16 A approx. 16 W Site altitude Ambient temperature range * Derating, see Section 3.4 * Order number suffix -.AB4 UL/CSA (vertical installation on horizontal rails) without DM-V15 with DM-V15 (horizontal installation on vertical rails) without DM-V15 Control circuit Rated operating voltage for electronic components: U1 Reverse polarity protection Rated operating voltage for contactor: U2 Reverse polarity protection power input * From electronic component supply: U1 * From soft-starter supply U2 * From the backplane bus Main circuit Rated operating voltage Ue IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 UL, CSA Rated insulation voltage Ui Rated impulse strength Uimp Rated frequency 1) 2) 65 x 290 x 150 332 173 see Figure 3-3. 0C to 60C 60C/14A 55C/16A 60C/15.2A 40C/14A 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) yes DC 24 V (DC 20.4 to 28.8 V at 0 to 60 C) 2) yes approx. 40 mA approx. 30 mA approx. 30 mA 480 V AC 480 V AC 500 V AC 6 kV 50/60 Hz For motor starter and terminal module as a function of rated operating current Ie (upper setting range). For motor starters with order number suffix -.AA3 from revision level E02 and order number suffix -.AA4, the frame potential of the contactor supply U2 is connected to the frame potential of the electronics supply U1. Connect the frame potential of U1 and U2 to the power module in order to prevent high compensating current. Table 8-10: Technical specifications - DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-45 Direct and soft starters Technical specifications - circuit breaker, soft-starter Circuit breaker Rated operating current 3/8/16 A Instantaneous overcurrent release Fixed setting at 13 x Ie max Rated short-circuit breaking capacity to Ie = 16 A (motor starter) 50 kA at 400 V Mechanical life Electrical life 100,000 operating cycles 100,000 operating cycles Soft starter Rated operational current Ie at 60C * AC-53a * AC-53b 3A 8/16 A Max. permissible output of the threephase induction motors at 400 V AC 7.5 kW Table 8-11: Technical specifications on DSS1e-x - power switch, soft starter SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 8-46 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9 Reversing starters Fail-safe reversing starter Section Subject Page 9.1 Overview 9-2 9.2 RS1-x reversing starter; standard 9-4 9.2.1 Features 9-4 9.2.2 Parameters 9-6 9.2.3 Technical specifications 9-7 9.3 RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter 9-10 9.3.1 Features 9-10 9.3.2 Additional features of the F-RS1e-x 9-13 9.3.3 Module replacement 9-18 9.3.4 Parameters 9-19 9.3.5 Technical specifications 9-22 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-1 Reversing starters 9.1 Overview Three versions of the ET 200S motor starters are available: * Standard series (code: RS-x 1) * High feature series, characterized by properties that boost system availability and improve diagnosis (code: RS1e-x). A distinction is made between the following: - If there is no communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: -.AA2 - If there is a communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: -.AA3 via the 2DI COM control module for the "Motor Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0) - If there is a communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: -.AA3 from revision level E02 via the 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module for the "Motor Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0) * Fail-safe series that ensures safe shutdown of the motor starter after an emergency stop command by means of the mechanically selected SG bus (code: F-RS1e-x). A distinction is made between the following: - With front communication interface via the 2DI COM control module for the "Motor Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0). - With front communication interface from revision level E05 via the 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module for the "Motor Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0) All motor starters have full protection against short-circuit and overload. Due to the integrated electronic overload protection, a cover of the power range up to 16 A with only two device versions is possible with motor starter; high feature/fail-safe. They also have more extensive diagnostics and additional parameters for system control and monitoring. The motor starter series with installation widths of 45/90 mm and 65/130 mm; high feature can be used in conjunction with the ET 200S safety-integrated system components for safety applications to PL e. The fail-safe motor starter series (F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x) in conjunction with fail-safe power modules (PM-D PROFIsafe and PM-D F X1) is suitable for use in safety applications up to PL e / SIL3. Warning If the circuit breaker or starter protection switch is switched on again after being tripped as a result of an overload or a short circuit, and there is a pending On signal for the contactor, the motor starts up. Caution Due to the operation of star-connected three-phase motors (especially if <1 kW), high EMC interference may occur. Interference above the IEC limit values can lead to an impairment of functions or failure of the electronics. In case of high EMC interference, we recommend the use of motors with EMC protection circuits. (Exception: electronic starters may not be operated with a EMC protection circuit). The best filtering effect is achieved with three-phase RC interference inversion modules. Varistor interference inversion modules should not be used since they only insufficiently filter out fast transients. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 9-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Reversing starters The table below presents an overview of the properties of the reversing starters. Feature RS-x1 RS1e-x F-RS1e-x Installation width [mm] 90 130 for power rating up to [kW] 5.5 7.5 Integrated switching devices for SIRIUS components of the size S00 S0 Short-circuit protection with 3RV circuit breaker with instantaneous overcurrent release X Short-circuit protection with 3RV circuit breaker with instantaneous overcurrent release Overload protection with thermal overload release integrated into circuit breaker X X Programmable electronic overload protection X Switching function Rated operating current mechanical 0.14 - 12 A Rated operating voltage 0.3 - 16 A 400 V Parameterizable no Tripping class CLASS 10 yes 10, 20 Asymmetry recognition yes Residual current detection no yes Parameterizable current limits no yes no yes 2 (up to 1.6 A) 2 Anti-blocking function with rapid shutdown Type of coordination (2 at 400 V) Use up to SIL (IEC 62 061) SIL31) Up to performance level (DIN EN ISO 13849-1) PLe1) Extra safety auxiliary switch SIL3 with failsafe kit 2 Compatible expansion modules (brake control modules) 1) SIL2 3) PLe 2) PLd 3) integral xB1 to 6 Free inputs through 2DI COM control module no yes 3) 2DI LC COM control module usable? no yes 4) "Motor Starter ES" usable? no yes 3) Derating necessary at top end of performance range? yes yes 2) Diagnosis, fault types see Section 1) 2) 3) 4) 4.7 Only with failsafe kit and additional infeed contactor With additional infeed contactor As of order number suffix -.AA3 and for F-RS1e-x As of order number suffix -.AA3 and revision level E02, as well as for F-RS1e-x from revision level E05 Table 9-1: Overview of reversing starters SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-3 Reversing starters 9.2 RS1-x reversing starter; standard 9.2.1 Features ET 200S RS1-x ... reversing starter; standard (see Figure 9-2) * Are motor starters for two directions of rotation that can be can be used in the ET 200S distributed I/O device. * Are suitable for switching and protecting three-phase loads up to 5.5 kW at 400 and 500 VAC * Are available with setting ranges of 0.14 - 0.2 A to 9 - 12 A * Are equipped with electromechanical SIRIUS switchgear * The contactor coils are controlled directly via integrated outputs. * The switching states of circuit breaker and contactor are indicated via integrated inputs. * Available diagnostic information of the reversing starter: - overload or short-circuit tripping/disconnection of the motor starter - fault at the motor starter * * * * * The circuit state and status are displayed via LEDs. Mechanical locking of clockwise/counterclockwise rotation Integrated disconnection functions via circuit breaker Upgradable with fail-safe kit 2 for safety system applications Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) for driving an additional module (e.g. brake control module xB1 to xB6) In the case of the xB3 and xB4 only the brake function is supported; the inputs have no effect. * The inputs of the xB3, xB4 or xB6 brake control module (e.g. limit-position switches) act directly on the contactor and brake drive circuit (for signal response, see Section 12.3.4). Important A protection circuit for the contactor coils is already integrated in the motor starter. Additional protection circuits connected to the contactor are not permissible. Important When switching over from clockwise rotation to counterclockwise rotation and vice versa, a switch-over interval of >200 ms must be observed. Please take into account this idle time in your user program. Note Input 1 (clockwise limit switch) has a direct effect on the contactor for clockwise rotation of the RS1-x and on the activation of the brake control module. Input 2 (counter-clockwise limit switch) has a direct effect on the contactor for counter-clockwise rotation of the RS1-x and on the activation of the brake control module. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 9-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Reversing starters View Scale for set current Toggle switch Opening to test the overload protection SF group error C-STAT contactor status Circuit breaker LEDs Channel for connecting lead to auxiliary switch block Caution Apertures only for 1-pole auxiliary switch block Warning Additional protective circuit not allowed. Only for control unit (see Section 4.3) relevant for safety-integrated system Figure 9-1: RS1-x reversing starter; standard Circuit diagram 1L1 3L2 5L3 DI 0.0 Readiness for operation DI 0.1 Contactor on DI 0.2 Circuit-breaker tripped Input 1 expansion module (only with RS1-x) (e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, clockwise rotation) Logic K1 K1 DO 0.1 Motor ccwf DO 0.2 Brake (only for RS1-x) Output to the expansion module (only with RS1-x) (e.g. xB1 to xB6 brake control, brake actuation) 2T1 4T2 6T3 K2 K2 Input 2 expansion module (only with RS1-x) (e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, counterclockwise rotation) DO 0.0 Motor cw Figure 9-2: Circuit diagram for RS1-x reversing starter; standard SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-5 Reversing starters 9.2.2 Parameters The following table indicates the parameters that can be set for the reversing starter. Parameters Action, value range Factory setting Applicability Group diagnosis * * Disable Enable Disable Module Response to CPU/ master STOP * * Disconnect Keep circuit state Disconnect Module Table 9-2: Parameters for RS1-x reversing starter; standard Group diagnosis: This parameter enables diagnosis messaging (error types are listed in Section 4.7). Note The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults on the SF-LED. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 9-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Reversing starters 9.2.3 Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) * Reversing starter incl. terminal module * Height with PE/N block * Depth with fail-safe kit (safety-integrated system) Weight * Reversing starter incl. terminal module * Reversing starter incl. PE/N terminal block Module-specific data Assignment type Pollution severity * At 400 V * At 500 V Safety class Degree of protection Power loss Pv 1) at Ie 1.25 A 1.6 to 6.3 A 8 to 12 A Control circuit Rated operating voltage for electronic components: U1 Reverse polarity protection Rated operating voltage for contactor: U2 Reverse polarity protection power input * From electronic component supply: U1 * From contactor supply: U2 * From the backplane bus Main circuit Rated operating voltage Ue * IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 * Protective separation between main and auxiliary circuits * UL, CSA Rated insulation voltage Ui Rated impulse strength Uimp Rated frequency 1) 90 x 264 x 120 306 144.5 1.6 kg 1.8 kg Type 1 to Ie 12 A, IEC 60947-4-1, DIN VDE 0660, Part 102 Type 2 to Ie 1.6 A 3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) 2, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) I, DIN EN 61140 (VDE 140-1) IP20, IEC 60529 approx. 9 W approx. 10 W approx. 11 W 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) yes 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) yes approx. 20 mA approx. 100 mA 10 mA 400 V AC 400 V 600 V AC 500 V AC 6 kV 50/60 Hz For motor starter and terminal module as a function of rated operating current Ie (upper setting range). Table 9-3: Technical specifications - RS1-x reversing starter; standard SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-7 Reversing starters Technical specifications - circuit breaker, contactor Circuit breaker Tripping class Class 10 Max. rated operating current 12 A Adjustment ranges * Thermal overload release * Instantaneous overcurrent release 0.14 - 0.2 A to 9 - 12 A fixed setting at 12 x Ie Rated short-circuit breaking capacity to Ie = 12 A 50 kA at 400 V Mechanical life Electrical life 100 000 switching cycles 100 000 contactor Rated operational current Ie at 60C * AC-1 * AC-2, AC-3 - At 400 V - At 500 V * AC-4 at 400 V Max. permissible output of the threephase induction motors at 500 VAC Positively driven operation - auxiliary contacts, contactor 12 A 12 A 9A 4.1 A 5.5 kW yes Mechanical life * contactor * Contactor with safety functionality 30 million switching cycles 10 million switching cycles Electrical life B10 see Figure 9-3. 1,000,000 1) Surge suppression Zener diodes integrated Operating times in the case of DC operation (total break time = contact parting time + arcing time) * At 0.85 to 1.1 x Us - Closing time - Contact parting time * Arcing time * 1) At 1.0 x Us - Closing time - Contact parting time 25 to 100 ms 20 to 50 ms 10 to 15 ms typ. 25 ms typ. 30 ms This information refers only to the mechanical switching element under its reference conditions. Table 9-4: Technical specifications RS... - circuit breaker, contactor, auxiliary switch block SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 9-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Reversing starters Operating cycles at 400 V Electrical life 107 8 6 4 2 106 8 6 4 2 105 8 6 4 2 Ia = Breaking current Ie = Rated operating current 104 8 6 4 2 103 2 3 4 5 6 10 9 12 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 4 5,5 200 Ia(A) 400 Ie(A) PN = Rated power of threephase motors at 400 V PN (kW) Figure 9-3: Electrical service life, contactor SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-9 Reversing starters 9.3 RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter 9.3.1 Features ET 200S RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature ET 200S F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter * Are motor starters for two directions of rotation that can be can be used in the ET 200S distributed I/O device. * Are suitable for switching and protecting three-phase loads up to 7.5 kW at 400 and 500 VAC * Are available in 3 setting ranges with 0.3 - 3 A, 2.4 - 8 A, 2.4 - 16 A * fitted with electro-mechanical SIRIUS switchgear (power switch, contactor) * Have parameterizable electronic overload protection * Upper and lower current limits can be defined and monitored for system and process supervision * The motor starter can be parameterized for warning or shutdown as the response to an overload event or if a current limit is violated * The integral protective mechanism recognizes a blocked motor and triggers a rapid shutdown * Integrated residual current detection * Integrated asymmetry detection * The as-is current is measured and the information transmitted to analyzers * The contactor coils are controlled directly via integrated outputs. * The switching status of the power switch is registered by means of an auxiliary switch * Detection of the circuit state of the contactor on the basis of current flow evaluation Detection of the circuit state in the F-RS1e-x using an auxiliary switch block as well * Available diagnostic information of the direct starter (see Table 4-7) * Circuit state and motor-starter status are indicated by LEDs * Mechanical locking of clockwise/counterclockwise rotation * Integrated disconnection functions via circuit breaker * For RS1e-x: auxiliary switch for ET 200S safety engineering (failsafe kit) already integrated For F-RS1e-x: Fail-safe partial shutdown integrated * The motor starters can be expanded with front-mounted standard SIRIUS accessories (e.g. auxiliary switch, time relay) for contactor size S0 * Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) at the side for driving an expansion module (e.g. brake control module xB1 to xB6) * Response to circuit breaker OFF parameterizable (from order number suffixes -.AA4 and -.AB4) * The 2 parameterizable inputs (DI 0.4 and DI 0.5, e.g. limit-position switches) of the expansion interface (expansion module, e.g. brake control module xB3, xB4, xB6) act directly on contactor and brake drive * 2 additional parameterizable inputs (DI 0.6 and DI 0.7) are available through the 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module that can be plugged into the front * Basic factory settings via the rotary switch of the power switch possible (see Section 10.18) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 9-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Reversing starters * Communication interface at the front for the RS1e-x with order numbers ending in: -.AA3 and for F-RS1e-x via the 2DI COM control module for the "Motor Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0) * With the 2DI LC COM control module for the "Manual Operation Local" mode for RS1e-x with order number suffix: -.AA3 from revision level E02 and for FRS1e-x from revision level E05. With RS1e-x from order number suffix -.AB4: * Quick stop * Cold run * Integrated log book functions with 3 device log books * Has expanded parameter options * PROFIenergy * Comprehensive diagnostics via data records * I&M data More information can be found in Section 10 View of RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature Rotary switch SF group error DEVICE device status Circuit breaker LEDs C-STAT contactor status Slot for 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module with clear cover sealable Aperture for standard SIRIUS accessories Latch indicator Figure 9-4: RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-11 Reversing starters Circuit diagram of RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature 1L1 3L2 5L3 DI 0.0 Ready from host/PLC DI 0.1 Motor ON/current flow DI 0.2 Group error General warning DI 0.3 Input 1 expansion module (e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, clockwise rotation) DI 0.4 Input 2 expansion module (e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, counterclockwise rotation) DI 0.5 Logic Input 3 control module 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN3) DI 0.6 Input 4 control module 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN4) DI 0.7 DI 1.0 - 1.5 Motor current Iact K1 Manual operation local DO 0.0 Motor cw DO 0.1 Motor ccw DO 0.2 Brake DO 0.3 Trip Reset DO 0.4 Emergency start DO 0.5 Self-test DO 1.7 1) Lock quick stop 1) Output to the expansion module (e.g. xB1 to xB6 brake control, brake actuation) Auxiliary switch for feedback loop in the safetyintegrated system K1 2T1 4T2 6T3 K2 K2 DI 1.6 Figure 9-5: Circuit diagram of RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature More detailed descriptions: * * * * * * Input signals, in section 4.9.2 Output signals in section 4.9.2 Motor current IAct in section 10.3 Inputs/actions in section 10.11 Emergency start in section 10.13 Trip reset in section 10.14 1) Order number suffix -.AB4 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 9-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Reversing starters 9.3.2 Additional features of the F-RS1e-x Additional features that only apply to the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters are: * 6 safety groups (SG1 to SG6) can be set using coding connectors in the terminal module * The safety groups are supplied via a fail-safe power module with overvoltage protection (PM-D F PROFIsafe, PM-D F X1) * 2 processors that monitor each other, for controlling the safety function: Safe shutdown in the event of emergency stop via the mechanically selected SG bus * The motor starter is safely shut down if the two processors produce varying results * A shunt release for the power switch is integrated to ensure a safe shutdown in the event of one of the contactors being welded. This feature can also be used in non-fail-safe mode to ensure a shutdown in the event of a welded contactor (see note) * It is possible to test the shunt release/power switch via the bus (DO 0.5) * Storage of the U1 operating voltage using a capacitor to ensure a safe shutdown in the event of U1 failure * Monitoring of the functioning of the capacitor for the U1 * Redundant configuration of the fail-safe components in the motor starter * The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips. Note A fail-safe motor starter can also be used in non-fail-safe mode with a PM-D power module. To do this, the coding for the safety group in the terminal module of the fail-safe motor starter must be set to SG3 and the U1 and U2 supply voltages must have the same potential. Safety note When using expansion modules (brake modules xB1 to xB6, 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module ), make sure that these modules are not fail-safe modules with fail-safe technology. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-13 Reversing starters Expansion module Operating mode PL according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 SIL according to IEC 62 061 Non-fail-safe mode xB1 X X X X xB2 X X X X xB3 X X 1) X 1) xB4 X X 1) X 1) xB5 X X xB6 X X 1) X 1) 2DI COM control module 2DI LC COM control module X X 1) X 1) 1) PLc/ SIL1/ PLd/ SIL2 X PLe /SIL3 X X 1) No feedback to the fail-safe technology may occur through the inputs, i.e. cross-circuits to the sensor cables should be eliminated (cross-circuit proof cable installation) Safety note Only applies in fail-safe mode (fail-safe technology) The F-RS1e-x can only be operated in the potential group of a PM-D F PROFIsafe or PM-D F X1 that safely limits the voltage to within the SIMATIC range. Safety note Cyclic test of the F-RS1e-x - Shunt release/circuit breaker Request self-test (DO 0.5) Circuit breaker must be in "Trip" position Turn circuit breaker to position "0" Circuit breaker must remain in position "0" by itself Turn circuit breaker to position "1" Circuit breaker must remain in position "1" by itself - Contactor Execute ON/OFF cycle with the emergency stop command using the mechanically selected SG bus. Carry out test for clockwise rotation (DO 0.0 - motor cw - must be "1" for this purpose), then carry out test for counter-clockwise rotation (DO 0.1 - motor ccw must be "1" for this purpose). The tests should be carried out on commissioning and then at least every 3-6 months (intermittent operation). SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 9-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Reversing starters Safety note Only one SG bus can be selected in the terminal module for each motor starter. Safety note You must only use the F-RS1e-x motor starter to control motors that do not constitute a danger to persons or to the environment if they suddenly shut down. Important After U1 has been applied, the F-RS1e-x requires approximately 30 s until the internal self-test is completed. DI 0.0 ready is then set in the process mapping via the host/PLC. Once the internal self-test is completed, the selected SG bus is monitored. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-15 Reversing starters View of the F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter Rotary switch Circuit breaker SF group error DEVICE device status C-STAT contactor status LEDs Safety group SG1 to SG6 Slot for 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module with clear cover sealable Aperture for standard SIRIUS accessories Latch indicator Figure 9-6: Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 9-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Reversing starters Circuit diagram of the F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter 1L1 3L2 5L3 SG1 to SG6 Mechanical selection of shutdown group DI 0.0 Ready from host/PLC DI 0.1 Motor ON/current flow DI 0.2 Group error General warning DI 0.3 Input 1 expansion module (e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, clockwise rotation) DI 0.4 Input 2 expansion module (e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, counterclockwise rotation) DI 0.5 Input 3 control module 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 3) DI 0.6 Logic Input 4 control module 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 4) DI 0.7 DI 1.0 - 1.5 Motor current Iact DI 1.6 K1 DO 0.0 Motor cw DO 0.1 Motor ccw DO 0.2 Brake DO 0.3 Trip Reset DO 0.4 Emergency start DO 0.5 Self-test Output to the expansion module (e.g. xB1 to xB6 brake control, brake actuation) Auxiliary switch for circuit state monitoring K1 2T1 4T2 6T3 K2 K2 Manual operation local Figure 9-7: Circuit diagram of the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter More detailed descriptions: * * * * * * Input signals, in section 4.9.2 Output signals in section 4.9.2 Motor current IAct in section 10.3 Inputs/actions in section 10.11 Emergency start in section 10.13 Trip reset in section 10.14 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-17 Reversing starters 9.3.3 Module replacement If a module has to be replaced, an acceptance test is not necessary. With the F-RS1e-x, however, it is necessary to repeat the safety function test (see cyclic test). Warning If there is a pending ON signal for the contactor, the motor starts up automatically. This applies to an F-RS1e-x motor starter after the self-test if there is no emergency stop present on the selected SG bus. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 9-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Reversing starters 9.3.4 Parameters A description of the parameters can be found in Section 10. The table below lists the actions and value ranges that can be set with the various parameters for the RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x reversing starters. Parameters Action, value range Rated operating current (Increment 10 mA) * Range 1 * * Range 2 * Range 3 Load type 1,2) Non-resetting on voltage failure 1, 2) Prewarning limit value (Motor heating) 1) Response to overload - thermal motor model Tripping class Recovery time 1, 2) Idle time Reset the thermal overload model through functional switching Prewarning limit value 1) (time-based triggering) Response to current limit violation Lower current limit Upper current limit 1) 2) 3) 0.3 to 3 A (0.05 to 1.1 kW) * 2.4 to 8 A (1.1 to 3 kW) * 2.4 to 16 A (1.1 to 7.5 kW) * 3 - phase motor * 1 - phase motor (only with electromechanical starters) * no * yes * 0 ... 95 % Ie * 0 = deactivated (increment: 5 %) * Shutdown without restart * Shutdown with restart * Warning * CLASS 5 (10a) 1) * CLASS 10 * CLASS 15 1) * CLASS 20 * 1 ... 30 min (increment: 0.5 min) * 0 ... 255 s * 0 = deactivated (increment: 1 s) * 0 ... 500 s * 0 = deactivated (increment: 1 s) * Warning * Disconnect * 18.75 to 100 % 3) (increment: 3.125 %) * 50 ... 150 % Ie 3) * 50 ... 400 % Ie 1) (increment: 3.125 %) Factory setting * 3A * 8A * 16 A 3 - phase motor yes 0 = deactivated Shutdown without restart CLASS 10 1.5 min 0 (deactivated) 0 (deactivated) Warning 18.75 % 112.5 % from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed Up to order number suffix: -.AA4: value present, but cannot be changed (fixed on factory setting) Of rated operational current Table 9-5: Parameters for RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-19 Reversing starters Parameters Blocking current Blocking time 1,2) * * 1, 2 Response with power supply switching element missing 1, 2) Response to residual current detection Response with power switch OFF Asymmetry limit value 1, 2) Response to asymmetry Lock time 1,2) (only with RS1e-x) Input signal extension Input signal delay 1) 1) Input 1, 2 - signal level (x-increment, expansion module) Input 3, 4 - signal level 2DI COM control module 2DI LC COM control module) (see Section 10) 1) 2) 5) Action, value range Factory setting 150 ... 1000 % Ie (DS1e-x, RS1e-x) 150 ... 800 % Ie (DSS1e-x) (increment: 50 %) * 1...5s (increment: 0.5 s) * Group error * Group error only with ON command 4, 1) * Group warning1) * Warning * Disconnect * Group error * Group error with ON command 5, 1) * Group warning 1) * 30 ... 60 % Ie * 0 = deactivated Increment: 10 % * Warning * Disconnect * 0 ... 60 s (increment: 1 s) Note: Lock time = 0 means a min. time of approx. 150 ms for safety reasons. * 0 ... 200 ms (increment: 10 ms) * 10 ... 80 ms (increment: 10 ms) * NC * NO 800 % 1s Group error Disconnect Group error 30 % Disconnect 0s 0 ms 10 ms NO from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed Up to order number suffix: -.AA4: value present, but cannot be changed (fixed on factory setting) Possible from order number suffix -.AA4 Table 9-5: Parameters for RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 9-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Reversing starters Parameters Input 1 to 4 - action Action, value range * * * * * NO NO NO NO NO only only only only only Inputs 1 to 4 signal 1) Response to CPU/master STOP Replacement values 1) Wait for startup parameter - data record 1) Enable delay of the brake when starting 1) Holding time of the brake when stopping 1) Group diagnosis Safe shutdown group 1) 7) 7) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * No action Shutdown without restart Shutdown with restart Shutdown at limit position, clockwise rotation Shutdown at limit position, counterclockwise rotation General warning Manual operation local Quick stop1) Cold run1) Emergency start Motor cw Motor-ccw ) Trip reset 1) non-retentive Retentive Use dummy value Keep last value Motor cw Motor ccw (only with reversing starters) Brake actuation Trip Reset Emergency start Self-test Quick stop lock no yes - 2.5 ... 2.5 s (increment: 0.01 s) 0 ... 25 s (increment: 0.01 s) Disable Enable Not assigned SG1 to SG6 Factory setting No action non-retentive Use dummy value = disconnect No action no 0s 0s Disable Not assigned from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed Only with F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x Table 9-5: Parameters for RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter (Contd.) Group diagnosis: This parameter enables diagnosis messaging (error types are listed in Section 4.7). Note The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults on the SF-LED. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-21 Reversing starters 9.3.5 Technical specifications Reversing starters RS1e-x F-RS1e-x Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) * Reversing starter incl. terminal module * Height with PE/N block * Depth with 2DI COM control module 130 x 290 x 150 332 173 Weight * Reversing starter incl. terminal module * Reversing starter incl. PE/N terminal block 2.2 kg 2.3 kg Module-specific data Assignment type (up to Ie 16 A at 400 V) 2 Type Pollution severity * At 400 V * * At 500 V 3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) 2, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) Safety class I, DIN EN 61140 (VDE 140-1) Degree of protection Power loss Pv 1) IP20, IEC 60529 at Ie approx. 9 W approx. 10 W approx. 18 W 0.3 up to 3 A 2.4 to 8 A 2.4 to 16 A Ambient temperature range * For derating see Section 3.4 * Order number suffix -.AB4 UL/CSA (vertical installation on horizontal rails) without DM-V15 0C to 60C 60C/14A 55C/16A 60C/15.2A with DM-V15 (horizontal installation on vertical rails) without DM-V15 Maximum attainable safety classes: * * * IEC 61508 2) SIL1) PL Cat.2) (DIN EN ISO 13849) 40C/16A 3) - - - 3 e 4 Table 9-6: Technical specifications - RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 9-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Reversing starters Reversing starters RS1e-x F-RS1e-x Safety parameters: * SFF (DIN EN / IEC 61508) - * * * * * DC (DIN EN ISO 13849) HFT (DIN EN / IEC 61508 - - - - - 99.64 %/ 99.70 % >99 1 1 365 24 * - - 3.5 x 10-5 8.0 x 10-5 - - - 8.1 x 10-10 1.8 x 10-9 20 nOP (DIN EN ISO 13849) dOP (DIN EN ISO 13849) hOP (DIN EN ISO 13849) * Low demand PFDAVG (10a) Test interval 3 months Test interval 6 months High demand/continuous mode PFH Test interval 3 months 1/hr Test interval 6 months 1/hr Proof test interval years * B10 1) 2) 3) For motor starter and terminal module as a function of rated operating current Ie (upper setting range). With safety-integrated system (see Section 11) This information refers only to the mechanical switching element under its reference conditions. * 1,000,0003) Table 9-6: Technical specifications - RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-23 Reversing starters Reversing starters RS1e-x F-RS1e-x Control circuit Rated operating voltage for electronic components U1 Reverse polarity protection 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) (21.6 to 26.4 VDC) yes Rated operating voltage for contactor: U2 DC 24 V (DC 20.4 to 28.8 V) Reverse polarity protection power input * From electronic component supply: U1 * From contactor supply U 2 Pick-up: (for 800 ms) Hold-in: * From SG1 to SG6 Pick-up: (for 200 ms) Hold-in: * Test function of the shunt release/power switch (50 ms) from U1 * From the backplane bus 1) yes approx. 40 mA approx. 100 mA 250 mA max. 150 mA approx. 250 mA approx. 55 mA approx. 1.5 A2) approx. 30 mA Main circuit Rated operating voltage Ue * IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 * Protective separation between main and auxiliary circuits * UL, CSA 500 V AC 400 V 600 V AC Rated insulation voltage Ui 500 V AC Rated impulse strength Uimp 6 kV Rated frequency 50/60 Hz 1) 2) For motor starters with order number suffix -.AA3 from revision level E02, the frame potential of the contactor supply U2 is connected with the frame potential of the electronics supply U1. Connect the frame potential of U1 and U2 to the power module in order to prevent high compensating current. In the event of simultaneous activation of the test function of several starters, the currents are cumulative! This current also flows if the supply voltage U1 recovers. Table 9-6: Technical specifications - RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 9-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Reversing starters Technical specifications - circuit breaker, contactor Reversing starters RS1e-x F-RS1e-x Circuit breaker Rated operating current 3/8/16 A Instantaneous overcurrent release Fixed setting at 13 x Ie max Rated short-circuit breaking capacity to Ie = 16 A (motor starter) 50 kA at 400 V Mechanical life Electrical life 100,000 operating cycles 100,000 operating cycles contactor Rated operational current Ie at 60C * AC-1 * AC-2, AC-3 - At 400 V - At 500 V * AC-4 at 400 V Max. permissible output of the threephase induction motors at 500 VAC Positively driven operation - auxiliary contacts, contactor 16 A 16 A 11 A 9A 7.5 kW yes Mechanical life contactor 10 million switching cycles Electrical life Switching frequency see Figure 9-8. 80/hr Surge suppression Zener diodes integrated Operating times in the case of DC operation (total break time = contact parting time + arcing time) * At 0.85 to 1.1 x Us - Closing time (ms) - Contact parting time (ms) * Arcing time (ms) * At 1.0 x Us - Closing time (ms) - Contact parting time (ms) 25 to 100 20 to 50 10 to 15 50 to 170 40 to 100 10 to 15 typ. 25 typ. 20 typ. 50 typ. 40 Table 9-7: Technical specifications of the RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x - power switch, contactor SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-25 Reversing starters Operating cycles at 400 V Electrical life 107 8 6 4 2 106 8 6 4 2 105 8 6 4 Ia = Breaking current Ie = Rated operating current 2 104 8 6 4 PN = Rated power of threephase motors at 400 V 2 103 1 2 4 5 6 3 8 1,1 3 10 12 20 16 7,5 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 Ia(A) 400 Ie(A) PN (kW) Figure 9-8: Electrical service life, contactor SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 9-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10 Functions Section Subject Page 10.1 Functions - Overview 10-3 10.2 Introduction 10-5 10.3 Basic function / basic parameters 10-6 10.3.1 Rated operating current 10-6 10.3.2 Load type 10-7 10.3.3 Non-resetting on voltage failure 10-8 10.3.4 Behavior with supply voltage switching element missing 10-8 10.4 Motor control 10-9 10.4.1 Electronic / mechanical switch technology 10-9 10.4.2 Reversing starter control function 10-10 10.5 Brake output (actuation via expansion modules) 10-11 10.6 Thermal motor model - motor protection 10-13 10.7 System monitoring 10-18 10.7.1 Current limits 10-18 10.7.2 Asymmetry monitoring 10-22 10.7.3 Shortcircuit protection (power switch / repair switch) 10-23 10.8 Field bus interface 10-25 10.8.1 Response to CPU/master STOP 10-25 10.8.2 Group diagnosis 10-26 10.8.3 Wait for startup parameter data records (from order number suffix -.AB4) 10-26 10.9 Communication 10-27 10.9.1 General 10-27 10.9.2 Commands 10-30 10.9.3 Plausibility check of data 10-31 10.9.4 Output of messages 10-32 10.9.5 Local device interface 10-33 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-1 Functions Section 10.10 Subject Page PROFIenergy 10-34 10.10.1 What is PROFIenergy 10-34 10.10.2 PROFIenergy (version V1.0) in the ET 200S motor starter 1) 10-34 10.11 Inputs 10-38 10.12 Cold run 10-47 10.13 Emergency start 10-48 10.14 Trip Reset 10-49 10.15 Self-test 10-50 10.16 Maintenance 10-52 10.17 Log book 10-53 10.18 Factory setting 10-54 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions 10.1 Functions - Overview Load type (Page 10-7): * 3-phase * 1-phase from -.AB4 DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x with F-starters ET200S to -.AA4 This section describes all parameters of the motor starters; high feature/fail-safe modules. A distinction is drawn between the permanently set values (fixed values) and the parameters that can be changed by the user. Non-resetting on voltage failure (can be changed) (Page 10-8) Response with "supply voltage switching element missing" adjustable (Page 10-8) Field bus interface (Page 10-9): * Dummy values * Wait for start-up parameter data records Reversing starter (Page 10-10) * Interlock time adjustable Brake output (only with the corresponding expansion module (xB1 to xB6) appropriate) (Page 10-11) * Setting the enable delay of the brake * Setting the holding time of the brake Motor protection (Page 10-13): * Response to overload - (thermal motor model) * Recovery time (adjustable) * Prewarning limit value motor heating * Prewarning limit value time trigger reserves * Idle time Plant monitoring (Page 10-18): * Response to residual current detection * Response to current limit violation * Set current limit values (upper/lower) * Variable blocking time * Variable blocking current * Non-symmetrical limit values (variable) * Response to asymmetry Table 10-1: Overview of the device functions SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-3 Inputs (only in combination with expansion module xB1 to xB6 and/or 2 DI COM/2 DI LC COM) (Page 10-38) * Input signal extension * Input signal delay * Retentive Input actions: * Shutdown without restart * Shutdown with restart * Shutdown at limit position, clockwise rotation * Shutdown at limit position, counterclockwise rotation * General warning * Manual operation local * Emergency start * Motor cw * Motor ccw * Quick stop * Cold run * Trip Reset Circuit breaker (Page 10-23): * Behavior with circuit breaker OFF variable from -.AB4 DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x with F-starters ET200S to -.AA4 Functions 1) 1) Maintenance (Page 10-52) Communication (Page 10-27) Emergency start (Page 10-48) Trip reset (Page 10-49) Self-test (Page 10-50) Cold run (Page 10-47) Log book (Page 10-53) Factory settings (Page 10-54) PROFIenergy (Page 10-34) 1) from order number suffix: -.AA4 (group error/group error only with ON command) Table 10-1: Overview of the device functions (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions 10.2 Introduction Device function This section describes the device functions. All device functions have inputs, e.g. device parameters and outputs, e.g. messages. The following scheme shows the principle of the device function: Outputs Inputs Measurements Device parameters Commands Protection Device function Messages Actions Figure 10-1: Principle of device function. Further details on the device parameters and their alteration options can be found in the Parameterization section. Intrinsic device protection The motor starter protects itself against destruction thanks to the thermal motor model. If the self-protection is triggered, - the motor and the brake output are shut down immediately, - the message "Switching element overload" is generated. It is not possible to switch on using "Emergency start". Currents Note All currents (e.g. blocking current, current limit values) are percentage current values relative to the rated operating current that is set on the device (e.g. Ie= 2 A corresponds to 100 %). SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-5 Functions 10.3 Basic function / basic parameters Basic parameters are "central" parameters required by several device functions. 10.3.1 Rated operating current Here you specify the rated operating current that uninterrupted can result in the branch (switchgear and motor). This is normally the nominal current of the motor. The setting range depends on the performance class of the motor starter ET200S HF / F - starter (0.3 ... 3.0 A, 2.4 ... 8 A and 2.4 ... 16 A). Notice The rated operating current is an important central parameter. The rated operating current must always be set so that the motor protection is ensured via the thermal motor model. Actual motor current The present current in the starter is returned for analysis by the process image. Current is measured for all 3 phases and the highest value is obtained. The 6-bit value returned in the process specifies the motor current ratio Iact / Irated (Irated = parameterized rated operating current). The value is shown with one place to the left of the decimal point (DI 1.5) and five places after the decimal point (DI 1.0 to DI 1.4). The maximum possible ratio of Iact / Irated is therefore 1.96875 (approx. 197 %). Resolution is 1/32 per bit (3.125 %). DI 1.5 DI 1.4 DI 1.3 DI 1.2 DI 1.1 DI 1.0 20 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 1 0.5 0.25 0.125 0.0625 0.03125 Total=1.96875 0 0 0 0 0 0 Iact = 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Iact = Irated x 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 Iact = Irated x 1.375 1 1 1 1 1 1 Iact = Irated x 1.96875 Iact = rated operating current Irated x value (DI 1.0 to DI 1.5) Irated = rated motor current Table 10-2: Actual motor current SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions Default setting The motor starter's rated operational current is set ex-works to the maximum value. This means that the motor can be tested without connection to the field bus and the starter does not trip. Correct motor protection might not necessarily be ensured under certain circumstances during this time. In the GSD file the rated operational current is preset to the minimum value for safety reasons. This value has to be parameterized as part of the configuration procedure. If it is not parameterized the motor starter could trip on account of an overload when the motor is started for the first time. Settings Device parameters Rated operating current Default setting In the motor starter: maximum value In GSD / motor starter ES: minimal value Adjustment range * 0.3 A ... 3.0 A * 2.4 A ... 8.0 A * 2.4 A ... 16.0 A Increment: 10 mA Table 10-3: Actual motor current settings Note The setting range depends on the device type! 10.3.2 Load type Here you enter whether the motor starter is to protect a 1-phase or 3-phase consumer. * With a 1-phase load, the asymmetry detection is deactivated! With all mechanically switched motor starters, the 1-phase load can be connected between any two phases. * With a 3-phase load, the asymmetry detection is activated! The three phase currents are compared with one another. Note The load type is only relevant to mechanical motor starters. Only 3-phase load types are permitted for connection to electronic starters. Caution It is not possible to connect multiple motors to a motor starter as otherwise the motor protection cannot be ensured. Settings Device parameters Load type Default setting 3-phase Adjustment range * 3-phase * 1-phase Table 10-4: Load type settings SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-7 Functions 10.3.3 Non-resetting on voltage failure These device parameters are used to determine whether the overload message is to be retained if the electronic voltage fails: * Overload * No overload Settings Device parameters Non-resetting on voltage failure Default setting Adjustment range yes * * yes no Table 10-5: Non-resetting on voltage failure settings 10.3.4 Behavior with supply voltage switching element missing This parameter is used to determine which message the motor starter outputs when the supply voltage of the switching elements and the output fails. Note Supply voltage of the switching elements The supply voltage of the switching elements (24 V) must be supplied via the voltage supply U2 (PM-D: A1+ / A2-). Settings Device parameters Behavior with supply voltage switching element missing Default setting Group error Adjustment range * Group error * Group error only for ON command * General warning Table 10-6: Settings SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions 10.4 Motor control 10.4.1 Electronic / mechanical switch technology Electronic switch technology The motor starter controls the 2-phase motors with thyristors. Phase L1 is not switched but is instead looped via the integrated repair switch from 400 V energy connection on the motor connection Danger Dangerous voltage. Risk of death or serious injury When a supply voltage is applied to the 400 V energy connection on the motor starter, dangerous voltage can occur at the motor starter output even without a starting command. In the event of work on the feeder, this must be isolated via the repair switch. Mechanical switching technology The motor starter controls the 3-phase motors with contactors. Switching element defective In the event of a defective switching element (contactor welded / connected through thyristor), the motor starter is no longer able to switch off the motor. Note If necessary, evaluate the "Switching element defective" message and switch the branch through a previous switching element accordingly. Messages and actions Message Actions Switching element defective Disconnect Switching element shortcircuited (e.g. contactor welded, power semiconductor connected through) Disconnect Switching element overload (e.g. power semiconductor too hot) Disconnect Motor cw -- Motor ccw (only with reversing starters) -- Electronics power supply too low -- Switching element power supply missing -- Start-ready for motor on -- Table 10-7: Messages and actions for switching technology SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-9 Functions 10.4.2 Reversing starter control function Description This control function can be used by the motor starter to control the motor rotation directions. An internal logic prevents both rotation directions being activated at the same time. The time-delayed switchover from one rotation direction to the other direction is realized by the interlock time. This function is only relevant to reversing starters. Interlock time The interlock time effects the time-delayed switchover of the rotation direction. Within the interlock time, the centrifugal mass of a drive should come to a standstill before the next switching command can be executed. Caution An interlock time set to 0 is set internally to 150 ms for safety reasons. Settings Device parameters Interlock time Default setting 0 Adjustment range 0 ... 60 s Increment: 1 s Table 10-8: Replacement value settings Messages and actions Message Action Motor ccw -- Interlock active -- Table 10-9: Messages and actions for reversing starter control function SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions 10.5 Brake output (actuation via expansion modules) Description A mechanical disc brake or spring action brake fitted onto the motor brakes the motor. The brake is controlled via the brake output. ET200S motor starters provide the option of switching the brake on a motor separately via external expansion modules (xB1 to xB6). This electronic output can be controlled independently of the switching status of the contactors / thyristors and thus from the motor status via the motor starter process image. Enable delay of the brake when starting Note Only effective with a simultaneous ON switching command for brake and motor. Positive time specifications: Delayed switching on of the brake output (brake venting) in relation to the motor. Negative time specifications: Delayed switching on of the motor in relation to the brake output (brake venting)1). In reversing mode, the enabling delay only starts after the interlock time elapses. Holding time of the brake when stopping Note Only effective with a simultaneous OFF switching command for brake and motor. These device parameters effect a delayed shutdown1) of the brake output in relation to the motor. It also has an effect if the PLC fails. In reversing mode, the holding time and interlock time run simultaneously. Switching on in the opposite direction of rotation is only possible after the interlock time has elapsed. It is possible to switch on in the same rotation direction straight away as here the interlock time is aborted. Priorities regulation "Enable delay of the brake when starting" has priority over "Holding time of the brake when stopping". An elapsed holding time is aborted when the enable delay is re-started. (Via ON switching command for brake and motor) 1) can only be realized with a separate externally-supplied brake. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-11 Functions Settings Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range Enable delay of the brake when starting 0s - 2.5 ... + 2.5 s Increment: 0.01 s Holding time of the brake when stopping 0s 0 ... + 25 s Increment: 0.01 s Table 10-10: Brake output settings Messages and actions Message Brake output active Action -- Table 10-11: Messages and actions for brake output Caution Negative enable delay and/or active holding time can only be realized with a separate, externally supplied brake. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions 10.6 Thermal motor model - motor protection Description An approximation of the heating status of the motor is calculated from the measured motor currents and the device parameters "Rated operational current" and "enable class". The data that indicates whether the motor is overloaded or working within its normal operating range is derived from this temperature. Response to overload - thermal motor model This device parameters is used to determine how the motor starter reacts to overload: * Shutdown without restart (AUTO RESET = off) * Following an overload, the shutdown command can only be reset after the motor model falls below the release threshold and a subsequent reset command (trip reset). * Shutdown with restart (AUTO RESET = on) Warning If "shut down with restart" is activated, the motor will start automatically. Risk of death, serious injury or damage to property In the event of a 'switch on' command to be dealt with, the motor starter will switch on automatically after the recovery time has elapsed. (Autoreset) Ensure that no dangerous status conditions can occur. * Warning Caution If the thermal motor model exceeds the limit value of 178 % for the intrinsic protection of the motor starter, a shutdown command is generated by the motor starter itself independently of the "Response on overload - thermal motor model" parameterization. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-13 Functions Tripping class Min. CLASS 20 CLASS 5 [Ie CLASS 5 tA V V CLASS 20 tA Min. The tripping class (CLASS) defines the maximum time to disengagement within which a protective device must trip from cold at 7.2 times the setting current (motor protection to IEC 60947). The tripping characteristics plot time to disengagement as a function of operating current. [Ie 2-pole load (failure of a phase or current asymmetry > 40 %) 3-pole symmetrical load Figure 10-2: Tripping class Note The options for the tripping classes depend on the motor starter and on the current range The following tripping classes can be parameterized: Motor starters CLASS F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x DS1e-x RS1e-x DSS1e-x: 0.3 ... 3 A 2.4 ... 8 A 2.4 ... 16 A 10/20 5(10a)1) / 10 / 151) / 20 5(10a) / 10 5(10a) 5(10a) 1) from an order number suffix: -.AB4 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions Recovery time Recovery time is the time defined for cooling after which a reset is possible following an overload trip. During the recovery time, any trip reset signals present remain ineffective. The recovery time after overload tripping is at least 1 minute. The recovery time can be parameterized and can be changed between 60 seconds and 1800 seconds. Power failures during this time extend the time specifications accordingly when the basic "Non-resetting on voltage failure" parameter is active. Prewarning limit value motor heating The motor starter also has the function of a prewarning, i.e. the motor starter warns if the motor heating limit is exceeded. This parameter can be used to specify a percentage motor heating process as a prewarning limit. This function is deactivated with a motor heating prewarning limit of 0 %. Prewarning limit value time-based trigger reserve This parameter can be used to specify a time as a prewarning limit. The motor starter warns against an impending overload shutdown within the parameterized time if the current operating conditions are observed. This function is deactivated with a time-based trigger reserve of 0 s. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-15 Functions Idle time Idle time is a time defined for cooling process following operational shutdown, in other words not after overload trips. After this time elapses, the thermal memory of the motor starter is cleared. A cold start is possible. This permits higher switching frequencies if the drive is of the correct size, without the motor model trigger limit being exceeded. Caution Higher switching frequencies result in greater motor heating. If the motor size (heat class) is not modified, motor protection can no longer be guaranteed. The diagram below shows the cooling response with and without pause time: Motor On Off t Motor heating Without Idle time Tripping limit Overload tripping t With Idle time Tripping limit No Overload tripping Idle time Idle time t Figure 10-3: Idle time The idle time can be set to a value in the range between 0 and 255 seconds. Note Motor heating - Motor heating > 50 %: After the pause time, the storage value of the motor model is reduced to 50 %. - Motor heating < 50 %: After the pause time, the storage value of the motor model is reduced to 0 %! SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions Settings Device parameters Response to overload thermal motor model Default setting Adjustment range Shutdown without restart * * * Shutdown without restart Shutdown with restart Warning DS1e-x / RS1e-x CLASS 10 CLASS CLASS CLASS CLASS FDS1e-x / FRS1e-x CLASS 10 CLASS 10 CLASS 20 DSS1e-x 0.3 ... 3 A CLASS 5 (10a) CLASS 5 (10a) CLASS 10 CLASS 5 (10a) Trigger class: 2.4 ... 8 A 2.4 ... 16 A CLASS 5 (10a) 5 (10a) 10 15 1) 20 1) Recovery time 90 s 60 ... 1800 s Increment: 30 s Prewarning limit value motor heating 0 % (= deactivated) 0 ... 95 % Increment: 5 % Prewarning limit value timebased trigger reserve 0 s (= deactivated) 0 ... 500 s Increment: 1 s Idle time 0 s (= deactivated) 0 ... 255 s Increment: 1 s 1) from an order number suffix: -.AB4 Table 10-12: Thermal motor model settings Messages and actions Message Thermal motor model deactivated Action -- Thermal motor model - overload Overload shutdown Shutdown (overload present) Pause time active Cooldown time active Advance warning limit - time-based trigger reserve not reached Advance warning limit - motor heating exceeded Table 10-13: Messages and actions for brake output SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-17 Functions 10.7 System monitoring 10.7.1 Current limits Description The motor current and the current limits can be used to derive information on a number of system states: System state Current value Protection by: Motor becomes more inert, for example on account of damaged bearings Motor becomes freer, for example because the processing material in the system has been used up. Current is higher or lower than usual Current limits Motor is blocked! Very high current flowing Blocking protection Motor running at no-load, e.g. due to system damage! Very low level of current flowing (< 18.75 % of Ie) Residual current detection Response to residual current detection The residual current detection is activated when the motor current falls below 18.75 % of the set rated operating current in all 3 phases. This device parameter (from order number suffix -.AA3, and on the F-DS1-e-x and RS1e-x) is used to determine how the motor starter should respond to residual current detection: * Warning * Disconnect Note When switching on the motor, the zero current detection is suppressed for approx. 1 second! Response to current limit violation This device parameters is used to determine how the motor starter reacts to current limit violation: * Warning * Disconnect SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions Upper/lower current limit You can enter an upper and /or lower current limit value. Example: * Substance for mixing too thick, i.e. current overshoots the upper current limit. * No-load operation, because drive belt broken, i.e. current undershoots the lower current limit. Notice The current limits are only active - for startup monitoring - after the CLASS time has elapsed, e.g. after 10 seconds for CLASS 10. For DSS1e-x: The current limits are only active for startup monitoring after the ramp time and the CLASS time have elapsed. The motor starter can be parameterized for warning or shutdown as the response to violation of the current limits. Note The current limits can also be deactivated. Blocking time The blocking time is the time in which a motor blocking must be present without shutdown. The motor starter shuts down if the blockage is still present after the blocking time expires. Blocking current monitoring The blocking current specifies how much current the motor (at nominal voltage) consumes when the axis is blocked. If the motor current exceeds the parameterized value for the blocking current, the motor starter detects a blocking. The blocking time monitoring is started from the point when the value is exceeded. If the blocking current flows for longer than the parameterized blocking time, the motor starter generates the shutdown command itself. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-19 Functions Blocking protection principle during acceleration The principle on which anti-blocking protection is based during acceleration, i.e. the interaction of blocking current and blocking time is illustrated below: Case 1: Motor continues to operate Stalled rotor Blocking current Blocking cancelled within blocking time Motor continues to operate Motor current Blocking W Case 2: Motor is shut down Stalled rotor Blocking current Blocking still present after the blocking time elapses Motor current Motor is shut down Blocking W Figure 10-4: Blocking protection principle during acceleration Blocking protection principle after acceleration After acceleration, the blocking protection behaves as follows in continuous operation: * The blocking time is reduced to 1 s regardless of the parameterized value. * The blocking current is monitored to max. 400 %. With a parameterized blocking current < 400 %, the parameter value is valid. * If the blocking protection engages, a shutdown command is generated by the motor starter itself. * The messages "Motor blocking shutdown" and "Group error" are generated. * The slave pointer "Number of motor overload trips" is increased by 1. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions Settings Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range Response to residual current detection Disconnect * * Warning Disconnect Response to current limit violation Warning * * Warning Disconnect Lower current limit 18.75 % * 18.75 ... 100 % of Ie * 0 % (= deactivated) Increment: 3.125 % Upper current limit 112.5 % * 50 ... 4001) % of Ie * 0 % (= deactivated) Increment: 3.125 % Blocking current 800 % * * Blocking time 1s * 1 ... 5 s Increment: 0.5 s 150 ... 1000 % of Ie 150 ... 800 % of Ie (DSS1e-x) Increment: 50 % 1) for -xAAx: 150% Table 10-14: Current limit value settings Messages and actions Message Action Ie limit value exceeded -- Ie limit value not reached -- Ie limit value shutdown Shutdown (limit value violation present) Residual current detected -- Zero current shutdown Shutdown (zero current detection) Motor blocking shutdown Shutdown (blocking protection) Table 10-15: Messages and actions for current limit values SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-21 Functions 10.7.2 Asymmetry monitoring Description Higher asymmetric current consumption is the reaction of a three-phase asynchronous motor to slight asymmetry in the supply voltage. This causes an increase in temperature in the stator and rotor windings. In this case, the motor starter protects the motor against overload via a shutdown. Note When switching on the motor, the asymmetry evaluation is suppressed for approx. 0.5 s! Asymmetrical limit value The asymmetry limit is a percentage by which motor current can vary in the individual phases. Asymmetry occurs when the difference between the smallest and largest phase current is greater than the parameterized asymmetry limit. The reference value for the evaluation is the maximum phase current in one of the 3 phases. Response to asymmetry This device parameters is used to determine how the motor starter reacts to asymmetry: * Warning * Disconnect Settings Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range Response to asymmetry Disconnect * * Warning Disconnect Asymmetry limit values 30 % * 30 ... 60 % * 0 = deactivated Increment: 10 % Table 10-16: Asymmetry monitoring settings Messages and actions Message Action Asymmetry detected -- Asymmetry shutdown Shutdown (asymmetry present) Table 10-17: Messages and actions for asymmetry monitoring SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions 10.7.3 Shortcircuit protection (power switch / repair switch) Description The motor starter is fitted with an integrated power switch as shortcircuit protection to ensure the safety of the system and prevent personal injury. Monitoring is carried out on both a shortcircuit between a phase and earth (= earth protection), as well as between two phases. Properties of the power switch The power switch / repair switch is designed for the following individual functions: * Disconnection of the series-connected starter and consumer from the mains supply * Start lockout via a padlock on the rotary element * Shortcircuit protection for series-connected consumers with power switch * Reset with reactivation * Restore basic factory settings, see Basic factory settings Response with power switch OFF: The device parameters are used to determine how the motor starter responds to a shortcircuit or manual shutdown of the power switch: * Group error * Group error only for ON command * General warning Settings Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range Response with power switch OFF -- -.AA2 -.AA3 with version E01 Group error -- -.AA3 with version E02 Group error only for ON command -- -.AA4 Group error * * Group error Group error only for ON command -.AB4 Group error * * Group error Group error only for ON command General warning * Table 10-18: Settings for response with power switch OFF Note Can only be parameterized with order number suffixes -.AA4 / -.AB4, not with .AA3 (fixed to group error only with ON command) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-23 Functions Messages and actions Message Circuit-breaker tripped Action -- Table 10-19: Messages and actions for plug monitoring SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions 10.8 Field bus interface 10.8.1 Response to CPU/master STOP This device parameter is used to determine how the motor starter should respond to a CPU/master STOP: * Keep last value * Use dummy value Caution This is only relevant in Automatic operating mode. Dummy values In the event of a bus failure or CPU / master STOP, an appropriate dummy process image of the motor starter outputs is controlled. Note This device parameter is only relevant if you have set the parameters "Response with CPU / master STOP" "Connect dummy value". Note Motor cw and motor ccw cannot be set simultaneously. The * * * * * * * dummy value can be switched individually for the following parameters: Motor cw Motor ccw (only with reversing starters) Brake actuation Trip Reset Emergency start Self-test Quick stop lock Note With dummy value "Motor cw" or "Motor ccw" set, the connected motor is switched on if the bus fails or with CPU/master STOP. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-25 Functions Settings Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range Response to CPU/master STOP Use dummy value * Use dummy value * Keep last value Replacement value 0 7 x (0 or 1) Table 10-20: Replacement value settings Messages and actions Message Action CPU/master STOP -- Bus fault -- Table 10-21: Messages and actions 10.8.2 Group diagnosis This parameter is used to determine whether the diagnostics are to be enabled or locked via the field bus interface. If the parameter for the group diagnostics is set to "lock", no error messages will then be issued. Settings Device parameters Group diagnosis Default setting Disable Adjustment range * Disable * Enable Table 10-22: Group diagnostics settings Wait for start-up parameter data records 10.8.3 Wait for startup parameter data records (from order number suffix -.AB4) This bit is set with a DPV1 configuration via STEP 7 directly by the object manager. The motor starter uses this to detect whether or not a data record transfer is carried out. The motor starter startup process is stopped until the data transfer is complete. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions 10.9 Communication 10.9.1 General Description The communication is a higher level function consisting of multiple sub-functions: * Operating type monitoring * Rear wall bus integration * Commands * Plausibility check of data * Output of messages Data channels ET 200S motor starters have 3 different data channels: * Local serial device interface via the expansion module 2 DI COM LC (see Section 4.4 and Section 4.5) * mt control local control point in "Manual local" operating mode - Input action of the digital inputs 1) (via xB3, xB4, xB6 brake expansion module and / or 2DI Com / 2DI LC COM control module) * Via the rear wall bus connection The control via the corresponding data channel depends on the operating mode. Operating modes The following operating modes are differentiated with increasing priority: * "Automatic" operating mode (lowest priority) The motor starter can only be controlled with PLC via field bus. * "Manual bus" operating mode The motor starter can only be controlled with B&B (e.g. PC) via field bus. * "Manual local" operating mode Motor starter can be controlled with. - On-site control point on digital inputs ("Motor cw", "Motor ccw") Requirement: "Manual local" operating mode set - B&B device (e.g. PC, hand-held controller) via the local device interface (maximum priority) Notice A higher priority operating mode can take master control away from a lower priority operating mode at any time by a command or input action in "manual" operating mode, but the reverse is not possible. A lower priority operating mode can only regain master control if the higher priority operating mode returns master control via the "automatic" operating mode command or by switching off the input action in "manual local" operating mode, with the motor switched off. 1) via xB3, xB4, xB6 brake expansion module or/and 2DI COM/2DI LC COM control module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-27 Functions Using the following signaling bits in diagnostics data record DS92, it is possible to uniquely detect which control source currently has control priority: * "Automatic" operating mode * "Manual bus" operating mode * "Manual local" operating mode * Input control * Lost connection in "Manual" operating mode Automatic Manual Manual bus Master control goes to Manual operation local Automatic operating mode Manual bus operating mode Manual local operating mode Control input Lost connection in "Manual" operating mode 0 0 1 0 0 PC via device interface 0 0 1 0 1 none 0 0 1 1 0 Digital input 0 1 0 0 0 PC via field bus 0 1 0 0 1 none 1 0 0 0 0 Control (PLC) Table 10-23: Control priority of operating modes Connection monitoring The connection monitoring is active in the "Manual bus" and "Manual local" operating modes. A write data record must be sent within 5 seconds. Otherwise the motor starter switches off with the message "Connection lost in manual operating mode". If you do not want to send any commands or control commands, you can send an empty data record, for example. Use an empty data record 93 "command" for this purpose. Here, only the coordination is filled out as appropriate and the commands filled with "0". Set manual local operating mode for a local control point on the digital inputs The operating mode can be set as follows: * Using a B&B device (e.g. PC) via the local device interface. Parameterize the input n-action "Motor cw" and "Motor ccw". Then remove the B&B device to activate the control via the digital inputs. The "Control input" signaling bit is set in the process. * With a digital input on which you connect a switch for switchover to the "Manual local" operating mode This digital input then needs to be parameterized using the n -action "Manual local" input. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions Relationships between the operating modes with different control tasks The table below shows the relationships between the operating modes with different control tasks: Control task Control Control via PLC Automatic operating mode Manual bus operating mode X PC / PG X Device interface Parameterize Commands X PLC X PC / PG X X Device interface X X PLC Manual local operating mode X X1) PC / PG X X Device interface X X X Diagnostics, PLC measurements, statis- PC / PG tics read Device interface X X X X X X X X X X = function permitted 1) except basic factory setting and restart Table 10-24: Control priority of operating modes SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-29 Functions 10.9.2 Commands Commands and their meaning The commands can be used to get the motor starter to complete certain actions. For example, the following commands can be sent to the motor starter using the Motor Starter ES configuration software: Command Trip Reset Meaning * * * Reset and acknowledgement of error messages Delete signaling bits if there are no error messages No effect Emergency start ON Switch on emergency start device function Emergency start OFF Switch off emergency start device function Automatic operating mode Control via PLC; cyclical and acyclical bus channel (C1) Manual operating mode * * Control via PC; acyclical bus channel (C2) Control via device interface Factory setting All parameters have basic factory setting again except for the communication parameters. Only possible in manual operating mode! Clear slave pointer Clear the "preventative diagnostics" statistics data Re-start Motor starter runs a restart (same action as Power OFF / ON). Only possible in manual operating mode! Parameterization lock CPU / Master OFF Motor starter accepts parameterization via master (PLC) Parameterization lock CPU / Master ON Motor starter ignores parameterization via master (PLC) Clear log book trips Clear log book with recorded causes of error. Clear log book events Clear log book with recorded warning messages and specific actions. Cold run ON Permits the activation of the switching contacts without main energy Cold run OFF Switches the "cold run" function off Clear maintenance timer Clears the timer for the maintenance function Table 10-25: Commands and their meaning SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions 10.9.3 Plausibility check of data Description The motor starter checks all incoming parameters for validity and plausibility. For incorrect parameters * during a startup (after power ON), the messages "Group error" and "Incorrect parameter value" are set. Motor and brake output remain switched off. * in ongoing operation, the messages "Incorrect parameter value" or "Parameterization in ON status not permitted" are set. "Group error" is not set. Motor and brake output are not switched off. Note The current valid parameter values are retained. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-31 Functions 10.9.4 Output of messages Message Meaning General messages Ready (automatic) Device can be actuated via BUS (e.g. PLC). Group error At least 1 error is set. General warning At least 1 warning exists. Group prewarning At least 1 prewarning exists. Process image error Process image of the outputs contains nonallowable bit combination, e.g. motor cw and motor ccw set simultaneously. Field bus connection Bus fault Response monitoring for field bus interface elapsed. CPU/master STOP PLC program no longer being processed Acknowledgment Trip reset completed Trip teset accepted, i.e. error has been acknowledged. Trip reset not possible Unable to acknowledge error as the reason for the shutdown is still present. Operating type monitoring Automatic operating mode Automatic (PLC control) Manual operating mode - bus Manual operation via field bus (B&B control) Manual operation local Manual local operation: * Manual operation via Motor Starter ES * B&B control * Input control Lost connection in manual operating mode During manual operation, the associated communication connection was interrupted for longer than 5 seconds. Table 10-26: Maintenance messages and actions SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions Message Meaning Parameter assignment Parameterization active Incorrect parameter value Yes / no 1) Parameter not correct Parameter change in ON status not permissible 1) Attempted parameter change not permissible when the motor is running. Faulty parameter number1) Specifies the first unaccepted parameter (object number of the parameter). Parameterization lock CPU / Master active Motor starter ignores parameters from the PLC, but informs the PLC that parameters are OK. No external startup arameter er hold After Power ON or a restart of the motor starter, new parameters are received by the PLC. Statistics data Slave point cleared1) 1) Statistics data for preventative diagnostics have been cleared. Signaling bits that can be cleared with trip reset Table 10-26: Maintenance messages and actions 10.9.5 Local device interface Description The device interface on the 2DI COM / 2 DI LC COM (see Section 4.4 and 4.5) can be used to connect the motor starter to a PC or a hand-held device (order no. 3RK1922-3BA00; RS232 interface cable: 6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0). This control source has the highest priority level. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-33 Functions 10.10 PROFIenergy 10.10.1 What is PROFIenergy PROFIenergy (PE) PROFIenergy (PE) supports the following two functions: * PE_power saving function supports the targeted shutdown of consumers during pause times. * PE_measurement function Power management is a suitable tool for securing the reduction in energy consumption and thus the energy costs systematically and in the long-term in the company. The aim of power management is to optimize the use of energy in a company - from purchasing energy to consuming energy - both in terms of financial and green aspects. The PE_measurement function supplies the measurements required for optimization. 10.10.2 PROFIenergy (version V1.0) in the ET 200S motor starter 1) The ET200S motor starter supports the "PE_power saving function" and "PE_measurement function" for the motor current. These are referred to as commands as they trigger responses in the ET200S motor starter. In addition, the ET200S motor starter delivers other what are known as services that provide information on the status of the motor starter, as defined for PROFenergy. These can then be evaluated and processed in the application program. Commands Control commands Start_Pause The starter changes to energy-saving mode. End_Pause The starter changes back to operating mode. Status commands PE_Identify Delivers a list with the supported PROFIenergy commands / functions. PEM_Status Delivers the status of the current PE mode. Query_Modes List_Energy_Saving_Modes Delivers a list of supported power-saving modes. Get_Mode Delivers the paramter values with which the PE_energy saving function works. Query_Measurement Get_Measurement_List Delivers a list with the supported PE_Measurement Get_Measurement_Values Delivers the supported PE_measurements Table 10-27: Messages and actions 1) from order number suffix: -.AB4 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-34 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions For data transfer, a distinction is made between two different status conditions with the ET 200S motor starter: PE_Mode_ID = 255 Operating mode PE_Mode_ID = 01 Energy-saving mode 6WDUWB3DXVH! W (QGB3DXVH! WRII WRIIBPLQ WRQ W 3DXVHBPLQ toff Time_to_Pause time required by the device to change to energy-saving mode. toff_min Time_min_length_of_stay Minl time for which the device is to be kept or remain in energy-saving mode. ton Time_to_operate Time that the device requires to change to operating mode. tPause_min Time_min_Pause Time compared to tPause (sent to the motor starter together with the "Start_Pause" command); if tPause tPause_min, then the device changes into energy-saving mode. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-35 Functions "PE_measurement function" command For efficient energy management, energy measurements must be provided. Different measurements are available for selection by the PROFIenergy specifications, to which a measurement ID is assigned. With the ET 200S motor starter, the instantaneous measurements of the phase current and mean value of the phase currents are supported. The measurements are uniquely identified using IDs. Measurement IDs 7, 8, 9 and 33 are supported: * ID = 7: Instantaneous value of phase current a (L1) * ID = 8: Instantaneous value of phase current b (L2) * ID = 9: Instantaneous value of phase current c (L3) * ID = 33: Mean value of the three phase currents (a+b+c) / 3 The current values are sent under the following accuracy specifications: * Accuracy Domain (unsigned8) = 0x01 percent of full-scale reading * Accuracy Class (unsigned8) = 0x11 3 % * Range (Float32) = Ie_max (fixed value parameter) This means that the measurements with an accuracy of 3 % relative to the maximum adjustable rated operating current Ie is sent. Local LED display on the ET 200S motor starter The "Energy-saving mode active" status is displayed via the flashing device LED (flashing sequence: 0.25 s on / 1.75 s off unique flashing rhythm for energysaving mode). Note An error present is not acknowledged by changing to energy-saving mode, i.e. the error present is stored internally and can be exported. After exiting energysaving mode, the error must be rectified and acknowledged. The status displays for the bus and the supply voltages and the SF-LED are not affected by the active energy-saving mode. Response of the starter on activating energy-saving mode: Motor shutdown via suppression (masked) of the PAA bits Motor cw, Motor ccw, BRAKE). The other PAA bits (e.g. trip reset) are still active. Interactions with the different operating modes * PE is only effective in automatic mode * manual operation is not affected by PE; switching over to manual operation is still possible which means the motor can be controlled manually. * Cyclical and acyclical data transfer (PAE, data records, diagnostics, alarms, etc.) to and from the motor starter are still possible. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-36 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions Requirements for the starter to go to energy-saving mode (min. pause time,...) The change to energy saving mode "Pause" is only effective if the sent pause time is greater than the device-specific minimum pause time. i.e. a change is only implemented if the pause is longer than the motor starter needs to switch off the main power for the motor. With a soft starter, a parameterized slow-down ramp of the device-specific minimum pause time needs to be added. The change to energy-saving mode is logged in the "Events" log book. Entry: "Energy-saving mode active" In Motor Starter ES diagnostics tool, the change is entered into the log book in energy-saving mode with the event ID 1520. Requirements for the "PROFIenergy" function The following requirements need to be met for an ET 200S PROFINET to communicate via the PNO profile PROFIenergy: * ET 200S Profinet header group with PROFIenergy support * ET 200S high feature motor starter from order number suffix .-AB4 How do I use PROFIenergy in the ET 200S system SIEMENS offers two functional modules for the use of PROFIenergy: * PE_START_END (FB815) supports switching to energy-saving mode * PE_CMD (FB816) supports the export of measurements and switching to energy-saving mode These can be purchased online at the following link: Example application for PROFIenergy. See Service & Support on the internet * http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/41986454 * http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/66829209 More information PROFIenergy: See PROFINET system description * http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-37 Functions 10.11 Inputs Description With the "Inputs" device function, the motor starter can execute various actions that you can parameterize. The signals at the digital inputs are evaluated for this purpose. Inputs 1 and 2 (DI 0.4, DI 0.5) are actuated via the expansion interface for expansion modules (e.g. brake control module xB3, xB4, xB6). Inputs 3 and 4 (DI 0.6, DI 0.7) can be used directly via the control module (2DI COM / 2DI LC COM (See Section 4.4 and 4.5) with switching elements or sensors (PNP). The signal status conditions are sent in parallel via the process image. The input actions of the individual digital inputs affect the motor starter functions independently from one another (= OR operand) Input signal extension A short input signal can be extended using this parameter in comparison to the actual input signal present. This makes it possible to ensure a reliable transfer (compensation of bus transfer times and processing time in the control). Input signal delay For interference immunity reasons, a debounce time can be set for the inputs. n signal input This device parameter is used to specify whether or not the input level of the digital inputs is to be saved. * Retentive, i.e. self-holding operation (edge evaluation) The action can be deactivated again due to another event despite an input signal being present. * Non-retentive, i.e. inching operation (level evaluation) This input action is active for as long as the input is activated. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-38 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions n level input This device parameter is used to specify the input logic: * NC * NO Caution With "n action input": "Emergency start", "Motor cw", "Motor ccw", "Cold run" and "Trip reset", "n level input" can only be parameterized as a normally open contact! Notice When "n level input" of normally closed contacts are parameterized to normally open and the associated "n action input" is parameterized to "Shutdown without restart" then, when the input is open, the "Input shutdown" signaling bit is set and shut down accordingly due to the input delay! Notice With the input voltage present (input active), a 1 is sent to the control, regardless of the "n level input" parameter, see figure "Overview of the input parameters" SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-39 Functions n action input A variety of actions can be triggered by an input signal. You can parameterize the actions below, depending on "n level input", "n signal input" and "Operating mode". Notice When "n signal input" = retentive and "n action input" = Motor cw / ccw, at least one input with input action "Shutdown..." or "Quick stop" always needs to be parameterized. If this rule is not observed, the parameters of the motor starter and corresponding diagnostics report will be rejected! Input, n action level signal Operating mode Description No action NO / NC n.ret / ret all No direct action at the motor starter. Evaluation and processing by the process image are possible. Shutdown without restart NO / NC n.ret / - all * * Results in the shutdown of motor and brake. Acknowledgment necessary after the cause of the shutdown has been rectified (input status). Shutdown with re-start (autoreset) NO / NC n.ret / - all * * Results in the shutdown of motor and brake. Automatic acknowledgment after the cause of the shutdown has been rectified (input status). Shutdown at limit position, clockwise rotation NO / NC n.ret / - all * Shutdown end position ccw (RS1-x only) NO / NC Motor and brake output are shut down irrespective of the direction of rotation. Re-start of the brake output is possible after clearing the control commands"Brake" and "Motor cw / ccw". Shutdown at limit position, clockwise rotation Motor switch-on is possible only with the counter-command "motor ccw". Shutdown at limit position, counterclockwise rotation Motor switch-on is possible only with the counter-command "motor cw". * n.ret / - all * * General warning NO / NC n.ret / ret all * * The "General Warning" message is issued. The motor starter and the brake output are not shut down! sp: The input action responds to the active edge of the input signal. Deactivation with active input signal present is therefore possible. Action is deactivated with trip reset. Table 10-28: Description of actions SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-40 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions Input, n action level signal Operating mode Manual operation local NO / NC n.ret / - all Description * * * Emergency start NO / - n.ret / - all * * * * Control only possible via "Input n - action: Motor cw and motor ccw" (see below) possible! Control via field bus ("Automatic" operating mode) not possible! The automatic mode is only possible again once the manual local operation mode is canceled and "Input n action": "Motor cw" or "Motor ccw" is not active. Switches the motor on with ON switching command present despite an internal trip command being present. When an ON switching command is present for the brake output, also switches this output on. Intrinsic protection of the motor starter remains active and protects the device against being destroyed Permissible only as NO contact. * The motor starter must be in the "Manual local" operating mode for these actions. * The device parameters of the brake process are evaluated * "Motor cw": switches motor and brake output on and off together (clockwise rotation). * "Motor ccw": switches motor and brake output on and off together (counter-clockwise rotation). * Permissible only as NO contact. sp: The input action is triggered provided that the active level of the input signal is present. The input trigger is cleared by the input action "Quick stop" or group error. Motor cw NO / - n.ret / ret Manual operation local Motor ccw (RS1e-x only) NO / - n.ret / ret Manual operation local Quick stop NO / NC n.ret / ret all * Trip Reset NO / NC n.ret / - all * * Motor and brake output are switched off without a group error. * "Quick stop" has priority over "Motor cw" and "Motor ccw" sp: The input action responds to the active edge of the input signal. Deactivation is therefore possible with the active input signal present. The input trigger is cleared by removing the control commands "Motor cw" and "Motor ccw" - With control via input actions Motor cw / ccw, the quick stop function is always evaluated for retentive independent of the parameterization. "Trip reset" is triggered once Only possible as NO contact. Table 10-28: Description of actions (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-41 Functions Input, n action level signal Cold run NO / - n.ret / - Operating mode all Description * Permits switch-on without main power. If the main power is still on (current is flowing), an internal shutdown command is generated. NO: Normally open contact NC: Normally closed contact sp: retentive n.sp: non-retentive (activation and deactivation of the input action follows the status of the input signal (= inching mode)) Table 10-28: Description of actions (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-42 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions Quick stop * Motor and brake output are switched off without a group error. * "Quick stop" has priority over "Motor cw" and "Motor ccw" * The input action responds to the active edge of the input signal. Deactivation with static "Quick stop" input signal present is therefore possible. * The input trigger is cleared by removing the "Motor cw" and "Motor ccw" control commands or via "Lock quick stop" (in the process image). Example 1: Input 1-signal = retentive / edge-triggered DO 0.0 motor cw DI 0.4 input 1 Quick stop function DO 1.7 Lock quick stop Motor Motor is switched on by "Motor cw". Motor is switched on by "Motor cw", then switched off by the rising edge at the digital input 1 (parameterized to input action 1 = quick stop). The quick stop function is reset by removing the "Motor cw" command. Motor is switched on by "Motor cw", then switched off by the rising edge at the digital input 1. The quick stop function is reset by setting "Lock quick stop" and the motor runs "clockwise" again until the "Motor cw" command is cleared. Motor is switched on by "Motor cw", then switched off by the rising edge at the digital input 1. The quick stop function is reset by setting "Lock quick stop" and the motor runs "clockwise" again until the "Motor cw" command is cleared. Although digital input 1(DI2) remains statically activated, the motor continues to run and is only reset when the "Motor cw" command is cleared. Reason: The input action is edge triggered. Motor is switched on by "Motor cw" and continues to run, uninterrupted, as "Lock quick stop" permanently overrides the edges of the digital input 1 (DI2) signal. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-43 Functions Example 2: Input 1-signal = non-retentive DO 0.0 motor cw DI 0.4 input 1 Quick stop function DO 1.7 Lock quick stop Motor Motor is switched on and off by "Motor cw". Motor is switched on by "Motor cw", then switched off by the level at the digital input 1 (parameterized with input action 1 = quick stop). The quick stop function is reset by "Lock quick stop". Motor is switched on again, as "Motor cw" is still active. Motor is switched off by the level at digital input 1. The quick stop function is reset by setting "Lock quick stop" and, as the "Motor cw" level is still present, the motor runs "clockwise" again until the "Motor cw" command is cleared. Motor is switched on by "Motor cw", then switched off by the rising edge at the digital input 1. As long as the "Quick stop" function is activated, the motor remains switched off and starts running again when "Quick stop" is cleared, until "Motor cw" is switched off. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-44 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions Settings Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range Input signal extension 0 ms * 0 ... 200 ms Increment: 10 ms Input signal delay 10 ms * 10 ... 80 ms Increment: 10 ms Input 1 - level NO * * NC NO No action Input 3 - action * * * * Input 4 - action * * * * * * * * * No action Shutdown without restart Shutdown with restart Shutdown at limit position, clockwise rotation Shutdown end position ccw (RS1e-x only) General warning Manual operation local Emergency start Motor cw Motor ccw ( RS1e-x only) Quick stop Trip Reset Cold run * * Retentive non-retentive Input 2 - level Input 3 - level Input 4 - level Input 1 - action Input 2 - action Input 1 - signal Input 2 - signal non-retentive Input 3 - signal Input 4 - signal Table 10-29: Input settings SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-45 Functions Messages and actions Message Action Input 1 -- Input 2 -- Input 3 -- Input 4 -- Input tripping Shutdown (must be acknowledged with trip reset) Shutdown input - clockwise end position Shutdown (must be acknowledged with countercommand) Shutdown input - counterclockwise end position Input control -- Warning input -- Sensor supply overload Shutdown (must be acknowledged with trip reset) Quick stop active Shutdown without group error Table 10-30: Messages and actions for inputs SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-46 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions 10.12 Cold run Description This function allows the motor starter to be switched on without main power. The motor starter responds as if the main power is present on the system. For example, this means that during the commissioning phase, the corresponding control commands are accepted by the control and the corresponding messages are delivered. Note If the main power is still on (current is flowing), an internal shutdown command is generated. The "cold run" function can be activated as follows: * "Cold run" input action * Commands: Cold run ON/OFF With the "cold run" function is active, the motor switches off if * a current flow is detected * a main power flow present is detected. Messages and actions Message Actions Cold run active Cold run shutdown Disconnect Table 10-31: Messages and actions for cold run SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-47 Functions 10.13 Emergency start Description Emergency start enables a restart despite an internal shutdown command. Emergency start is possible when * On switching command present for the motor. The motor is switched on even if the reason for the shutdown persists. With end position shutdown, the motor starts in the opposite direction. * On switching command present for brake output. The output is switched on ("Enable delay of brake when starting" parameter is taken into account). Emergency start is not possible when * OFF switching command present * Device error present Signaling bit: "Error during self-test", "Switching element faulty" * Intrinsic safety function of the motor starter has been triggered Signaling bit: "Overload switching element" * Switched / unswitched DC24V-S / DC24V-NS supply voltage missing Signaling bit: "Power supply switching element missing" "Electronics power supply too low" * Blocking protection has triggered Signaling bit: "Motor blocking shutdown" * Process image error present Signaling bit: "Process image error" The "Emergency start" function can be activated as follows: * "Emergency start" input action * Commands: Emergency start ON/OFF Messages and actions Message Emergency start active Description Present when the emergency start is active, even when the motor and brake output are switched off. Table 10-32: Messages and actions for emergency start SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-48 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions 10.14 Trip Reset Trip Reset acknowledges all the currently pending acknowledgable errors in the starter. An error can be acknowledged if it has been eliminated or no longer exists. The Trip Reset can be triggered by: * Remote reset via PLC (PAA DO 0.3 trip reset) * Remote reset via input action (if parameterized) * Local reset via device interface (hand-held device or ES tool) (only applies for starters from an order number suffix: -.AA3/-.AB4 and for all fail-safe motor starters) * Power-on reset (switch off and reactivate the 24V-NS DC) only with non-reset on voltage failure deactivated (can be parameterized). * Reset via power switch / repair switch To do this, switch the power switch from 0 to 1. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-49 Functions 10.15 Self-test Description There are 3 self-test types: * Self-test at start up: This is automatically activated when switching on or initializing the device! * Self-test in operation: The motor starter monitors certain device components cyclically and signals the errors present. * Self-test on request The self-test can be started via the process image (DO 0.5). Test stages The self-test consists of 3 test stages. The test stages are run depending on the signal duration of the test command: Test stage Signal duration Test scope Description 1 <3s LED test All LEDs are switched on for 2 seconds! * Check by user, no signaling bit 2 2 to 5s HW test The motor starter hardware is tested; current measurement with display on LED "device": * Current flowing: flashes red * Current not flowing: flickers red * Check by user, no signaling bit >5 s Shutdown Switching elements are switched off. 31) 1) This test stage is only run in the manual operating mode Table 10-33: Messages and actions for plug monitoring Self-test error In the event of an error, the "DEVICE" LED is on in red. The error can only be acknowledged when switched on again. If the error is still present, the self-test will still run with an error when switched on. The motor starter must be replaced! SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-50 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions Messages and actions Message Actions Self-test active -- Self-test ok -- Error during self-test -- Table 10-34: Messages and actions for self-test Note Certain device components are continually monitored internally by the motor starter and the result is signalled with the self-test messages. The "Error on self-test" message can also occur in the event of an error with the internal monitoring, without the self-test having been activated. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-51 Functions 10.16 Maintenance Description Maintenance functions are required to prevent wear-related failures of equipment and systems. This increases the availability of the system. The optimal use is that the motor starter promptly signals the intrinsic possible failure or a failure of the motor in stages. This makes regular checking by maintenance personnel as to whether or not maintenance is required unnecessary. Note The maintenance timer only increases when the motor is running. Device parameters Two maintenance timers are available that permit indirect detection of wear across the operating time. The maintenace timer are special operating hours counters that can be both deleted and parameterized using warning limit values. Maintenance timer warning limit value 1 First warning. Maintenance requirements signalled. Maintenance timer warning limit value 2 Second warning. Maintenance request is signalled. Settings Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range Maintenance timer-Warning limit value_1 946.080.000 (30 years) * 0 ... 4.294.967.295 s Increment: 1 s Maintenance timer-Warning limit value_2 946.080.000 (30 years) * 0 ... 4.294.967.295 s Increment: 1 s Table 10-35: Maintenance settings Messages and actions Message Action Maintenance required Group prewarning Maintenance request General warning Maintenance timer limit value_1 exceeded -- Maintenance timer limit value_2 exceeded -- Table 10-36: Maintenance messages and actions SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-52 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions 10.17 Log book Description The log book lists trips, device errors and events in chronological order, adds a time stamp and thus creates a protocol. This protocol is stored internally. This allows the causes to be evaluated later on. Log books There are 3 different log books that can be read as a data record: * Log book trips * Log book events * Log book device errors The current value for "Operating hours - device" is entered as a time stamp. The object numbers of the respective messages can be found in the relevant data record. The last 21 entries are stored in the log books. The entries can be read out with the relevant data record. The log book is designed as a circular buffer. Over 21 entries, the oldest entry is overwritten. Log book trips All group errors are recorded in "Log book - trips". This involves entering the object numbers for the actual causes of error, e.g. "switching element overload". Note that "Log book - trips" is cleared using the command "Clear log book - trips" Log book events All warnings, and certain actions, are entered in "Log book - events". Please note the following points: * "Incoming" and "outgoing" events are entered. "Incoming" means: The event is occurring. "Outgoing" means: The event is acknowledged. Entries are differentiated in the data record by sign: (+: incoming, -: outgoing). * "Log book - events" is cleared using the command "Clear log book - events". Log book device errors All device errors that occur are recorded in the "Log book - device errors". Note that "Log book - device errors" cannot be cleared. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-53 Functions 10.18 Factory setting We recommend you use the factory setting (default setting) in the following instances: * Incorrect parameter assignment * If ET 200S motor starters that have already been parameterized are to be used in other systems. Note If you do not, in certain circumstances some operating mechanisms may start up due to the existing parameter assignment. You can reset parameterized motor starters to their factory setting without any additional tools. A parameter assignment block set by the "Motor Starter ES" parameterization software is removed in the process. You can find the parameters for the factory setting in the sections below: * DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x in Section 8.3.4 * DSS1e-x in Section 8.4.5 * RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x in Section 9.3.4 Motor starter variants The following motor starters can be reset: * Motor starter; high feature in versions - DS1e-x - DSS1e-x - RS1e-x with the order number suffix -.AA3 * Variants of fail-safe motor starters - F-DS1e-x - F-RS1e-x Restore factory settings The factory setting can be established as follows: * The "Basic factory settings" command (via data record 93 or Motor Starter ES). This is only possible if the "Manual" operating mode is set and the switching elements are switched off. * Using the power switch SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-54 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Functions Procedure To reset the factory setting, proceed as follows: 1. Warning Connect the motor starter on an appropriate terminal module so that a connected drive cannot start up as a result of the unknown parameter assignment of the motor starter. Do not use a terminal module which has an expansion module (brake module xB3, xB4, xB6 with inputs) located directly to the right of it. A 2DI-COM/-2DI LC COM control module may not be connected on this motor starter. When connecting the motor starter on the terminal module, pay attention to the mechanical coding. 2. For this procedure outside of a plant, lay voltage U 1 via a power module. It is not necessary for the supply to come via the field bus and the power bus. 3. Turn the knob of the power switch within the specified time window of 2 to 4 seconds to ON and OFF, as illustrated in the timing diagram below, and check the LEDs on the motor starter. Initialization sequence Start sequence Starting the factory setting LED indicators: SF Off C-STAT Off DEVICE flashes red Rotary switch ON Factory setting restored LED indicators: for 5 s SF Off C-STAT Off DEVICE flickers red Off 2 to 4 s 2 to 4 s 2 to 4 s 2 to 4 s 2 to 4 s 2 to 4 s 3s Figure 10-5: Factory setting The initialization sequence prevents the factory setting being reset inadvertently. The factory setting is initialized at the beginning of the start sequence. The LEDs indicate the following behavior: * SF off * C-STAT off * DEVICE flashes red Once the factory setting has been restored, the LEDs respond as follows for 5 seconds: * SF off * C-STAT off * DEVICE flickers red SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-55 Functions SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 10-56 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Section 11 Subject Page 11.1 Features 11-3 11.2 Terminal modules TM-PF30 S47 and TM-X15 S27-01 11-6 11.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules 11-6 11.2.2 Features 11-7 11.2.3 Models 11-7 11.2.4 View of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules 11-8 11.2.5 Terminal assignments 11-9 11.2.6 Technical specifications of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules 11-11 11.2.7 TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module 11-12 11.3 Power modules PM-D F1 through F5 11-15 11.3.1 Parameters 11-17 11.3.2 Electrical configuration 11-18 11.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F1 to F5 11-21 11.4 PM-X connection module 11-23 11.5 ET 200S with "local" safety-integrated system 11-24 11.6 Safety-integrated system configurations 11-28 11.6.1 Safety circuit with safety-integrated system combination 11-28 11.6.2 Two safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations 11-31 11.6.3 Two cascaded safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations (potential group, potential subgroup) 11-33 11.6.4 Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system combination 3TK2824 11-37 11.6.5 Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system combination 3TK2823 11-39 11.6.6 Emergency stop combined with protective door 11-41 11.6.7 Emergency stop circuit with cascaded time delay PL d or PL e 11-43 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-1 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Section Subject Page 11.6.8 One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails 11-45 11.6.9 Potential-free connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and autonomous safety circuits 11-47 11.6.10 DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature to PL e 11-49 11.6.11 ET 200S safety-integrated system with AS-i Safety at work 11-51 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- 11.1 Features The "Safety local" safety engineering integrated into the ET200S system makes it possible to carry out the emergency stop and protective door functions locally, i.e. without remote PLC, using motor starters in an ET200S substation A safety function can be divided into the subsystems Detect - Evaluate - Respond. In the ET200S system, the subfunctions are carried out as follows: Detect - sensors that are connected to a PM-D F module, e.g. emergency stop command device Evaluate - corresponds to the PM-D F module which reads the sensors, monitors the switching status of the actuators and switches the enabling circuit depending on the internal status of the module. Respond - ensures the motor is shut down by means of protective separation of the power supply * The emergency stop and protective door monitoring safety functions can be carried out on one or two channels. * Attainable values according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1: PLc - PLe or SIL 1 - SIL 3 according to IEC 62061. * The attainable value depends on the system architecture and the diagnostic coverage. System architecture means single-channel or dual-channel sensor and actuator technology * In the standard motor starter with an installation width of 65/90 mm, feedback loop monitoring - which oversees the switching status of the actuators (motor starters) - is carried out using failsafe kit 1 or 2. * Feedback loop monitoring is already integrated into the high feature motor starter with an installation width of 65/90 mm. The lack of feedback loop monitoring (lack of diagnostic coverage in the actuator circuit) in the high feature direct soft starter means that this can only be used to max. PLc according to ISO 13849-1 or SIL 1 according to IEC 62061. Example: ET 200S "Safety local" configuration with standard starter The diagram below shows the complete safety sequence. It illustrates a dual-channel architecture in the sensor and actuator circuit. The sensor must be connected to the PM-D F module via two channels for this purpose. Redundant disconnection is effected by an infeed contactor connected to the PM-X module. The feedback loop is carried to the PM-D F by the failsafe kits and a forced auxiliary contact of the infeed contactor which is wired to the PM-X module. This configuration enables an emergency stop safety function in line with PLe (ISO 13849-1) or SIL 3 (IEC 62061). SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-3 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution PM-D F1 DS DS A4 A5 RS IM 151 EMERGENCY STOP Fail-safe kit 1 Fail-safe kit 1 Q1 Circuit breaker Fail-safe kit 2 TM-X15 S27-01 Profibus-DP / Profinet Terminating A3 PM-X A2 Terminating A1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 PLC Master . K1 Infeed contactor Figure 11-1: Design of the EMERGENCY STOP application to PLe in accordance with DIN EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL3 in accordance with IEC 62061 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- PM-D F Module A1 1 8 2 9 L+ U1 M A1+ PM-X Module 6 13 7 14 22 1 RF1 21 OUT- K1 2 Feedback loop RF2 22 13 ON 14 4 11 23 24 17 27 25 11 21 6 5 12 26 28 EMERGENCY STOP 12 22 7 U2 A2- A5 OUT+ AUX2 A1 K1 A2 AUX3 Infeed contactor modulation depth 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 Q1 21 1L1 3L2 5L3 K1 22 A2 A3 A4 E Fault Fail-safe kit 1* E A E E Fault Fault Fail-safe kit 1* E A E A Fail-safe kit 2 A * Feedback loop M 3~ M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 N PE N PE E N PE 2T1 4T2 6T3 E N PE 2T1 4T2 6T3 E M 3~ E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring Figure 11-2: Wiring diagram for the EMERGENCY STOP application to PLe in accordance with DIN EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL3 in accordance with IEC 62061 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-5 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution 11.2 Terminal modules TM-PF30 S47 and TM-X15 S27-01 11.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules Terminal modules are needed for wiring the PM-D F1 through 5 power modules and the PM-X connection module of the safety-integrated system. The following table shows which power modules you can use with the various terminal modules. You can find information on the terminal modules in the following sections: * Section 6 for the PM-D power module and all motor starters * Expansion modules, such as the brake control module, in Section 12 * Fail-safe modules in Section 13. Power modules Terminal modules for safety-integrated system TM-PF30 S47 -B0 1) -B1 PM-D F1 X X PM-D F2 X X 2) -C0 1) TM-X15 S27-01 -C1 PM-D F3 X X PM-D F4 X X 3) -D0 PM-D F5 X PM-X 1) 2) 3) X For suitable power module in subordinate, cascaded safety groups (potential subgroup). For suitable power module in higher-order or standalone safety group (potential group). For expansion with suitable power module in separate ET 200S stations (potential subgroup). Table 11-1: Assignment of the terminal modules for the modules of the safety-integrated system Color coding labels 1. You can apply the color coding labels in the opening provided next to the terminal directly from the strip. 2. Push the color coding labels onto the terminal module with your finger. Looping the potentials through Terminals 1/8, 2/9, 4/11, etc. are bridged in the terminal module and can be used to loop the potentials through (through-connection terminals). SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- 11.2.2 Features The following features apply only for the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules * * * * * * TM-PF30 S47-B terminal modules for PM-D F1/F2 power modules TM-PF30 S47-C terminal modules for PM-D F3/F4 power modules TM-PF30 S47-D0 terminal modules for PM-D F5 power modules The terminal module consists of a support and a terminal block. Connection by screw-type terminals Start of a group of motor starters with safety-integrated system (also see Section 11.6) * Prewiring possible * AUX1 cable fed through without terminals 11.2.3 Models There are two TM-PF30 S47-B terminal-module models: * TM-PF30 S47-B0 (can be used to the right of a B0, B1, C1) Terminal module for potential subgroup, sensor connection; e.g. emergency stop, protective door (for function, see Section 11.6.3 and 11.6.6). * TM-PF30 S47-B1 (required at the beginning of a potential group) Terminal module for potential group, with infeed U1, U2, sensor connection, with terminating cover (for function, see Section 11.6.1 through 11.6.3 and 11.6.6 through 11.6.10). There are two TM-PF30 S47-C terminal module models: * TM-PF30 S47-C0 (can be used to right of a B0, B1, C1) Terminal module for potential subgroup, infeed U2 (for function, see Section 11.6.7). * TM-PF30 S47-C1 (can be used to continue a potential group in a new row) Terminal module for potential group, infeed U1, U2, with terminating cover (for function, see Section 11.6.8). The TM-PF30 S47-D0 terminal module is suitable for: * Connection of up to 4 external potential-free safety circuits (for function, see Section 11.6.9). SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-7 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution 11.2.4 View of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules -B0 -C0 -B1 -C1 -D0 Figure 11-3: View of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- 11.2.5 Terminal assignments TM-PF30 S47-B0 Terminal 1/8 Meaning -- View Terminal Not used Meaning 17/24 Throughfeed terminal, potential-free 2 2 2/9 -- Not used 3/10 -- Not used 4/11 -- Not used 5/12 -- 2 3 1 7 2 4 2 5 Not used 22 ON 23 ON 25 Ch 1 26 Ch 1 27 Ch 2 28 Ch 2 2 6 6/13 OUT+ 7/14 OUT- - AUX1 Drive for other safety integrated devices with 24 VDC / 50 mA 6 1 3 2 7 7 1 4 2 8 ON button Channel 1 for EMERGENCY STOP or protective door Channel 2 for EMERGENCY STOP or protective door Fed through without terminals Table 11-2: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-B0 terminal module TM-PF30 S47-B1 Terminal 1/8 Meaning L+ U1: Supply voltage for electronic components URATED = 24 VDC 2/9 M 3/10 -- Not used 4/11 A1+ U2: Contactor supply URATED = 24 V DC 5/12 6/13 7/14 - A2- OUT+ OUT- AUX1 Drive for other safety integrated devices with 24 VDC / 50 mA View Terminal Meaning 17/24 1 8 2 2 2 9 2 3 1 7 2 4 4 1 1 2 5 5 1 2 2 6 6 1 3 2 7 7 1 4 2 8 Throughfeed terminal, potential-free 22 ON 23 ON 25 Ch 1 26 Ch 1 27 Ch 2 28 Ch 2 ON button Channel 1 for EMERGENCY STOP or protective door Channel 2 for EMERGENCY STOP or protective door Fed through without terminals Table 11-3: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-B1 terminal module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-9 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution TM-PF30 S47-C0 Terminal Meaning View Terminal Meaning 1/8 -- Not used 17/24 -- Not used 2/9 -- Not used 22 -- Not used 3/10 -- Not used 23 -- Not used 4/11 A1+ 25 -- Not used 5/12 A2- U2: Contactor supply URATED = 24 V DC 26 -- 6/13 OUT+ 27 -- 7/14 OUT- 28 -- - AUX1 Drive for other safety integrated devices with 24 VDC / 50 mA Fed through without terminals 4 1 1 5 1 2 6 1 3 7 1 4 Table 11-4: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-C0 terminal module TM-PF30 S47-C1 Terminal Meaning U1: Supply voltage for electronic components URATED = 24 VDC 1/8 L+ 2/9 M 3/10 -- Not used 4/11 A1+ 5/12 A2- U2: Contactor supply URATED = 24 V DC 6/13 7/14 OUT+ Drive for other safety integrated devices with 24 VDC / 50 mA OUT- - AUX1 Fed through without terminals View Terminal Meaning 17/24 -- Not used 1 8 2 2 22 23 RF1 RF2 Feedback loop 2 9 2 3 25 -- Not used 26 -- 27 IN+ Drive from PM-D F1 to 4 OUT+ 28 IN- Drive from PMD F1 to 4 OUT- 4 1 1 5 1 2 6 1 3 2 7 7 1 4 2 8 Table 11-5: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-C1 terminal module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- TM-PF30 S47-D0 Terminal Meaning View Terminal Meaning 1/8 -- Not used 15/22 -- Not used 2/9 -- Not used 16/23 -- Not used 3/10 -- Not used 17/24 -- Not used 4/11 OUT 1.1 18/25 OUT 3.1 19/26 OUT 3.2 20/27 OUT 4.1 21/28 OUT 4.2 Enabling circuit 1 5/12 OUT 1.2 6/13 OUT 2.1 Enabling circuit 2 7/14 - Enabling circuit 3 4 11 18 2 5 5 11 29 2 6 6 12 30 2 7 7 12 41 2 8 OUT 2.2 AUX1 Fed through without terminals Enabling circuit 4 Table 11-6: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-D0 terminal module 11.2.6 Technical specifications of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 30 x 196.5 x 102 Depth with power module (mm) 117.5 Weight (g) approx. 350 Insulation voltages and rated currents Insulation voltage 500 V Rated operating voltage 24 VDC Rated operating current 10 A Conductor cross-sections Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947 AWG cables, single- or multi-core 1 x (18 to 22) Wiring Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 1 Tightening torque (Nm) 0.4 to 0.7 Table 11-7: Technical specifications of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-11 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution 11.2.7 TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module Features * TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-X connection module * The terminal module consists of a support and a terminal block. * Termination of a group of motor starters with safety-integrated system for connection of an external infeed contactor with auxiliary contact and switched supply voltage (also see Section 11.6.1) * Connection of a group of motor starters with safety-integrated system to an external safety combination; only in conjunction with TM-P15 S27-01 (also see Section 11.6.5) * Connection by screw-type terminals * Prewiring possible * AUX1 cable fed through without terminals Models For the two applications above, only one version is required. View of TM-X15 S27-01 Figure 11-4: TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- Terminal assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module for the PM-X connection module. View 1 Terminal Meaning 1 2 RF1 RF2 Connection of the auxiliary switch to infeed contactor for monitoring the switch position (RF = feedback loop) 6 AUX2 Connect to A1+ of the infeed contactor 7 AUX3 Connect to A2- of the infeed contactor -- AUX1 Fed through without terminals 2 6 7 Table 11-8: Terminal assignment of the TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module for the PM-X connection module Color coding labels 1. You can apply the color coding labels in the opening provided next to the terminal directly from the strip. 2. Push the color coding labels onto the terminal module with your finger. Important If there is no infeed contactor connected to the PM-X connection module, jumper the feedback loop with terminals 1 and 2. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-13 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Technical specifications - TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 15 x 102 x 196.5 Depth with connection module (mm) 117.5 Weight (g) approx. 175 Insulation voltages and rated currents Insulation voltage 500 V Rated operating voltage 24 VDC Rated operating current 10 A Conductor cross-sections Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947 AWG cables, single- or multi-core 1 x (18 to 22) Wiring Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 1 Tightening torque (Nm) 0.4 to 0.7 Table 11-9: Technical specifications - TM-X15 S27-01 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- 11.3 Power modules PM-D F1 through F5 Features Feature Basic units are PM-D F 1 2 X X Basic unit required for 3 4 5 X X X Suitable for applications up to SIL (IEC 62061) 3 3 2 3 3 Suitable for applications up to PL (DIN EN ISO 13849-1) e e d e e Emergency stop circuit with monitored start. X Guard door circuit with automatic start. X Expansion with delay from 0.5 to 30 s (steplessly adjustable). Cover for time setting takes a lead seal. X For integrating other ET 200S rails into an emergency stop circuit. X X X X 2-channel sensor polling. X X All inputs cross-circuit-proof. X X Two enabling circuits as normally-open contacts (for shutting down the motor starters). X X Four enabling circuits as normally-open contacts (potential-free, for any use). One output for driving plug-in devices (max. 50 mA). X X X Each time the emergency stop device runs an emergency stop cycle, the switch- X ing elements of the motor starters are checked to ensure that they open and close correctly. Each time the guard door is actuated, the switching elements of the motor starters are checked to ensure that they open and close correctly. X X X X X X X X X X X A short-circuit in the sensor circuit triggers the internal electronic fuse. The device is again fully operational as soon as the short-circuit has been rectified. X X Welded contacts in the respective release circuits are detected and prevent the device from restarting. X X Welded contacts in the respective circuits are detected and prevent the PM-D F1/F2 basic device from restarting. Two redundant internal safety relays protect the contactor supply U2 (CON). X X Plug-in for TM-PF30 S47-B0 and ...-B1. X X Plug-in for TM-PF30 S47-C0 and ...-C1. Plug-in for TM-PF30 S47-D0 X X X The power module conducts the voltages for supplying the electronic components to the voltage buses of the terminal modules. It does this for all the motor starters in a potential group. X X X Monitoring of the U1 (PWR) and U2 (CON) voltages (U2 not in the case of PMD F5). Voltage failures are displayed and reported. X X X X X Table 11-10: Features of the safety-integrated system of PM-D F1 to F5 power modules SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-15 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Caution Power modules may not be inserted or removed during operation. Only potential-free contacts may be connected to: - the ON-circuit (terminals 22/23) - the sensor circuits (terminals 25/26 and 27/28) - the feedback loop. Views PM-D F PM-D F3 LEDs: SF PWR CON STAT SF group error SF PWR (power) (U1) CON (contactor) (U2) STAT status indicator for safety relay PWR CON STAT LEDs: SF group error 12 24 6 0,5 30s PWR (power) (U1) CON (contactor) (U2) STAT status indicator for safety relay Delay 0.5 to 30 s 3RK1903-1BD00 PM-D F1, F2, F4 power modules PM-D F3 power module PM-D F5 LEDs: SF SF group error PWR PWR (power) (U1) STAT STAT status indicator for safety relay 3RK1903-1BF00 PM-D F5 power module Figure 11-5: Views of the safety-integrated system of PM-D F1 to F5 power modules SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- Mechanical coding of the modules When the module is first inserted, the terminal module is mechanically coded (two coding elements) to ensure that, in the event of a fault, it can only be replaced by a module with identical functions. Note the configured structure when installing and identify the terminal modules with the labelling strips. 11.3.1 Parameters The following table indicates the bus parameter that can be set for the PM-D F1 to F5 power modules. Parameters Group diagnosis Action, value range * * Disable Enable Factory setting Disable Applicability Module Table 11-11: Parameters for the safety-integrated system of PM-D F1 to 5 power modules Group diagnosis: This parameter enables diagnosis messaging (error types are listed in Section 4.7). Note The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults on the SF-LED. Process and diagnostic interrupts None SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-17 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution 11.3.2 Electrical configuration Block circuit diagram of the PM-D F1, F2 The circuit diagram below shows the basic configuration of the safetyintegrated system of the power modules: * PM-D F1, emergency stop with monitored start. * PM-D F2, protective door with automatic start. L+ ON ON CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 1/8 22 23 25 26 27 A1+ 28 4/11 PTC fuse PTC fuse PSU Chnl. 1 Control logic Chnl. 2 RF 2/9 M 7/14 OUT - ET 200S Bus VA2- VA2+ AUX2 AUX3 5/12 A2- 6/13 OUT + Figure 11-6: Basic circuit diagram of the safety-integrated system of the PM-D F1, F2 power modules with TM-PF30 S47-B1 Explanation OUT +/- is a safe output for driving other safety-integrated devices (e. g. PM-D F3, F4). The procedure for commissioning is as follows: * Connect the supply voltage U1 to the L+ and M terminals. * Connect the supply voltage U2 to the A1+ and A2- terminals. * PM-D F1: The emergency stop circuits connected to the CH1 and CH2 terminals must be closed. * PM-D F2: For automatic start operation, the terminals 22-23 (ON) must be bridged. The protective door connections to the CH1 and CH2 terminals must be closed. The system starts up: * PM-D F1: As soon as the ON button at the ON terminals is activated. Emergency stop circuits and ON button are monitored during operation for crossover. Permanent jumpering of the ON terminals is not permissible. * PM-D F2: As soon as the ON terminals are closed. The protective door connections are monitored for crossover during operation. During the cascading of several safety modules, the overall reaction time of the individual components should be added! SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- Block circuit diagram of the PM-D F3, F4 The following circuit diagram shows the basic configuration of the safety-integrated system of the PM-D F3, F4 power modules. L+ 1) 1/8 IN+ 1) IN- 1) 27 A1+ 28 4/11 RF 1) OUT 7/14 22 applicable only for PM-D F3 PSU RF PTC fuse Chnl. 1 Control logic Chnl. 2 2/9 M 1) 1) ET 200S Bus 5/12 VA2- AUX3 A2- only present in the case of TM-PF30 S47-C1 VA2+ AUX2 RF 6/13 RF 23 OUT + RF 1) with TM-PF30 with TM-PF30 S47-C1 S47-C0 Figure 11-7: Basic circuit diagram of the safety-integrated system of the PM-D F3, F4 power modules with TM-PF30 S47-C1 or C0 Explanation IN +/- is the input for safe driving by a primary safety-integrated device (e. g. PM-D F1 to F4). OUT +/- is a safe output for driving other safety-integrated devices (e. g. PM-D F3, F4). The procedure for commissioning is as follows: * Connect the supply voltage U1 to the L+ and M terminals 1). * Connect the supply voltage U2 to the A1+ and A2- terminals. * The PM-D F3/F4 power module must be integrated via the RF1 and RF2 terminals into the feedback loop of the PM-D F1/F2 basic device 1). * Connect the drive of the primary safety-integrated device (e.g. PM-D F1 to F4) to the IN+/- terminals 1). 1) Applicable to TM-PF30 S47-C1 only. PM-D F3 only: * The PM-D F3 power module shuts down when the preset time has elapsed. During the cascading of several safety modules, the overall reaction time of the individual components should be added! SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-19 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Block circuit diagram for PM-D F5 The following circuit diagram shows the basic configuration of the safety-integrated system of the PM-D F5 power module. . OUT OUT OUT OUT 1.1 2.1 3.1 4.1 4/ 11 A1+ 6/ 18/ 20/ 13 25 27 RF A2- PSU Chnl. 1 L+ Control logic Chnl. 2 M ET 200S Bus RF 5/ 12 7/ 19/ 14 26 21/ 28 OUT OUT OUT OUT 1.2 2.2 3.2 4.2 Figure 11-8: Block circuit diagram of the safety-integrated system of the PM-D F5 power module Explanation The ET 200S expansion module PM-D F5 can be used only in conjunction with a PM-D F1 to 4. The PM-D F5 can be installed at any position between a PM-D F1 to F4 and the associated PM-X. The procedure for commissioning is as follows: * The U1 and U2 supply voltages are carried by the internal wiring. * Connect the potential-free enabling circuits to the OUT 1.1 - OUT 4.2 terminals. * The PM-D F5 power module is integrated via the internal wiring into the feedback circuit of the PM-D F1, F2 basic device. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- 11.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F1 to F5 Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) (incl. terminal module) 30 x 196.5 x 117.5 Weight (g) approx. 190 Module-specific data Mechanical life 10 x 106 switching cycles > 200,000 switching cycles at Ie Electrical life Ambient temperature 0 to 60 C Degree of protection IP20 Utilization category DC-13 Control times * Minimum command duration, PM-D F1, F2 200 ms * Switch-on delay, PM-D F3 to 5 < 150 ms * Recovery time - PM-D F1, F2 <1s - PM-D F3 to 5 < 50 ms * Returning time: - PM-D F1, F2, F4 30 ms - PM-D F5 15 ms - PM-D F3 0.5 to 30 s (steplessly adjustable) Setting accuracy 15 % referenced to full-scale value Voltages, currents, potentials Control circuit U1 (PWR): 24 VDC Rated control supply voltage Us 0.85 ... 1.2 x Us Working range DC up to 60C Power consumption 2.4 W Recommended short-circuit protection (gG)gL 2 A Loadability of OUT+/24 VDC / < 50 mA (PTC fuse) Switched auxiliary circuit U2 (CON) for PM-D F1 up to 4 or potential-free release circuits for PM-D F5: 24 VDC Rated control supply voltage Us 0.85 ... 1.2 x Us Working range DC up to 60C 4A 3 A, PM-D F5 Rated operating current Ie * 13 to 24 VDC Thermal continuous current Ith Recommended short-circuit protection for enabling circuits Supply of: * Motor starters * Electronic modules * Ex[i] modules power input From the backplane bus Connection Cable length for emergency stop and ON buttons Conductor cross-section Standards, approbations BG UL, CSA certification 5A 3 A, PM-D F5 Cartridge fuses: NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB NEOZED type 5SE Operating class (gG) gL 6 A yes no no 10 mA max. 1000 m 2 x 1.5 mm2 yes yes Table 11-12: Technical specifications - PM-D F1 to 5 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-21 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Maximum attainable safety classes: PM-D F 1 PM-D F 2 PM-D F 3 PM-D F 4 PM-D F 5 3RK19031BA00 3RK1903-1BB00 3RK19031BD00 SIL1) 3 3 2 3 3 PL1) e e d e e PFHD 8.7 x 10-9 9.0 x 10-9 1.3 x 10-9 9.0 x 10-9 9.0 x 10-9 PFD( 1.6 x 10-5 1.7 x 10-5 2.4 x 10-6 1.7 x 10-5 1.7 x 10-5 3RK1903-1BC00 3RK1903-1BE00 DIN EN / IEC 61508 T1 20 20 20 20 20 HFT 1 1 1 1 1 SFF > 99 > 99 > 99 > 99 > 99 > 99 > 99 > 99 > 99 > 99 DIN EN ISO 13849 DC Cat.1) 4 4 3 4 4 nOP 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 dOP 365 365 365 365 365 hOP 24 24 24 24 24 DC13 24 V DC13 24 V DC13 24 V DC13 24 V DC13 24 V 600.000 2.700.000 5.000.000 600.000 2.700.000 5.000.000 600.000 2.500.000 5.000.000 600.000 2.500.000 5.000.000 1.000.000 3.000.000 7.000.000 1) Max. achievable values B10 IN 0.5 IN 0.25 IN Table 11-13: Maximum attainable safety classes: SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- 11.4 PM-X connection module Features * For connecting an external infeed contactor or other external actuators. * For integrating into external safety circuits View of PM-X LED: SF group error Figure 11-9: PM-X connection module Technical specifications - PM-X connection module Dimensions and weight Overall W x H x D (mm) including terminal module 15 x 196.5 x 117.5 Weight (g) approx. 130 Voltages, currents, potentials For information on the switched auxiliary circuit U2 at terminals 6 and 7 of the TMX15 S27-01, see PM-D F1 to F5. Power draw from the backplane bus 10 mA Table 11-14: Technical specifications - PM-X Important If there is no infeed contactor connected to the PM-X connection module, jumper the feedback loop with terminals 1 and 2. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-23 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution 11.5 ET 200S with "local" safety-integrated system Monitoring motor starters The switching status of the switching elements in the motor starter is monitored in that the series-connected positively driven NC contacts of the feedback loop are connected by the terminal modules. Power module PM-D F1 L+ 1/8 U1 U2 25 26 27 28 EMERGENCY STOP K0 DS DS DS M 2/9 22 23 A1+ 4/11 ON A2- 5/12 2 RF2 PM-X K0 1 RF1 K1 PM-X AUX3 7 K2 Feedback loop K3 F kits Q1 Q2 Q3 K1 K2 K3 AUX2 6 K0 Infeed contactor K1 K2 K3 Direct starter M M M Figure 11-10: Circuit diagram for emergency stop circuit safety-integrated system In order to continue using the standard and high feature motor starters, the ET 200S motor starters must be retrofitted with safety engineering. DS1e-x and RS1e-x motor starters; high feature with installation widths of 65/130 mm already have integrated feedback loop monitoring. Fail-safe kit 1 and 2 for standard motor starter To ensure diagnostics for motor starters, a fail-safe kit must be used. There are two fail-safe kits available and the components of both are listed below: * Fail-safe kit 1 for DS1-x direct starter; standard: - - - - An auxiliary switch block A contact holder with a connecting lead for the direct starter A contact carrier with two contacts for the terminal module (for infeed contactor) A contact carrier with three contacts for the terminal module (for feedback loop) * Fail-safe kit 2 for RS1-x reversing starter; standard: - Two auxiliary switch blocks - A contact holder with a connecting lead for the reversing starter - Two contact carriers with two contacts for the terminal module (for infeed contactor) - Two contact carriers with three contacts for the terminal module (for feedback loop) - A connecting lead SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 1 To prepare the feedback loop for the emergency stop circuit, proceed as follows for a DS1-x direct starter; standard: 1. Insert the contact carrier for the feedback loop (3 contacts) offset slightly to the right into the top opening in the terminal module and then slide it to the left. 2. Seat the contact carrier for the infeed contactor (2 contacts) in the bottom opening of the terminal module . 3. Plug the contact holder with the connecting lead into the rear of the direct starter. 4. Route the connecting lead to the front of the direct starter as shown in the illustration. 5. Insert the auxiliary switch block into the appropriate opening in the direct starter. 6. Connect the connecting lead to the auxiliary switch block. Safety notice Make sure the auxiliary switch block properly locks into place! 3 6 4 1 2 5 Table 11-15: Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 1 - direct starter; standard SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-25 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 2 To prepare the feedback loop for the emergency stop circuit, proceed as follows for a RS1-x reversing starter; standard: Drawing Procedure 2 1 Starting at the left, insert the two contact carriers with two contacts for the infeed contactor into the two bottom openings of the terminal module and make sure they are correctly latched. 2 Insert a light gray contact carrier with three contacts into the top left opening and a dark gray contact carrier with three contacts into the top right opening of the terminal module and make sure they are correctly latched. 3 3 1 1 4 Plug the contact holders with the connecting leads into the left opening in the rear of the reversing starter. Route the connecting leads through the channel to the front of the reversing starter. 4 Table 11-16: Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 2 - reversing starter; standard SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- Drawing Procedure 5 Plug the two auxiliary switch blocks into the appropriate openings in the reversing starter. 6 Connect the connecting leads to the auxiliary switch blocks. 7 Connect the auxiliary switch blocks by means of the connecting lead. 6 5 7 Table 11-16: Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 2 - reversing starter; standard (Contd.) Safety notice Make sure the auxiliary switch blocks properly lock into place! SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-27 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution 11.6 Safety-integrated system configurations In the following configurations, motor starters; standard with 45/90 mm installation widths have been used. These examples can also be used for motor starters; high feature with installation widths of 65/130 mm. Motor starters; high feature/fail-safe with installation widths of 65/130 mm are already fitted with the fail-safe kit for the safety-integrated system. Fail-safe kits ensure the closing operation of the feedback loop and hence error discovery in the motor starter and the external infeed contactor. Caution Derating (see Section 3.4) is not taken into account in these configurations. Safety note The following applications are used only as a suggestion of typical circuit diagrams. No liability will be accepted for the proper functioning, compliance with certification requirements, or compatibility of the examples. Use at your own risk. Caution Due to the operation of star-connected three-phase motors, high EMC interference may occur. Interference above the IEC limit values can lead to an impairment of functions or failure of the electronics. In case of high EMC interference, we recommend the use of motors with EMC protection circuits. (Exception: soft starters may not be operated with a EMC protection circuit). 11.6.1 Safety circuit with safety-integrated system combination Explanation: It is possible to mix motor starters with and without safety engineering in a substation. To achieve SIL3 / PLe, an infeed adapter is required as a secondary shutdown path, the auxiliary contact of which must be included in the feedback loop and connected to the PM-X module. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A2- U2 A1+ U1 M L+ PLC Master 5 12 4 11 1 8 2 9 6 13 7 14 PM-D Module A1 AUX3 AUX2 without safetyintegrated system Profibus-DP IM 151 DS A3 A4 RS A2- U2 A1+ U1 M L+ A5 13 OUT- OUT+ 2 RF2 22 1 RF1 21 A9 K1 26 28 12 22 K1 A2 AUX3 PM-X Module 7 ON 23 14 24 17 27 EMERGENCY STOP AUX2 11 21 25 A1 6 6 13 7 14 22 PM-D F1 Module 5 12 4 11 1 8 2 9 with safety engineering to SIL3 / PLe DS PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 A2 DS PM-D F1 DS A7 RS Fail-safe kit 2 A8 A9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 No. 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 3RK1903-0AB00 3RK1903-0AB10 3RK1903-1CA00 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 3RK1903-0AC10 3RK1903-1CA01 Order number Infeed contactor Power switch only for SIL3 / PLe K1 Q1 Infeed adapter K1 PM-D F1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor DC connection module Power switch as line protection at maximum complement 40 A DS xx in accordance with current rating TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed Fail-safe kit 1 RS xx in accordance with current rating TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed Fail-safe kit 2 Description The components required to set up this example are as follows: (parts list for safety local motor starter configuration only) Fail-safe Fail-safe kit 1 kit 1 A6 A5 TM-PF30 S47-B1 A1 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Motor starter configuration with safety engineering to SIL1 / PLc Terminating cover without safety-integrated system Terminating module Motor starter configuration with safety engineering to SIL3 / PLe Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- Figure 11-11: Safety circuit with safety-integrated system combination 11-29 N PE 1L1 3L2 5L3 E A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 Fault A2 E E E A Fault A3 M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 E E E A Fault A4 A 2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3~ E E E A Fault A6 K1 M 3~ A7 E A A M 3~ E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring M 3~ E E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E A A8 Note: to SIL1 / PLc this adapter can be omitted Infeed adapter to SIL3 / PLe E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E 22 21 N PE Q1 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 N PE 1L1 3L2 5L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 with safety engineering to SIL3 / PLe 2T1 4T2 6T3 11-30 E E Fail-safe kit 2 N PE without safety-integrated system Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Figure 11-11: (Cont.) Safety circuit with safety-integrated system combination of PM-D F1, failsafe kits and standard motor starter This circuit type fulfills the requirements up to SIL3 (IEC 62061) / PLe (DIN ISO 13849-1). SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A1 Master 13 OUT- OUT+ 2 RF2 22 1 RF1 21 A4 26 28 12 22 K1 A1+ U1 M L+ U2 K1 A2A2 AUX3 PM-X Module 7 A3 DS A5 13 OUT- OUT+ 2 RF2 22 1 RF1 21 A8 K2 26 28 12 22 K2 A2 AUX3 PM-X Module 7 ON 23 14 24 17 27 EMERGENCY STOP AUX2 A1 6 11 21 25 6 13 7 14 22 Group 2 A7 DS Fail-safe Fail-safe kit 1 kit 1 A6 DS A5 PM-D F1 A4 PM-D F2 Module 5 12 4 11 1 8 2 9 Fail-safe Fail-safe kit 1 kit 1 ON 23 14 24 17 27 EMERGENCY STOP AUX2 11 21 25 A1 6 6 13 7 14 22 Group 1 Profibus-DP PM-D F1 Module 5 12 A2- U2 4 11 1 8 2 9 A1+ U1 M L+ PLC IM 151 A2 DS A1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 PM-D F1 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Group 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 Safety group 2 to SIL1 / PLc Group 2 A8 PM-X Terminating module Infeed contactor Power switch Infeed adapter Gr. 1 K1 Q1 Power switch Q2 Short circuit protection Gr. 2 2 2 4 4 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10 2 2 2 2 PM-D F1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Description Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor DC connection module Power switch as line protection with maximum complement 40 A 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current rating 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 Order number 3/4 2 2 2 2 No. The components required to set up this example are as follows: TM-X15 S27-01 11.6.2 Terminating cover Safety group 1 to SIL3 / PLe Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- Two safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations Figure 11-12: Two safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations 11-31 M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring E E E E E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E A E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E A E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E A M 3~ E A A2 N PE K1 Fault A7 A6 21 22 A3 Q2 1L1 3L2 5L3 Q1 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 Group 2 2T1 4T2 6T3 Group 1 N PE Safety group 2 to SIL1 / PLc 2T1 4T2 6T3 Safety group 1 to SIL3 / PLe N PE E Fail-safe kit 1 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Figure 11-12: (Cont.) Two safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations This circuit type fulfills the requirements up to SIL3 / PLe in safety group 1 and the requirement according to SIL1 / PLc in safety group 2. The emergency stop circuits are mutually independent: * Emergency stop circuit 1 switches only group 1. * Emergency stop circuit 2 switches only group 2. The second shutdown path is omitted for SIL1 / PLc. The failsafe kit achieves an increase in diagnostic coverage (diagnostic coverage level DC). SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- Two cascaded safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations (potential group, potential subgroup) PM-X Fail-safe kit 1 Fail-safe kit 1 3TK2830 3TK2841 Profibus-DP IM 151 DS PM-D F1 DS A2 A1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 A3 Fail-safe Fail-safe kit 1 kit 1 DS DS PM-D F1 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 A7 A6 A5 TM-PF30 S47-B0 A4 TM-X15 S27-01 A8 Terminating module Group 1.1 K4 Terminating cover Group 1 K3 Power switch Infeed contactor K1 Q1 Power switch Infeed contactor K2 Q2 11.6.3 PLC Master Figure 11-13: Two cascaded safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-33 11-34 A1 26 28 EMERGENCY STOP 1.1 11 21 12 22 K1 A2 AUX3 PM-X Module Group 1 7 12 22 24 14 Y35 Y34 3TK2841 Module Y12 Y22 Y21 Y11 1 K1 Y32 RF2 22 A2 A1 K3 ON 14 2 1 RF1 21 A4 13 OUT- OUT+ 23 24 17 27 EMERGENCY STOP 1 AUX2 A1 25 11 21 6 6 13 7 14 22 PM-D F1 Module 5 12 A2- U2 4 11 1 8 2 9 A1+ U1 M L+ 52 44 34 24 14 3TK2830 Module 51 43 33 23 13 A2 A1 K4 EMERGENCY STOP 1.1 Group 1.1 EMERGENCY STOP 1 Group 1 U1 M L+ 26 28 23 24 17 25 27 6 13 7 14 22 PM-D F1 Module A5 ON1.1 14 13 OUT- OUT+ K2 A2 AUX3 K2 AUX2 A1 RF2 22 PM-X Module Group 1.1 7 6 2 1 RF1 21 A8 EMERGENCY STOP signal group 1.1 1 8 2 9 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Figure 11-13: (Cont.) Two cascaded safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2 4 1 1 2 4 3/4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB10 3RK1903-1CA00 3TK2830-1CB30 3TK2841-1BB40 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed Fail-safe kit 1 Expansion module Safety switchgear PM-D F1 TM-PF30 S47-B0 TM-PF30 S47-B1 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor DC connection module Power switch as line protection with maximum complement 40 A 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current rating 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA10 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10 N PE K1 E A Fault A2 Q1 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 Description A3 E A E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E 22 21 E A M 3~ A7 E E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E A 22 21 M 3~ E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring M 3~ A6 E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E K2 Q2 E E Fail-safe kit 1 EMERGENCY STOP 1.1 Group 1.1 EMERGENCY STOP 1 Group 1 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 3L2 5L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 Order number N PE No. 2T1 4T2 6T3 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 N PE The components required to set up this example are as follows: Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- Figure 11-13: (Cont.) Two cascaded safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations 11-35 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution To implement the cascade, the second PM-D F1 power module is plugged into the TM-PF30 S47-B0 terminal module. Child potential groups are also wired with a SIRIUS safety switchgear 3TK2841 and an expansion device 3TK2830. Both additional devices are supplied from the U2 auxiliary voltage. The circuits have to be cascaded if you use two emergency stop circuits which respond in the manner described below: Function: The emergency stop 1 (potential group) switches ALL motor starters (group shutdown). The emergency stop 1.1 switches only motor starters A6/A7 (subgroup) Description of group 1: Operating "emergency stop 1" switches the PM-D F1 (A1) of motor starters A2 and A3. The safety switching device 3TK2841 (K3 via input 1) is also actuated. This in turn controls the expansion module 3TK2830 (K4 via A1). The potentialfree contacts of module K4 activate the PM-D F module of group 1.1 (A5). This switches off motor starters A6 and A7. Description of group 1.1 only: Operating the "emergency stop 1.1" command device shuts down the electronic enabling circuit of K3 (terminal 14) and thus deenergizes the expansion module K4 (terminal A1). As a result, the potential-free enabling circuits are opened and the inputs to the PM-D F1 module (A5) are disconnected => emergency stop group 1.1 Reclosing group 1: by operating the ON 1 button, the PM-D F1 module (A1) is reclosed. Safety switching device 3TK2841 (module K3) is supplied with voltage permanently via terminal A1. As safety switching device 3TK2841 is wired to "automatic start" via terminal Y32, the electronic output from K3 (terminal 14) is set as soon as the cascade input of module K3 is active again. The reclosing conditions for the PM-D F1 module (A5) are thus met. After acknowledgment at the ON 1.1 command device, the system is once more ready. Reclosing group 1.1 Precondition: EMERGENCY STOP 1.1 unlocked and only group 1.1 safety-integrated system has been shut down. After acknowledgment at the ON 1.1 command device, the PM-D F1 module is released. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-36 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A2- U2 A1+ M U1 12 11 Master A1+ 4 U2 11 A2- 5 12 14 24 13 23 1 8 2 9 Y2 U1 M L+ PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 DS A1 6 AUX2 13 7 AUX3 14 7 6 2 RS AUX3 AUX2 RF2 ON 14 13 Fail-safe kit 2 1 RF1 A2 Fail-safe Fail-safe kit 1 kit 1 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 A2 A1 K1 Y1 EMERGENCY STOP Profibus-DP DS A5 RF2 7 AUX3 6 AUX2 2 1 RF1 A6 A6 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 A4 Terminating module Terminating cover Order number 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 Description PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 DS xx in accordance with current rating 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 2 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with current rating 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed 1 3RK1903-1CA01 Fail-safe kit 2 1 3TK2824-xCB30 External safety combination x in accordance with the connection 1) In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met if a warning is issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system initiates a safe status condition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required. 1 1 2 2 2 PL c The components required to set up this example are as follows: 3TK2824 K1 11.6.4 L+ PLC IM 151 A3 A1 A2 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system combination 3TK2824 Figure 11-14: Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system combination 3TK2824 PL c 11-37 E E M 3~ E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E A E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E A 1L1 3L2 5L3 N PE E A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 Fault N PE A4 2T1 4T2 6T3 A3 N PE A5 A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring E N PE E Fail-safe kit 2 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Figure 11-14: (Cont.) Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system combination 3TK2824 This configuration integrates ET 200S components into external safety concepts. This circuit satisfies the requirements of PL c and employs a safety combination. The monitored motor starters connect to the right of the load feeders. Important Please observe the current carrying capacity of the 3TK2824! SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-38 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A2- U2 A1+ U1 M Master L+ A1+ 4 U2 11 A2- 5 12 24 23 12 22 1 8 2 9 14 Y22 Y12 U1 M Y11 EMERGENCY STOP 11 21 Y21 Y34 PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 DS A1 6 13 AUX2 7 AUX3 14 Fail-safe Fail-safe kit 1 kit 1 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 13 A2 A1 K2 Y33 Profibus-DP DS RS 7 6 2 AUX3 AUX2 RF2 1 RF1 A2 Fail-safe kit 2 A5 A6 ON 14 13 TM-X15 S27-01 A4 PM-X Terminating module 7 6 2 3TK2823 b 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 c1) 1 1 2 22) PL 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10 Order number Description PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor DC connection module Power switch as line protection with maximum complement 40 A 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current rating 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 2 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with current rating 1 3RK1903-1AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed 1 3RK1903-1CA01 Fail-safe kit 2 1 3TK2823-xCB30 External safety combination x in accordance with the connection d/e 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2) initiates a safe status condition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required. With module A6, jumper between terminals 1,2. K1 A2 1) In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met AUX3 if a warning is issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system AUX2 A1 RF2 22 K1 Q1 K2 The components required to set up this example are as follows: K1 2 Infeed contactor Power switch 1 RF1 21 A6 Terminating cover 11.6.5 L+ PLC IM 151 A3 A1 A2 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system combination 3TK2823 Figure 11-15: Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system combination 3TK2823 PL e 11-39 A E E M 3~ E A M 3~ E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E A N PE K1 Fault A4 1L1 3L2 5L3 A3 2T1 4T2 6T3 22 N PE 21 2T1 4T2 6T3 Q1 N PE A5 A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring E N PE E Fail-safe kit 2 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Figure 11-15: (Cont.) Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system combination 3TK2823 PL e This configuration integrates ET 200S components into external safety concepts. This circuit satisfies the requirements up to PL e and employs a safety combination. The monitored motor starters connect to the right of the load feeders. Important Please observe the current carrying capacity of the 3TK2823! SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-40 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 RF2 U2 12 22 7 AUX3 26 28 2 1 RF1 A2 5 12 13 OUT- OUT+ A2- 6 13 7 14 22 4 11 A1 Profibus-DP DS A5 Guard door 12 22 11 21 RS A7 51 52 44 Y35 43 Y12 Y22 24 14 34 23 13 A2 A1 K3 33 Y34 24 14 Fail-safe kit 2 A6 Terminating module Y21 Y11 1 Y32 A2 A1 K2 Fail-safe Fail-safe kit 1 kit 1 DS PM-D F2 PM-D F1 A1+ 1 8 2 9 Master ON 23 14 24 17 27 EMERGENCY STOP 25 11 21 6 AUX2 U1 M L+ PLC IM 151 A4 TM-PF30 S47-B1 A3 TM-X15 S27-01 PM-X TM-PF30 S47-B0 A2 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Infeed contactor Power switch A3 26 28 23 24 17 25 27 6 13 7 14 22 K1 Q1 A7 OUT- 7 6 2 K1 A2 AUX3 K1 AUX2 A1 RF2 22 1 RF1 21 3TK2830 3TK2841 OUT+ K3 K2 11.6.6 Terminating cover A1 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- Emergency stop combined with protective door Figure 11-16: Emergency stop combined with protective door 11-41 2) 3) 1) 1 1 1 1 1 2 12) 1 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1BB00 3RK1903-1AA10 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10 Order number Description PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 1 1 PM-D F1 1 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 1 1 PM-D F2 1 1 TM-PF30 S47-B0 2 2 PM-X 23) 23) TM-X15 S27-01 1 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A 1 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 1 DC connection module 1 Power switch as line protection with maximum complement 40 A 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current rating 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with current rating 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed 1 1 3RK1903-1CA01 Fail-safe kit 2 1 1 3SBx x Personnel safety switch xx design N 1 1 3TK2830-1CB30 Expansion module PE 1 1 3TK2841-1BB40 Safety switchgear In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met if a warning is issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system initiates a safe status condition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required. Emergency stop and protective door contacts looped in line for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-). Caution With the PM-X connection module to which no infeed contactor is connected, the feedback loop should be jumpered with terminals 1 and 2. c1) d/e K1 E A Fault A2 Q1 1L1 3L2 5L3 M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 PL A3 E A E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E 22 21 N PE b E A E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E A4 A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 N PE 11-42 E E Fail-safe kit 2 N PE The components required to set up this example are as follows: Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Figure 11-16: (Cont.) Emergency stop combined with protective door This configuration combines emergency stop and protective door monitoring up to PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 5 12 A2- U2 4 11 1 8 2 9 A1+ U1 M L+ PLC Master A1 13 OUT- OUT+ 2 1 A4 RF2 RF1 26 28 12 22 7 A2 AUX3 K1 A2- U2 A1+ 5 12 4 11 EMERGENCY STOP 1 ON 23 14 24 17 27 EMERGENCY STOP AUX2 A1 11 21 25 6 6 13 7 14 22 DS A3 DS PM-D F3 A4 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 OUT- OUT+ PL d STOP Cat. 1 6 13 7 14 DS A7 7 6 2 K2 22 K1 22 21 21 A2 AUX3 K2 AUX2 A1 RF2 1 RF1 A8 Fail-safe Fail-safe kit 1 kit 1 A6 A5 TM-PF30 S47-C0 A5 Fail-safe Fail-safe kit 1 kit 1 DS PM-D F1 PL e STOP Cat. 0 Profibus-DP IM 151 A2 TM-PF30 S47-B1 A1 A8 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Infeed contactor Power switch K1 Q1 Infeed contactor Power switch K2 Q2 11.6.7 Terminating module Terminating cover EMERGENCY STOP 1 PL e PL d STOP Cat. 0 STOP Cat. 1 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- Emergency stop circuit with cascaded time delay PL d or PL e Figure 11-17: Emergency stop circuit with cascaded time delay PL d or PL e 11-43 Order number 5) 2) 3) 4) PE In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met if a warning is issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system initiates a safe status condition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required. Emergency stop looped in line for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-). Time delay with standard time relay. Caution Module A4 is not required. With PM-X connection module (A8 module) should be bridged with terminals 1 and 2. Attention For the PM-X connection module with module designation A4, terminals 1 N and 2 must not be bridged. 4 2 2 1) 4 2 4 2 K1 A E Fault A2 Q1 1L1 400V AC 1L2 PM-D 1L3 TM-P15 S27-01 PM-D F1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 PM-D F3 TM-PF30 S47-C0 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A 2 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 2 3RA1931-1BA00 DC connection module 2 3RV1031-4HA10 Power switch as line protection with maximum complement 40 A 4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current rating 2 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 2 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 4 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1 Description 1L1 3L2 5L3 M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 PL Fault A3 E Fail-safe E kit 1 A E 22 21 E M 3~ A7 E Fault Fail-safe E kit 1 A E 22 21 PL d STOP Cat. 1 M 3~ E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring M 3~ Fault A6 Fail-safe E kit 1 A E K2 Q2 2T1 4T2 6T3 b c1) d/e 22) 3RK1903-0BA00 2 3RK1903-0AA00 1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 3) 1 1 3RK1903-1BD00 1 1 3RK1903-1AC10 1 2 3RK1903-1CB00 14) 25) 3RK1903-1AB00 2 3RT1035-1BB40 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 3L2 5L3 EMERGENCY STOP 1 N PE PL e STOP Cat. 0 2T1 4T2 6T3 11-44 E Fail-safe kit 1 E N PE The components required to set up this example are as follows: Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Figure 11-17: (Cont.) Emergency stop circuit with cascaded time delay PL d or PL e This configuration combines instantaneous (STOP category 0) and delayed (STOP category 1) shutdown. This configuration consists of 2 potential or load groups. Important The maximum attainable with delayed shutdown is PL d according to to DIN EN ISO 13849-1. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12 22 26 28 5 12 U2 A2- 6 OUT+ 13 7 OUT14 22 4 11 A1 Profibus-DP A1+ 1 8 2 9 Master 23 13 24 ON 17 14 27 EMERGENCY STOP 11 21 25 U1 M L+ PLC IM 151 DS 7 6 2 K1 A2 AUX3 K1 AUX2 A1 RF2 22 1 RF1 21 A4 A2- U2 A1+ U1 M L+ 5 12 4 11 1 8 2 9 A5 EMERGENCY STOP 1 Fail-safe Fail-safe kit 1 kit 1 DS PM-D F1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 A4 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 A3 Terminating module Terminating cover A2 27 IN+ 28 IN- 23 RF2 6 OUT+ 13 7 OUT14 22 RF1 Infeed contactor Power switch K1 Q1 7 6 2 K2 A2 AUX3 K2 AUX2 A1 RF2 22 L+ A1+ U1 M A2- U2 DS A7 A8 Terminating module 5 12 4 11 1 8 2 9 27 IN+ 28 IN- 23 RF2 6 OUT+ 13 7 OUT14 22 RF1 additional ET 200S rails Fail-safe Fail-safe kit 1 kit 1 DS PM-D F4 1 RF1 21 A8 Profibus-DP IM 151 A6 A5 TM-PF30 S47-C1 A1 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 7 6 2 A2 AUX3 K AUX2 A1 RF2 22 K K2 Q2 1 RF1 21 Infeed contactor Power switch 11.6.8 Terminating cover EMERGENCY STOP 1 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails Figure 11-18: One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails 11-45 For each ET 200S rail the dropout time of the PM-D F4 increases by 30 ms. Important 2) 3) 1) 2 4 2 PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 PM-D F1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 PM-D F4 TM-PF30 S47-C1 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A 2 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 2 3RA1931-1BA00 DC connection module 2 3RV1031-4HA10 Power switch as line protection with maximum complement 40 A 4 4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current rating 2 2 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 2 2 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1 In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met if a warning is issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system initiates a safe status condition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required. Emergency stop looped in line for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-). Caution With the PM-X connection module to which no infeed contactor is connected, the feedback loop should be jumpered with terminals 1 and 2. b c1) d/e 12) 3RK1903-0BA00 1 3RK1903-0AA00 1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 1 1 3RK1903-1BC00 1 1 3RK1903-1AC00 2 2 3RK1903-1CB00 23) 2 3RK1903-1AB00 2 3RT1035-1BB40 N PE K1 E A Fault A2 Q1 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 Description A3 E A E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E 22 21 M 3~ E A Fault A6 M 3~ A7 E A E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E 22 21 M 3~ E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring E E Fail-safe kit 1 K2 Q2 EMERGENCY STOP 1 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 3L2 5L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 Order number N PE PL 2T1 4T2 6T3 11-46 E E Fail-safe kit 1 N PE The components required to set up this example are as follows: Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Figure 11-18: (Cont.) One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails This configuration incorporates additional ET 200S rails into an emergency stop circuit for PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 U1 M Master 12 22 23 26 28 U2 5 12 A2 24 14 Y22 Y12 Y11 Y21 Y34 A1 K2 Y33 A2- ON 14 13 OUT- OUT+ 4 11 6 13 7 14 22 A1+ A1 12 22 11 21 ON 14 EMERGENCY STOP 13 A5 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 A4 DS Fail-safe Fail-safe kit 1 kit 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 23 24 17 27 EMERGENCY STOP 13 11 21 25 1 8 2 9 Profibus-DP A1 Terminating module A2 5 1.2 12 7 2.2 14 19 3.2 26 21 4.2 28 Infeed contactor Power switch 1.1 4 OUT 1 11 2.1 6 OUT 2 13 3.118 OUT 3 25 4.1 20 OUT 4 27 Terminating cover K1 3TK2822 7 6 2 K1 A2 AUX3 K1 AUX2 A1 RF2 22 1 RF1 21 A5 Q1 K2 11.6.9 L+ PLC IM 151 A3 DS A2 PM-D F5 TM-PF30 S47-D0 PM-D F1 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- Potential-free connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and autonomous safety circuits Figure 11-19: Potential-free connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and autonomous safety circuits 11-47 Description In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met if a warning is issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system initiates a safe status condition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required. 2) Emergency stop looped in line for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-). 3) With jumper between terminals 1 and 2. 2 1 1 1) 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 13) 1 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1BE00 3RK1903-1AD10 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3TK2822-xCB30 Order number PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 1 PM-D F1 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 1 PM-D F5 1 TM-PF30 S47-D0 1 PM-X 1 TM-X15 S27-01 1 External safety combination x in accordance with the connection 1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A 1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 1 3RA1931-1BA00 DC connection module 1 3RV1031-4HA10 Power switch as line protection with maximum complement 40 A 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current rating 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 2 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1 c1) d/e PL 2 1 22) 2 b E A Fault A2 M 3~ A3 E A E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E 22 21 M 3~ E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring N PE K1 Q1 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 11-48 2T1 4T2 6T3 The components required to set up this example are as follows: E E Fail-safe kit 1 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Figure 11-19: (Cont.) Potential-free connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and autonomous safety circuits This configuration shows how external safety components can be incorporated into the ET 200S safety concept. Note 4 potential-free contacts are available on each PM-D F5. Several PM-D F5s can be plugged in. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A2- U2 A1+ U1 M L+ PLC Master 5 12 4 11 1 8 2 9 A1 13 OUT- OUT+ 2 RF2 1 RF1 A4 26 28 12 22 7 A2 AUX3 K1 ON 23 14 24 17 27 EMERGENCY STOP AUX2 A1 11 21 25 6 6 13 7 14 22 A2 K2 A1 21 K1 22 21 K2 22 PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 Profibus-DP IM 151 A5 DSS1e-x A4 A3 RS1e-x A2 DS1e-x A1 PM-D F1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Infeed contactor Power switch K1 Q1 K2 For the DSS1e-x (A5) Motor contactor 11.6.10 Terminating module Terminating cover PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature to PL e Figure 11-20: DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature to PL e 11-49 PL Order number 2) 1) 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 PM-D F1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor DC connection module Power switch as line protection with maximum complement 40 A 1 1 3RK1301-0xB10-0AA2 DS1e-x x in accordance with current range 1 1 3RK1903-0AK00 TM-DS65 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 3RK1301-0xB10-1AA2 RS1e-x x in accordance with current rating 1 1 3RK1903-0AL10 TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed 1 1 3RK1301-0xB20-0AA2 DSS1e-x x in accordance with current rating 1 1 3RK1903-0AK10 TM-DS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed 1 1 3RK1903-0AE00 15 mm jumper module 1 1 3RT1034-1BB44 Motor contactor 1 1 Auxiliary for motor protection (if required) In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met if a warning is issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system initiates a safe status condition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required. Emergency stop looped in line for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-). b c1) d/e 12) 3RK1903-0BA00 1 3RK1903-0AA00 1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 1 1 3RK1903-1CB00 1 1 3RK1903-1AB00 1 3RT1044-1BB40 1 3RH1921-1DA11 1 3RA1941-1BA00 1 3RV1041-4HA10 N PE K1 A2 Q1 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 11-50 22 21 N PE A3 2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3~ 2 4 6 K2 1 3 5 2T1 4T2 6T3 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring M 3~ A5 PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 N PE The components required to set up this example are as follows: N PE 22 21 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Figure 11-20: (Cont.) DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature to PL e This configuration shows how to incorporate a DSS1e-x direct soft starter up to PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A2- U2 A1+ AS-i AS-i - AS-i + U1 M AS-I master DP master A2- 5 12 1.24 1.23 1 8 2 9 A1+ 4 U2 11 U1 M L+ 1.14 1.Y1 13 ON 14 PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 DS A1 6 13 AUX2 7 AUX3 14 7 6 2 RS Fail-safe kit 2 AUX3 AUX2 RF2 1 RF1 A2 Fail-safe Fail-safe kit 1 kit 1 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 1.13 AS-i - AS-i + M L+ A7 1.Y2 AS-i power supply unit Profibus-DP DS A5 7 6 2 K1 K1 A2 AUX3 AUX2 A1 RF2 22 1 RF1 21 A6 A6 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 A4 Terminating module Terminating cover 2) 1) 1 1 1 1 1 2 b 1 1 K1 AS-i Safety Monitor 3RK1105-1AE04-0CA0 EMERGENCY STOP 4 EMERGENCY STOP 3 EMERGENCY STOP 2 EMERGENCY STOP 1 Order number Description PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor DC connection module Power switch as line protection with maximum complement 40 A 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current rating 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with current rating 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed 1 1 3RK1903-1CA01 Fail-safe kit 2 1 1 3RK1105-1AE04-0CA0 AS-I Safety Monitor In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met if a warning is issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system initiates a safe status condition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required. With module A6, jumper between terminals 1 and 2. c1) d/e 1 1 3RK1903-0BA00 1 1 3RK1903-0AA00 2 2 3RK1903-1CB00 22) 2 3RK1903-1AB00 1 3RT1035-1BB40 1 3RH1921-1DA11 1 3RA1931-1BA00 1 3RV1031-4HA10 PL The components required to set up this example are as follows: Infeed contactor Power switch Q1 A7 11.6.11 L+ PLC IM 151 A3 A1 A2 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So- ET 200S safety-integrated system with AS-i Safety at work Figure 11-21: ET 200S safety-integrated system with AS-i Safety at work 11-51 E E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E A M 3~ A E E Fail-safe Fault kit 1 E M 3~ E A N PE K1 Fault A4 1L1 3L2 5L3 A3 2T1 4T2 6T3 22 N PE 21 2T1 4T2 6T3 Q1 N PE A5 A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring E N PE E Fail-safe kit 2 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution Figure 11-21: (Cont.) ET 200S safety-integrated system with AS-i Safety at work This configuration shows how ET 200S components are incorporated into the AS-i Safety at work concept. This circuit satisfies the requirements up to PL e and employs an AS-i Safety Monitor. It combines the advantages of AS-i Safety at work on the sensor side with the advantages of the ET 200S safety-integrated system on the actuator side in a way that makes best use of both. Important Observe the current carrying capacity of the AS-i Safety Monitor 3RK1105! SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 11-52 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12 Expansion modules Section Subject Page 12.1 Overview of expansion modules 12-2 12.2 Terminal modules TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 12-3 12.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules 12-3 12.3 12-4 Brake control modules 12.3.1 Description 12-4 12.3.2 Terminal modules TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 12-12 12.3.3 Signal response of xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control module and DS1-x, DS1e-x, and F-DS1e-x motor starters 12-14 12.3.4 Signal response of the xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control module and RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x motor starters 12-16 12.3.5 Externally powered brake xB1, xB3 12-18 12.3.6 Internally powered brake xB2 and xB4 12-21 12.3.7 Brake xB5, xB6 12-25 12.3.8 Installation 12-30 12.3.9 Removing the brake control module 12-32 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-1 Expansion modules 12.1 Overview of expansion modules Expansion modules can be operated only in conjunction with direct, reversing or soft starters of the following types: * * * * * * * DS-x1 DS1e-x F-DS1e-x DSS1e-x RS-x1 RS1e-x F-RS1e-x The table below lists the expansion modules currently available, complete with their functions: Description Brake control modules 1) 2) 3) Function xB1 for 24 VDC/4 A brake (externally powered) xB2 for 500 VDC/0.7 A brake (internally powered) xB5 for brake AC 400 V/0.5 A xB3 for brake DC 24 V/4 A (externally supplied) also with 2 inputs 1) (non-retentive2) / retentive3)) with diagnostics xB4 for brake DC 500 V/0.7 A (internally supplied) also with 2 inputs 1) (non-retentive2) / retentive3)) with diagnostics xB6 for brake AC 400 V/0.5 A also with 2 inputs 1) (non-retentive2) / retentive3)) Only in conjunction with DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x up to order number suffix: -.AA4 from order number suffix: -.AB4 Table 12-1: Overview of expansion modules SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 12-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Expansion modules 12.2 Terminal modules TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 12.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules The terminal modules are necessary for the wiring of the brake control modules xB1 to 6. The following table shows which brake control modules you can use with the various terminal modules. You can find information on the terminal modules in the following sections: * Section 6 for the PM-D power module and all motor starters * Safety-integrated systems in Section 11 * Fail-safe modules in Section 13 Expansion modules 3RK1903 Terminal modules TM-xB15 S24-01 TM-xB215 S24-01 -0AG00 -0AG01 Brake control module xB1 X Brake control module xB2 X Brake control module xB3 X Brake control module xB4 X Brake control module xB5 Brake control module xB6 X X Table 12-2: Assignment of the terminal modules for expansion modules SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-3 Expansion modules 12.3 Brake control modules 12.3.1 Description The brake control modules (xB1 to xB6) control the integrated DC spring-loaded brake of a three-phase motor. The brake is actuated by a solenoid which holds the brake in the off position when energized. When the circuit is deenergized the solenoid drops out and the brake is applied by spring force, blocking the motor. Another possible application is the integration of external actuators such as DC valves. This applies particularly when the actuators are functionally dependent on the motor. The brake control module installs on the right beside the motor starter in question. The terminal module of the brake control module connects the brake control module to the motor starter. The brake control module is an add-on component for ET 200S motor starters (MS) with an expansion interface (DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x). Note The brake control modules can be used only with ET 200S motor starters with an expansion interface (DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x). Caution The DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature may not be used for internally powered brakes (xB2, xB4). Brakes xB5 and xB6 must only be used if the 400 V AC power supply is provided separately. (see Section 12.3.7) Safety note The brake control modules (xB1 to xB6) can only be used in conjunction with FDS1e-x and F-RS1e-x depending on the performance level (see Section 8.3 and 9.3). Caution For xB3, xB4, xB6: When connecting the U1 electronic power supply which supplies the brake, a high signal from the brake inputs may be present on an active header group for approx. 5 ms. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 12-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Expansion modules Modules and components The brake control consists of the following modules: * TM-xB15 S24-01 terminal module for xB1, xB2, xB5 * TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal module for xB3, xB4, xB6 * Brake control module (xB1 to xB6) The components of the brake control module are illustrated below. Brake control module Link Coding ele- Connection terminals for inputs (only with xB3, xB4, xB6) Terminals for brake Plug connector to the motor starter Mechanical latch for the terminal module for motor starter Terminal module for brake control module Figure 12-1: Brake control SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-5 Expansion modules Electronic switch The brake control module has a single-pole electronic switch for driving a DC/AC1) spring-loaded brake integrated into an electric motor. Drive The brake control module is driven via the ET 200S bus and its motor starter. The output (DO 0.2) required for driving the brake comes from the motor starter. Important If a brake is not driven via output DO 0.2 of the motor starter, the motor starts up with the brake applied and the circuit breaker/thermal motor model can be tripped. Latch for mechanical locking The brake control module is accommodated in a housing 15 mm wide. The link on the left-hand side of the brake control module (see Figure 12-1) ensures that the brake control module can be plugged in or pulled only when its motor starter has been pulled. This excludes the possibility of hot removal or insertion. Coding There is a coding element on the housing of the brake control module. This is a mechanical means of differentiating between different modules. 1) Depending on the motor and the brake module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 12-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Expansion modules Indicators The brake control module comprises * A red LED for SF, group error (xB3, xB4, xB6), * Two green LEDs as indicators for inputs 1 and 2 (xB3, xB4, xB6) Input 1, terminals 1 and 2, limit switch for clockwise rotation, Input 2, terminals 5 and 6, limit switch for counterclockwise rotation, * A yellow LED which indicates the status for output DO 0.2 of the motor starter. The LED is on when output DO 0.2 of the motor signal is carrying a 1 signal. This means the electronic switch is closed and the brake is released. For the diagnostics of xB3 and xB4, see Section 4.8.12. Note For xB1, xB2: A response of the overload or short-circuit protection is not indicated if the instantaneous signal state of the LED for output DO 0.2 is not changed as a result. For xB3, xB4: The signal state of the inputs is indicated, and a response of the overload or short-circuit protection is also indicated. Caution For xB3, xB4, xB6: When connecting the U1 electronic power supply which supplies the brake, a high signal from the brake inputs may be present on an active header group for approx. 5 ms. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-7 Expansion modules View xB1 DC24V/4A xB2 DC500V/0.7A xB3 DC24V/4A xB4 DC500V/0.7A xB5 DC400V/0.5A xB6 DC400V/0.5A LED: SF LED: Inputs 1, 2 LED: STAT STAT 3RK19030CB00 xB1 3RK19030CC00 xB2 3RK19030CE00 xB3 3RK19030CF00 xB4 3RK19030CJ00 xB5 3RK19030CK00 xB6 Figure 12-2: Brake control modules xB1 to 6 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 12-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Expansion modules Common and distinguishing features of the brake control modules Features xB 1 For externally powered mechanical DC spring-loaded brake 2 X 3 4 For 24 VDC/4 A X X Supply from a separate 24 VDC auxiliary voltage X X Brake can be released when the motor is switched off (so that the motor can be turned by hand) X X 1) For 500 VDC/0.7 A 6 X X X X X For mechanical AC spring-loaded brake For internally powered mechanical DC spring-loaded brake. 5 X X X X for AC 400 V/0.5 A Supply from a rectified voltage tapped from the electric motor X X Once the motor has been switched off, the brake can no longer be released X X Configurable X X X Parameterizable X X X Diagnostics capability X X 2 inputs (functional scope depends on the associated motor starter) X X X Circuit status of the inputs shown by LEDs X X X Circuit status of the inputs can be analyzed by PLC X X X Diagnosis overload X X 1) Brake control modules xB2 and xB4 can also be used with an external rectifier (in the control cabinet) for an externally powered mechanical DC spring-loaded brake. Table 12-3: Features of the brake control modules SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-9 Expansion modules Parameters The following table indicates the parameters that can be set for the xB3 and xB4 brake control modules. Parameters Diagnostics of brake overload Action, value range * * Disable Enable Factory setting Applicability Disable Module Table 12-4: Parameters for brake control modules xB3, xB4 Group diagnosis: This parameter enables diagnosis messaging (error types are listed in Section 4.7). Note The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults on the SF-LED. Note The xB1 and xB2 modules are purely passive from the point of view of the IM 151 and require no parameterization. Parameterization of the inputs for xB3, xB4, xB6 (Only applies if high feature/failsafe motor starters are used). The inputs of the xB3, xB4, xB6 and expansion modules can be parameterized independently of each other for various actions via their respective motor starters. Parameterization is described in: * 8.3.4 for direct starter; high feature/failsafe * 8.4.5 for direct soft starter; high feature * 9.3.4 for reversing starter; high feature/failsafe SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 12-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Expansion modules Configuration with brake control module Caution See information on derating in Section 3.4. DS1e-x DS1e-x xB1, xB1, 51), 361) xB1 ... ... 4 6 xB1 xB1 xB1 ... ... 46 DS-x1 DS1-x DS-x1 DS1-x DM-V15 DM-V15 PM-D PM-D IM IM 151 151 The diagram below shows the layout of motor starters and brake control modules with the layout of a DM-V15 spacer module (only with standard motor starters with 45/90 mm installation width): RS-x1 RS1-x RS1e-x RS1e-x DSS1e-x DSS1e-x Figure 12-3: Configuration with brake control module and spacing module 1) Only in combination with a separately protected power supply of the brake SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-11 Expansion modules 12.3.2 Terminal modules TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 Features Terminal block * The terminal module consists of a support and a terminal block. * Terminal module TM-xB15 S24-01 for xB1, xB2 or xB5 brake control module * Terminal module TM-xB215 S24-01 for xB3, xB4 or xB6 brake control module * Connection by screw-type terminal * AUX1 cable fed through without terminals Support Terminal assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules: View 1 2 4 Terminal Description 1 Input 1 L+ 2 Input 1 3 Not used 5 Input 2 L+ 6 Input 2 7 Not used Basic circuit diagram TM-xB215 S24-01 only 5 RS-x1 RS1e-x 6 8 xB3, xB4 xB6 1 U1 2 Logic Input 1 Limit switch cw rotation K1 5 6 Logic Input 2 Limit switch ccw rotation K2 TM-xB215 S24-01 Logic 4 8 Wiring options P-switching ~ = + - M 4 4 8 8 TM-xB15 S24-01 Motor with brake Brake control M-switching ~ + = 4 - M Motor with brake 8 Brake control Table 12-5: Terminal assignment of the TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 12-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Expansion modules Technical specifications - TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 15 x 196.5 x 95 Depth with brake control module (mm) 117.5 Weight (g) approx. 120 Rated currents Inputs (terminals 1 and 2, 5, and 6) - TM-xB215 S24-01 only Brake control (terminals 4 and 8) Conductor cross-sections Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) to IEC 60947 1 x 2.5 Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947 AWG cables, single- or multi-core 1 x (18 to 22) Wiring Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 1 Tightening torque (Nm) 0.4 to 0.7 Table 12-6: Technical specifications - TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-13 Expansion modules 12.3.3 Signal response of xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control module and DS1-x, DS1e-x, and F-DS1e-x motor starters The diagram below illustrates the dependencies between the individual signals DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x: Control (process image outputs) - PLC action 1 DO 0.0 (motor ON) 3 8 DO 0.2 (brake released) 7 braked 4 DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation DI 0.1 (contactor on) xB3, xB4, xB6 Limit switch, cw rotation 5 2 Limit switch, ccw rotation Rectification of fault Limit switch open 6 9 xB3, xB4, xB6: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation DI 0.0 (limit switch, cw rotation) DI 0.1 (limit switch, ccw rotation) xB3, xB4, xB6: Diagnostics LED, switching output LED, limit switch cw rotation LED, limit switch ccw rotation From this point, manual movement of the drive is possible from the limit switch position Original drive signal overridden / rendered ineffective by limit switch Table 12-7: Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and DS1-x, DS1e-x, and F-DS1e-x motor starters SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 12-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Expansion modules Explanation of the individual actions 1 Brake is released (DO 0.2) and motor (DO 0.0) is switched on by the application program in the PLC. PLC's switch-on command is drive signal for the contactor (DO 0.0). Command to release the brake effects drive of brake enabling signal (DO 0.2). 2 Limit position is passed, so the limit switch for clockwise rotation opens (occurrence of fault). When the limit switch opens the direct (no PLC intervention) result is discontinuation of the contactor drive signal and cancellation of brake enabling signal. The PLC's driver signals for the currently active contactor and the brake enabling signal become ineffective (overridden by limit switch). The motor contactor and the brake driver signal of the DS1-x are switched off. 3 The application program in the PLC cancels the switch-on command (DO 0.0) and optionally the brake enabling signal (DO 0.2). 4 Release the brake (DO 0.2) with the user program in the PLC. It is only possible to withdraw from the limit switch by hand with externally supplied brakes. 5 Rectification of fault. Limit switch closes. 6 Limit switch for counterclockwise rotation is overshot. Brake enabling signal is canceled. 7 PLC cancels brake enabling signal 8 See step 1 9 The limit switch for counterclockwise rotation recloses. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-15 Expansion modules 12.3.4 Signal response of the xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control module and RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x motor starters The diagram below illustrates the dependencies between the individual signals RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x: Control (process image outputs) - PLC action 1 DO 0.0 (cw rotation) 3 - Drive for brake is again possible 4 DO 0.1 (ccw rotation) braked DO 0.2 (brake released) RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation DI 0.1 (contactor on) xB3, xB4, xB6 Limit switch, cw rotation Rectification of fault, e.g. by reversal of direction 2 Limit switch open 5 Limit switch, ccw rotation xB3, xB4, xB6: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation DI 0.0 (limit switch, cw rotation) DI 0.1 (limit switch, ccw rotation) xB3, xB4, xB6: Diagnostics LED, switching output LED, limit switch cw rotation LED, limit switch ccw rotation Original drive signal overridden / rendered ineffective by limit switch Table 12-8: Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x motor starters SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 12-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Expansion modules Explanation of the individual actions 1 The brake (DO 0.2) is released and the motor is activated (DO 0.0: clockwise rotation) by the user program of the PLC. PLC's switch-on command is drive signal for the contactor (DO 0.0). Command to release the brake effects drive of brake enabling signal (DO 0.2). 2 Limit position is passed, so the limit switch for clockwise rotation opens (occurrence of fault). When the limit switch opens the direct (no PLC intervention) result is discontinuation of the contactor drive signal. The PLC's driver signal for the currently active contactor becomes ineffective (overridden by limit switch). The motor contactor (DO 0.0: clockwise rotation) of the RS1-x is deactivated. 3 The application program in the PLC cancels the switch-on command (DO 0.0) and optionally the brake enabling signal (DO 0.2). 4 The brake (DO 0.2) is released and the direction of rotation is changed due to the activation of the motor (DO 0.1: counterclockwise rotation) by the user program of the PLC. 5 The limit switch for clockwise rotation recloses. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-17 Expansion modules 12.3.5 Externally powered brake xB1, xB3 For the actuation of an externally powered brake, the xB1 or xB3 brake control module is required. Features of externally powered brake: * Brake is released when voltage is applied. * Brake can be released when the motor is switched off (so that the motor can be turned by hand). * The brake control module is a single-pole breaker in the brake's circuit. * External 24 VDC supply required. * Maximum switching current is 4 A. Circuit diagram The figure below shows, by way of example, the circuit diagram of an externally powered DC spring-loaded brake (P-switching) with motor starter (DS1-x, DS1ex, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x) and brake control module (xB1, xB3). Circuit diagram ET 200S bus DO0 DS-x1 DS(S)1e-x F-DS1e-x DO0 RS-x1 RS1e-x F-RS1e-x Logic Logic K1 K1 Inputs (xB3 only) xB3 1 U1 IN1 2 5 DO1 IN2 6 Logic Input 1 Limit switch cw rotation Input 2 Limit switch ccw rotation K2 DO2 Logic DO2 xB1 xB3 Logic Power bus Safe isolation 500 V Electronic switch Motor starters Motor with integrated DC springloaded brake 8 4 L+ M 24 V DC M Figure 12-4: Sketched circuit diagram of externally powered brake SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 12-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Expansion modules Technical specifications for xB1 and xB3 Module-specific data Ambient temperature operation storage Degree of protection 0 to 60 C -40 to 80 C IP20, IEC 60529 Inputs (terminals 2 and 6) - xB3 only (non-retentive) Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131 Type 1 Low input current Iin <1.5 mA High input current Iin >5 mA Max. input current max. 8 to 10 mA Input delay (underline default value) tin 0.1 / 0.5 / 3 / 15 ms Sensor supply (terminals 1 and 5) short-circuit-proof and overload proof Operating voltage range (referenced to U1-) 20.4 to 28.8 VDC Current limitation in the event of a short-circuit to U1- approx. 1 A Isolation Between drive and brake circuit Surge withstand capability 500 V AC 8 kV Switching element of the brake control module (terminals 4 and 8) Rated operating voltage 24 VDC Peak voltage (periodic) <35 VDC Continuous current 1) Switch-on current at t <120 ms Switch-off current DC 13, at 24 V (with ext. induction protection) Off-state current 4 A 8 A 4 A Voltage drop at Iload <4 A Permissible power of brake at 24 V Indication by LED (yellow) - Motor braked Brake active - Motor unbraked Brake released Error message if brake not driven <10 mA <0.3 V 95 W LED off (switch open) LED on (switch closed) DO 0.2 = 0 DO 0.2 = 1 no Table 12-9: Technical specifications, brake control module xB1, xB3 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-19 Expansion modules Protective measures Overload protection 2) Short-circuit protection 2) (according to EN 60947-5-1 with 24 V/ 1 kA) Reverse polarity protection 3) Induction protection Integrated current limitation yes no Internal Protective diode External protection circuit for inductive load 4) 40 W > 40 W Recommended Required In case of a single high-energy pulse (surge) at the digital inputs according to IEC 61000-4-5, lightning protection elements (e.g. those manufactured by Dehn: DCO RK D 5 24 order number: 919986) are recommended (see the DP master manual and the description of the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS networks). 1) 2) 3) 4) Note information on derating in Section 3.4 for installation Electronic shutdown (cannot be reactivated until output DO 0.2 of the motor starter has been switched off) If polarity is reversed current flows (via protective diode parallel to switching element), the brake is released and overload and short-circuit protection have no effect. Circuit with RC element, protective diode or varistor Table 12-9: Technical specifications, brake control module xB1, xB3 (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 12-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Expansion modules 12.3.6 Internally powered brake xB2 and xB4 For the actuation of an internally powered brake, the xB2 or xB4 brake control module is required. The brake control module is for electric motors connecting to three-phase supplies with a rated voltage of 230/400 V to max. 290/500 V. Features of internally powered brake: * * * * * Brake is released when voltage is applied. Once the motor has been switched off, the brake can no longer be released. The brake control module is a single-pole breaker in the brake's circuit. The brake receives a rectified supply tapped from the motor's terminal board. Maximum switching current is 0.7 A. Warning The brake control module does not isolate the brake circuit from the power supply. For a motor starter with low setting range, the additional asymmetrical loads on the overcurrent tripping system caused by the brake must also be taken into account. Soft starters may not be used in connection with internally powered brakes. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-21 Expansion modules Circuit diagram The diagram below shows an internally powered DC spring-loaded brake with motor starter (DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x) and brake control module (xB2, xB4). Circuit diagram ET 200S bus DO0 DS-x1 DS1e-x F-DS1e-x DO0 RS-x1 RS1e-x F-RS1e-x Logic Logic K1 K1 Inputs (xB4 only) xB4 1 U1 IN1 2 5 DO1 IN2 6 Logic Input 1 Limit switch cw rotation Input 2 Limit switch ccw rotation K2 DO2 Logic DO2 xB2 xB4 Logic Power bus Safe isolation 500 V Electronic switch Motor starters 4 ~ Motor with integrated DC springloaded brake 8 = + - M Figure 12-5: Sketched circuit diagram of internally powered brake SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 12-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Expansion modules Technical specifications for xB2 and xB4 Module-specific data Ambient temperature operation storage Degree of protection 0 to 60 C -40 to 80 C IP20, IEC 60529 Inputs (terminals 2 and 6) - xB4 only (non-retentive) Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131 Type 1 Low input current Iin <1.5 mA High input current Iin >5 mA tin 0.1 / 0.5 / 3 / 15 ms Max. input current max. 8 to 10 mA Input delay (underline default value) Sensor supply (terminals 1 and 5) short-circuit-proof and overload proof 20.4 to 28.8 VDC Operating voltage range (referenced to U1-) Current limitation in the event of a short-circuit to U1- approx. 1 A Isolation Between drive and brake circuit Surge withstand capability 500 V AC 8 kV Switching element of the brake control module (terminals 4 - 8) Rated operating voltage 500 VDC Peak voltage (periodic) <710 Vs 1) Continuous current Switch-on currentat t <120 ms Switch-off current DC 13, at 220 Veff 2) (with ext. induction protection) Residual current 0.7 A 5 A 0.7 A at Iload <0.7 A <1.4 V Voltage drop Approved brakes (examples) with half-wave rectification for 230 V AC equals 100 Veff, T <40 C 400 V AC equals 170 Veff 500 V AC equals 220 Veff Indication by LED (yellow) - Motor braked Brake active - Motor unbraked Brake released Error message if brake not driven <1 mA 70 W 100 W 135 W LED off (switch open) LED on (switch closed) DO 0.2 = 0 DO 0.2 = 1 no Table 12-10: Technical specifications, brake control module xB2, xB4 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-23 Expansion modules Protective measures Overload protection 3) Short-circuit protection 3) Integrated current limitation yes (according to EN 60947-5-1 with 230 V/1 kA) Reverse polarity protection 4) Induction protection no Internal Varistor External protection circuit for inductive load 5) 40 W > 40 W Recommended Required In case of a single high-energy pulse (surge) at the digital inputs according to IEC 61000-4-5, lightning protection elements (e.g. those manufactured by Dehn: DCO RK D 5 24 order number: 919986) are recommended (see the DP master manual and the description of the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS networks). 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Note information on derating in Section 3.4 for installation Half-wave rectification for a 500 V AC supply Electronic shutdown (cannot be reactivated until output DO 0.2 of the motor starter has been switched off) Module maps short-circuit without current limitation, the brake is released and overload and short-circuit protection have no effect. Circuit with RC element or protective diode at the brake coil or varistor at brake rectifier Table 12-10: Technical specifications, brake control module xB2, xB4 (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 12-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Expansion modules 12.3.7 Brake xB5, xB6 For the actuation of a brake, the xB5 or xB6 brake control module is required. The brake control module is for electric motors connecting to three-phase supplies with a rated voltage of 230/400 V to max. V. Features of externally powered brake: * The brake is powered either by the outgoing motor side via two phases (internally powered) or separately2) (externally powered) via the 400 V AC power supply. * Brake is released when voltage is applied. * With an externally powered brake, this can also be triggered if the motor is switched off (for moving the motor by hand) 1). * The brake control module is a single-pole breaker in the brake's circuit. * Maximum switching current is 0.5 A. Warning The brake control module does not isolate the brake circuit from the power supply. For a separate brake supply system, care should be taken to protect the cable and device/motor brake appropriately using a fuse. For a motor starter with low setting range, the additional asymmetrical loads on the overcurrent tripping system caused by the brake (for internally powered brakes) must also be taken into account. Soft starters may not be used in connection with internally powered brakes. 1) Assuming there is a separate 2) power supply to the brake 2) Line protection and a device contactor must be fitted accordingly. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-25 Expansion modules Circuit diagram Figure 12-6 shows the circuit diagram for an spring-loaded brake with motor starter internally powered via the motor output (DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) and brake control module (xB5, xB6). In Figure 12-7, this brake is powered separately (external power supply. Circuit diagram ET200S ET200S bus Bus DO0 RS1-x RS1e-x F-RS1e-x DO0 Logic Logik K1 K1 Input 1 1 Ei ngang Limit switch Endschal ter cw rotation Rechtsl auf U1 Input 2 2 Eingang Limit switch Endschal ter Li nkslauf ccw rotation I N2 Logic Logik xB5 xB6 IN1 DS1-x DS1e-x F -DS1e-x Inputs Ei ngange (nur only) xB 6) (xB6 DO1 Logic Logik K2 Logic Logik Power bus Energiebus Logic Logik Safe Sicherisolation e Tr ennung 400 VV 400 Motor starters Motorstarter Motor with Motor mitintegrated integr ierter AC - Feder kr aftbremse AC spring-loaded brake M Figure 12-6: Circuit diagram for brake powered internally via the motor output SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 12-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Expansion modules Circuit diagram Eingange Inputs (nur only) xB 6) (xB6 ET200S bus ET200S Bus DO0 RS1-x RS1e-x F-RS1e-x D O0 Logic Logik K1 K1 Input 2 2 Eingang Endschalter Limit switch Linkslauf ccw rotation IN2 Logic Logik Input Eingang1 1 Limit switch Endschalter Rec rotation htslauf cw U1 IN 1 DS1-x DS1e-x F-DS1e-x xB5 xB6 D O1 Logic Logik K2 Logic Logik Power bus Energiebus Logic Logik Safe isolation Sichere T rennung 400 V 400 V Separate saved voltage separate abgesicherte Spannung 400 V AC Motor starters Motorstarter Motor with integrated Motor mi t integrierter AC - Federkraftbrem AC spring-loaded brakese ~ AC 400 V M Figure 12-7: Circuit diagram for brake powered via separate external supply SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-27 Expansion modules Technical specifications for xB5, xB6 Module-specific data Ambient temperature operation storage Degree of protection 0 to 60 C -40 to 80 C IP20, IEC 60529 Inputs (terminals 2 and 6) - xB6 only Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131 Type 1 Low input current Iin <1.5 mA High input current Iin >5 mA Max. input current max. 8 to 10 mA Input delay (underline default value) tin 0.1 / 0.5 / 3 / 15 ms Sensor supply (terminals 1 and 5) short-circuit-proof and overload proof Operating voltage range (referenced to U1-) Current limitation in the event of a short-circuit to U1- 20.4 to 28.8 VDC approx. 1 A Isolation Between drive and brake circuit Surge withstand capability 400 V AC 4 kV Switching element of the brake control module (terminals 4 - 8) Brake design 400 V AC Rated operating voltage 400 V AC Continuous current 0.5 A Voltage drop with continuous current 7V Switch-on current with t < 120 ms <5A Switching capacity according to IEC60947-5-1 - AC 15, at 400 V AC 0.4 A Signaling via LED (yellow) Motor braked, brake active LED off (switch open) DO 0.2 = 0 Motor unbraked, brake tripped LED on (switch closed) DO 0.2 = 1 Error message if brake not driven no Table 12-11: Technical specifications for xB5, xB6 brake control module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 12-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Expansion modules Protective measures Shortcircuit protection, yes 1 A slow-blow fuse Surge suppression integrated varistors External protection circuit for inductive load 1) 40 W > 40 W Recommended Required In case of a single high-energy pulse (surge) at the digital inputs according to IEC 61000-4-5, lightning protection elements (e.g. those manufactured by Dehn: DCO RK D 5 24 order number: 919986) are recommended (see the DP master manual and the description of the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS networks). 1) Circuit with RC element or protective diode at the brake coil or varistor at brake rectifier Table 12-11: Technical specifications for xB5, xB6 brake control module (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-29 Expansion modules 12.3.8 Installation Installing terminal module for brake control module Drawing Procedure 1 Hang the terminal module on the upper rail. 2 Tilt the terminal module backwards into the lower rail until you hear it engage. 3 Push the terminal to the left with both hands towards the module you have already installed, keeping it straight, until you can hear it engage with the adjacent module. Table 12-12: Installing terminal module for brake control module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 12-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Expansion modules Connecting the brake control module Requirement The terminal module for the brake module must be installed. Mechanical coding When the brake control modules are plugged in, the terminal modules are mechanically coded to ensure that, in the event of a fault, they can only be replaced by brake control modules with identical functions. You must therefore bear the configured layout in mind when you insert the modules. Brake control module Code elements Terminal module If necessary, code elements can be removed from the terminal module using a 3 mm screwdriver. Figure 12-8: Mechanical coding of terminal modules Note If a brand-new brake control module is plugged into a terminal module that is already coded, the part of the code element for the terminal module must be removed from the brake control module beforehand. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-31 Expansion modules Connecting the brake control module Drawing Procedure 4 xB1 to 4 Insert the brake control module onto the installed and prewired terminal module as shown in the drawing. Brake control modules can only be connected to the correct terminal modules regardless of the code element. TM-xB15 S24-01 TM-xB215 S24-01 Table 12-13: Connecting the brake control module Connecting the motor starter Requirement The brake control module (xB1 to 4) has to be connected before the motor starter (DS1-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1-x, and F-RS1e-x) is connected. Drawing Procedure 5 Insert the motor starter onto the installed and prewired terminal module as shown in the drawing. For the procedure, see Section 3.7. Table 12-14: Connecting the motor starter 12.3.9 Removing the brake control module The brake control module can be removed only when its motor starter has been removed. For the removal of the motor starters, see Section 3.7. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 12-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13 Fail-safe modules Section 13.1 Subject General description Page 13-2 13.1.1 Overview 13-3 13.2 13-4 Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 and TM-FCM30-S47M30-S47 13.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules 13-4 13.2.2 TM-PFX30 S47 terminal modules for PM-D F X1 power/expansion module 13-5 13.2.3 Terminal module TM-FCM30-S47 for the F-CM contact replicator 13-7 13.3 13-9 PM-D F X1 power/expansion module 13.3.1 Parameters 13-10 13.3.2 Electrical configuration 13-11 13.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F X1 13-14 13.4 13-16 F-CM contact replicator 13.4.1 Parameters 13-17 13.4.2 Electrical configuration 13-18 13.4.3 Technical specifications - F-CM 13-21 13.5 13-23 Examples with fail-safe modules 13.5.1 Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits 13-24 13.5.2 Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations 13-26 13.5.3 Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several stations 13-28 13.5.4 Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator 13-30 13.5.5 Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator 13-32 13.5.6 ET 200S fail-safe motor starter with AS-i Safety at work 13-34 13.5.7 Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations 13-36 13.5.8 ET 200S fail-safe motor starters and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC 13-38 13.5.9 Distributed selective detection of safety signals 13-40 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-1 Fail-safe modules 13.1 General description Safety note Fail-safe modules cannot be used in conjunction with the safety-integrated system. Fail-safe means: the F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x, and F-CM interrupt the main conducting path/enabling circuits if an emergency stop is requested via the mechanically selected SG bus. A device error is detected and the safe state is established. ET 200S Motor Starter Safety - Local Solution The ET 200S Motor Starter Safety - Local Solution is preferably used for locally limited safety applications from the viewpoint of the safety-integrated system. The ET 200S Motor Starter Safety - Local Solution always consists of PM-D F1 through 5 power modules, the standard or high feature motor starters, and a PM-X connection module. For the configuration of this safety solution, the PM-D F1 through 5 power modules are used. These modules monitor the U1 (PWR) and U2 (CON) voltages (U2 not in the case of PM-D F5). They contain the complete function of a safety relay. The power module conducts the voltages for the electronic supply via the terminal modules to the motor starters of a potential group. The standard or high feature motor starter can be used to configure a safety solution of this kind to SIL3 in accordance with IEC 62061 / PL e in accordance with DIN EN ISO 13849-1. Every standard motor starter must be equipped with a fail-safe kit (F-kit) for monitoring the switching status. In the case of the high feature motor starter, the fail-safe kit has already been integrated. Fail-Safe Motor Starters The fail-safe motor starters (TUV-certified, self-monitored, and with internally redundant deactivation) are always used in conjunction with a fail-safe power/expansion module PM-D F X1/power module PM-D F PROFIsafe. In contrast to the power modules of the ET 200S Motor Starter Safety - Local Solution, these power modules actuate the SG1 through 6 safety groups. The fail-safe motor starters evaluate the SG1 through 6 safety groups located in the terminal modules. While the PM-D F X1 is switched using external safety switchgear (AS-i Safety Monitor or the 3TK28 safety switchgear), the PM-D F PROFIsafe is switched using a parent fail-safe control system (F-PLC). SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 13-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Fail-safe modules 13.1.1 Overview The table below lists the fail-safe modules currently available together with the corresponding functions: Description Function Power/expansion module PM-D F X1 ... supplies external safety devices ... loops the 6 SG buses and U1 and M through contact replicator F-CM ... used in conjunction with a fail-safe power module PM-D F PROFIsafe or PM-D F X1 ... makes 4 floating relay contacts available Power module PM-D F PROFIsafe See the "ET 200S Distributed I/O Device for Fail-Safe Modules" manual Fail-safe direct starters F-DS1e-x see Section 8.3. Fail-safe reversing starters F-RS1e-x see Section 9.3. Table 13-1: Overview of the fail-safe modules SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-3 Fail-safe modules 13.2 Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 and TM-FCM30-S47 13.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules Terminal modules are required for wiring the PM-D F X1 fail-safe power/expansion module and the F-CM contact replicator. The following table shows which fail-safe modules you can use with the various terminal modules. You can find information on the terminal modules in the following sections: * Section 6 for the PM-D power module and all motor starters * Safety-integrated systems in Section 11 * Expansion modules such as the brake control module, in Section 12. Fail-safe modules Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47-G1 TM-FCM30 S47 TM-PFX30 S47-G0 3RK1903 PM-D F X1 power/expansion module -3AE00 -3AE10 -3AB10 X F-CM contact replicator X Table 13-2: Assignment of the terminal modules for fail-safe modules SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 13-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Fail-safe modules 13.2.2 TM-PFX30 S47 terminal modules for PM-D F X1 power/expansion module Features * The terminal modules consist of a support and a terminal block. * TM-PFX30 S47-G0 terminal module with infeed from the left to forward U 1 and M as well as SG1 to SG6. * TM-PFX30 S47-G1 terminal module without infeed from the left in order to start a new group. * Connection by screw-type terminal. * Prewiring of the terminal module. * AUX1 cable fed through without terminals. * The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips. Terminal block Support Color coding labels 1. You can apply the color coding labels in the opening provided next to the terminal directly from the strip. 2. Push the color coding labels onto the terminal module with your finger. Looping the potentials through Terminals 1/8, 2/9, 6/13, 7/14, 15/22, 16/23, 18/25, 19/26, 20/27, and 21/28 are bridged in the terminal module and can be used to loop the potentials through. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-5 Fail-safe modules Terminal assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-PFX30 S47-G0/G1 terminal modules: Terminal 1/8 Meaning U1: Fused 24 VDC limited + IN/OU to SIMATIC range T 2/9 M IN/OU T 3/10 --- Not used 4/11 -- Not used 5/12 -- View L+ Uin: For connecting an external power supply unit 24 VDC SELV/PELV 7/14 M -- AUX1 Meaning 15/22 SG1 16/23 SG2 17/24 -- 18/25 SG3 1 1 85 2 2 2 1 96 2 3 1 8 2 5 1 9 2 6 19/26 SG4 6 12 30 2 7 20/27 SG5 7 12 41 2 8 21/28 SG6 Not used 6/13 Terminal Not used Fed through without terminals Table 13-3: Terminal assignment of the TM-PFX30 S47-G0/G1 terminal modules for the PM-D F X1 power module Technical specifications - TM-PFX30 S47 Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 30 x 196.5 x 102 Depth with power module (mm) 117.5 Weight (g) approx. 375 Insulation voltages and rated currents Insulation voltage 500 V Rated operating voltage 24 VDC Rated operating current 10 A Conductor cross-sections Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) to IEC 60947 1 x 2.5 Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947 AWG cables, single- or multi-core 1 x (18 to 22) Wiring Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 1 Tightening torque (Nm) 0.4 to 0.7 Table 13-4: Technical specifications - TM-PFX30 S47 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 13-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Fail-safe modules 13.2.3 Terminal module TM-FCM30-S47 for the F-CM contact replicator Features * The terminal module consists of a support and a terminal block * TM-PFX30 S47 terminal module with throughfeed for the F-CM contact replicator * Connection by screw-type terminal * Prewiring of the terminal module * AUX1 cable fed through without terminals * SG bus selection using the wire jumper provided * The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips. Terminal block Support Color coding labels 1. You can apply the color coding labels in the opening provided next to the terminal directly from the strip. 2. Push the color coding labels onto the terminal module with your finger. Terminal assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-FCM30-S47 terminal module: Terminal Meaning 1--8 SG1 2--9 SG2 3/10 -- 4--11 SG3 5--12 SG4 6--13 SG5 7--14 -- SG6 AUX1 Not used View Terminal 15 OUT 1.1 1 1 85 2 2 16 OUT 1.2 2 1 96 2 3 17-21, 24 -- Not used 22 OUT 2.1 23 OUT 2.2 25 OUT 3.1 26 OUT 3.2 27 OUT 4.1 28 OUT 4.2 4 1 1 2 5 5 1 2 2 6 6 1 3 2 7 7 1 4 2 8 Jumped in the factory Fed through without terminals Meaning Table 13-5: Terminal assignment of the TM-FCM30-S47 terminal modules for the F-CM contact replicator SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-7 Fail-safe modules Technical specifications - TM-FCM30-S47 Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 30 x 196.5 x 102 Depth with power module (mm) 117.5 Weight (g) approx. 375 Insulation voltages and rated currents Insulation voltage 500 V Rated operating voltage 24 VDC Rated operating current 10 A Conductor cross-sections Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) to IEC 60947 1 x 2.5 Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947 AWG cables, single- or multi-core 1 x (18 to 22) Wiring Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 1 Tightening torque (Nm) 0.4 to 0.7 Table 13-6: Technical specifications - TM-FCM30-S47 Safety note Only one SG bus can be selected. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 13-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Fail-safe modules 13.3 PM-D F X1 power/expansion module Features * A new fail-safe potential group begins with the power/expansion module together with the associated terminal module. The fail-safe motor starters/ F-CM contact replicators of a fail-safe potential group are connected to the right of the power/expansion module. * The PM-D F X1 has redundant overvoltage protection that trips the internal fuse just outside the upper SIMATIC voltage limit, thus ensuring that the entire system downstream is deenergized. * The PM-D F X1 conducts the fused voltage (U1) for the supply to the electronic components and the safety groups SG1 to SG6 to the potential buses of the terminal modules for all the fail-safe motor starters and F-CM contact replicators of a fail-safe potential group. * External safety devices can be supplied with a fused voltage U1 from the PM-D F X1. This ensures that overvoltage cannot occur in the system (there must be no disturbances). * Switching through the 6 safety groups SG1 to SG6 as well as from U 1 and M. * The state of safety groups SG1 to SG6 is indicated by an LED. * Transfer of diagnostic messages to the coordinating controller. * The PM-D F X1 with a terminal module is a forwarding node. The fail-safe potential group can be switched to an additional ET 200S row. * The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips. Caution Power/expansion modules must not be either inserted or removed during operation. View LEDs: SF group error PWR (power) (U1) SG1 to SG6 (safety group 1 to 6) Figure 13-1: PM-D F X1 power/expansion module SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-9 Fail-safe modules 13.3.1 Parameters The following table describes the parameters that can be set for the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module. Parameters Group diagnosis Action, value range * * Disable Enable Factory setting Disable Applicability Module Table 13-7: Parameters for the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module Group diagnosis: This parameter enables diagnosis messaging (error types are listed in Section 4.7). Note The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults on the SF-LED. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 13-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Fail-safe modules 13.3.2 Electrical configuration Block circuit diagram for the PM-D F X1 DC 24 V L+ Bus connection SF ET 200S Bus Safe isolation 6/13 M SG1 15/22 7/14 redundant voltage monitoring and shutdown SG2 SG3 16/23 18/25 Interference suppressor filter and display PWR 1/8 2/9 + IN/OUT - IN/OUT 19/26 SG4 20/27 SG5 21/28 SG6 Fused 24 VDC (U1) Figure 13-2: Block circuit diagram for the PM-D F X1 Explanation The PM-D F X1 is inserted at the start of a potential group or a new row (TMPFX30 S47-G1) or is inserted to loop through a potential group (TM-PFX30 S47G0). You can connect voltage (Uin) to the PM-D F X1 at terminals 6/13 and 7/14. You can feed a fused voltage of 24 VDC (U1) in and out at terminals 1/8 and 2/9. Safety groups SG1 to SG6 can be fed in and out at terminals 15/22, 16/23, 18/25, 19/26, 20/27, and 21/28. The PM-D F X1 module consists of the following system components: * System components not related to safety: - Bus connection with communication - Diagnostic messages via the bus - Display of switching and error states * Safety-related system components: - Monitoring of the U1 voltage for overvoltage - Disconnection of the U1 voltage in the event of overvoltage (<100 ms) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-11 Fail-safe modules Laying regulations for lines Safety note The user must ensure that a cross-circuit between the individual safety groups SG1 to SG6 or U1 and Uin or other cables cannot occur by complying with the correct cable-laying rules. Safety regulations Safety note If the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module is supplied via Uin, a PELV power pack must be used that will output max. 60 VDC in the event of a fault. For surge stability, an external protective circuit (surge filter) is required between the load voltage supply (power pack) and the load voltage input (Uin) of the terminal module. e.g. Blitzductor VT (order no. 918 402 from Dehn + Sohne) Safety note When PM-D F X1, PM-D F PROFIsafe, F-CM, F-DS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x are part of a single potential group, they must be in the same switch cabinet. Cables for SG1 to SG6, U1, Uin can only be laid in this switch cabinet. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 13-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Fail-safe modules Safety note If external safety devices (non-ET 200S, e.g. 3TK28, AS-i Safety Monitor) are connected to the PM-D F X1, ensure that they have no effect on the potential group, even in the event of a fault. The external safety devices then switch U1+ (terminal 1/8) to the SG rails (emergency stop signal). An appropriate safety device should be chosen, depending on the performance level required. Please ensure you comply with the regulations for each safety device. Module replacement If a PM-D F X1 module has to be replaced, an acceptance test is not necessary. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-13 Fail-safe modules 13.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F X1 Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) (incl. terminal module) 30 x 196.5 x 117.5 Weight (g) approx. 100 Module-specific data Ambient temperature (C) 0 to 60 Degree of protection IP20 Maximum attainable safety classes: * IEC 61508 SIL1) * PL Cat. (DIN EN ISO 13849) * * * * * HFT (DIN EN / IEC 61508 nOP (DIN EN ISO 13849) dOP (DIN EN ISO 13849) hOP (DIN EN ISO 13849) 3 e 4 1 20000 365 24 Safety parameters: * * * Low demand PFDAVG (10a) Test interval 3 mos. High demand/continuous mode PFH Test interval 3 mos 1/h Proof test interval years 2.5 x 10-6 5.7 x 10-11 20 Table 13-8: Technical specifications - PM-D F X1 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 13-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Fail-safe modules Voltages, currents, potentials Rated control supply voltage Us 21.6 to 26.4 VDC up to 60 C Rated operating current Ie * Internal protection through fusing 6A 7 A (quick-response) Recommended upstream short-circuit protection: * Fuse Supply of: * Fail-safe motor starters * Motor starters for safety-integrated systems * Electronic modules * Ex[i] modules Current consumption: * From the backplane bus * From U1 * From SGx gL/gG 6.3 A 1) yes no no no 10 mA 35 mA 15 mA Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts None Diagnostic functions: * Group error/device fault * Monitoring of the supply voltage for electronic components U1 (PWR) * Monitoring of the 6 safety groups * Diagnostic information readable yes red SF LED green PWR LED Green LED SG1 to SG6 yes Standards, approbations TUV UL, CSA certification 1) yes yes The fuse must be selected such that the connected power supply unit can provide the required current to interrupt it. Table 13-8: Technical specifications - PM-D F X1 (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-15 Fail-safe modules 13.4 F-CM contact replicator Features * The F-CM contact replicator closes its enabling circuits unless there is an emergency stop on the selected SG bus. * Redundant circuit design with two output relays with positively driven contacts. * Can be set to safety group SG1 to SG6 (default setting = SG6). * Four separate floating enabling circuits as normally open contacts. * At each on/off cycle of the contact replicator, the switching elements of the FCM are checked to ensure that they open and close correctly. * Welded contacts in any enabling circuits are detected by the F-CM when the enabling circuits are opened, and a reboot of the device is avoided by the positively driven operation of the contacts. * Transfer of diagnostic messages to the coordinating controller. * The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips. Caution Contact replicators cannot be either inserted or removed during operation. View LEDs: SF SF group error PWR PWR (power) (U1) STAT STAT (status) 3RK1903-3CA00 Figure 13-3: F-CM contact replicator SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 13-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Fail-safe modules 13.4.1 Parameters The following table indicates the parameter that can be set for the F-CM contact replicator. Parameters Group diagnosis Action, value range * * Disable Enable Factory setting Disable Applicability Module Table 13-9: Parameters for the F-CM contact replicator Group diagnosis: This parameter enables diagnosis messaging (error types are listed in Section 4.7). Note The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults on the SF-LED. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-17 Fail-safe modules 13.4.2 Electrical configuration Block diagram for the F-CM OUT SG1 Bus connection SF 8 2 1.1 2.1 3.1 4.1 SG3 9 4 11 15 22 27 16 23 26 28 Connection logic and display K1 ET 200S Bus 25 Safe isolation 1 SG2 5 SG4 12 6 SG5 13 7 SG6 14 U1 K2 M 1.2 2.2 3.2 4.2 OUT Figure 13-4: Block diagram for the F-CM Explanation The F-CM contact replicator consists of the following system components: * Non-safety-related system components: - Bus connection with communication - Diagnostic message via the bus - Display of switching and error states - Connection logic * Safety-related system components: - Disconnection of the enabling circuits if there is no voltage on the selected SG bus - Mutual interlocking of the positively driven relays - Prevention of reclosing if there is an error in the enabling circuit SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 13-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Fail-safe modules The F-CM contact replicator can be inserted anywhere in the corresponding potential group to the right of a fail-safe power module. Use the wire jumper to set the desired safety group (SG1 to SG6) on the terminal with the following terminals: - 1/8 for SG1, - 2/9 for SG2, - 4/11 for SG3, - 5/12 for SG4, - 6/13 for SG5, - 7/14 for SG6 The F-CM contact replicator is preset to safety group SG6 using the wire jumper. You can connect additional actuators or devices to the floating contacts with the terminals OUT 1.1 - OUT 4.2. Safety regulations Safety note Only one of the 6 SG buses can be selected with a jumper. Safety note Only applies in fail-safe mode (fail-safe technology) The F-CM can only be operated in the potential group of a PM-D F PROFIsafe or PM-D F X1 that safely limits the voltage to within the SIMATIC range. Safety note You must only use the F-CM contact replicator to control devices that do not pose any direct danger to persons or the environment if suddenly disconnected. Safety note Cyclic test The F-CM must be tested at commissioning and then at least every 3 to 6 months by means of an on/off cycle using the selected emergency stop bus. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-19 Fail-safe modules Safety note The enabling circuits must be appropriately protected against overloading (with fuses, for example; see Section 13.4.3). Please note: If the enabling circuits are integrated into the sensor circuits of an external safety device, overload protection might not be necessary if there is protection in the sensor circuits of the external safety device. For more information, consult the operating instructions of the external safety device. Safety note The F-CM is designed in such a way that in the event of an emergency stop it is safely shut down by the selected SG bus. In the event of a fault, a defined switch on cannot be guaranteed. Safety note Make sure that any potential that builds up between the control circuit of the FCM (U1/SGx/M) and the main conducting paths (OUT) is not greater than the safe, functional extra-low voltage. This can be achieved, for example, by using suitable grounding measures. Module replacement If you replace an F-CM module, an acceptance test is not necessary but the FCM must be tested (see cyclic test). SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 13-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Fail-safe modules 13.4.3 Technical specifications - F-CM Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) (incl. terminal module) 30 x 196.5 x 117.5 Weight (g) approx. 190 Module-specific data Mechanical life Electrical life 10 x 106 switching cycles > 200,000 switching cycles at Ie Ambient temperature 0 to 60 C Degree of protection IP20 Utilization category DC-13 Control times * On-delay * Release time < 80 ms (typ. 50 ms) < 60 ms (typ. 35 ms) Maximum attainable safety classes: * IEC 61508 SIL * PL Cat. (DIN EN ISO 13849) * 3 e 4 Safety parameters: * * * * * * SFF (DIN EN / IEC 61508) DC (DIN EN ISO 13849) HFT (DIN EN / IEC 61508 * Low demand PFDAVG (10a) Test interval 3 months Test interval 6 months High demand/continuous mode PFH Test interval 3 months 1/hr Test interval 6 months 1/hr Proof test interval years * * * nOP (DIN EN ISO 13849) dOP (DIN EN ISO 13849) hOP (DIN EN ISO 13849) B10D IN 0.5 IN 0.25 IN 99.77 % >99 1 1 365 24 1.8 x 10-5 3.0 x 10-5 4.0 x 10-10 6.9 x 10-10 20 90.000 200.000 300.000 Table 13-10: Technical specifications - F-CM SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-21 Fail-safe modules Voltages, currents, potentials Control circuit U1 (PWR): Rated control supply voltage Us Power consumption 21.6 to 26.4 VDC up to 60 C 1.8 W Floating enabling circuits Rated operating current Ie 13 to 24 VDC Thermal continuous current Ith 2A 4A Recommended short-circuit protection for enabling circuits * Fuse gL/gG 6.3 A Current consumption: * From the backplane bus * From U1 * From SGx 10 mA 15 mA 70 mA Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts None Diagnostic functions: * Group error/device fault * Monitoring of the supply voltage for electronic components U1 (PWR) * Monitoring of the circuit state of the enabling circuit * Diagnostic information readable yes red SF LED green PWR LED green/red LED STAT yes Standards, approbations TUV UL, CSA certification yes yes Table 13-10: Technical specifications - F-CM (Contd.) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 13-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Fail-safe modules 13.5 Examples with fail-safe modules Safety note The following applications are used only as a suggestion of typical circuit diagrams. No liability will be accepted for the proper functioning, compliance with certification requirements, or compatibility of the examples. Use at your own risk. Safety note For PL d or PL e or SIL 2 or 3, a PELV power supply unit that provides a maximum output voltage of 60 VDC (secure functional extra-low voltage) in the event of a fault must be used for U1 ext. Caution Due to the operation of star-connected three-phase motors, high EMC interference may occur. Interference above the IEC limit values can lead to an impairment of functions or failure of the electronics. In case of high EMC interference, we recommend the use of motors with EMC protection circuits. (Exception: soft starters may not be operated with a EMC protection circuit). Safe functional extra-low voltage Warning The fail-safe modules must be operated with safe functional extra-low voltage. That means that these modules may only be operated with maximum voltage of 60 V in the event of an error. All system components that can deliver electrical energy in any form must fulfill these conditions. Every other electrical circuit (DC 24 V) utilized in the system must have a safe, functional extra-low voltage. Please observe the appropriate data sheets or contact the manufacturer. Warning All voltage sources, e.g. electronics power supply, external load power supply, or bus power supply, must be electrically isolated from one another externally. This is necessary so that even at low potential differentials no additive voltage which could exceed the 60 V develops from the individual voltage sources. Please observe the ET 200S installation guidelines to ensure that the electrical isolation is sufficient in regard to the electrical wiring's cross-section. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-23 U2 ext. M L+ S7-300F PLC Master 1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M A0 Profibus-DP IM 151-1 HF PM-E A1 AUX1 U1 ext. M L+ TM-P15 S23-A0 A3 4 8 2 6 3 7 A1 A5 F-RS1e-x = SG1 A4 F-DS1e-x = SG2 A2 10, 12, 14, 16 9 13 11 15 2, 4, 6, 8 1 5 3 7 4 emergency stop circuits for SG1 to SG6 DI7 Vs2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI1 DI2 DI3 Vs1 DI0 A6 L+ 20 27 21 28 A3 F-DS1e-x = SG6 U1 ext. M PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 EM 4/8 PM-D F F-DI PROFI 24 VDC safe A2 TM-E30 S44-A0 13-24 TM-PF30 S47-F1 F-DS1e-x = SG2 A7 13.5.1 Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits Terminating module Terminating cover A0 Fail-safe modules Figure 13-5: Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits up to PL e / SIL3 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 N PE E A Fault 1L1 3L2 5L3 M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 U E A A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 U A E Fault A6 M 3~ U A E Fault A7 M 3~ 1 2 1 3RK1 903-3BA01 3RK1 903-3AA00 6ES7 138-4CB10-0AB0 6ES7 193-4CD20-0AA0 6ES7 138-4FA00-0AB0 6ES7 193-4CK20-0AA0 3RK1 301-0xB13-0AA2 Description U PM-D F PROFIsafe TM-PF30 S47-F1 PM-E TM-P15 S23-A0 EM 4/8 F-DI DC24V PROFIsafe TM-E30 S44-A0 F-DS1e-x x in accordance with current range 3RK1 903-3AC00 TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed 3RK1 903-3AC10 TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3RK1 301-0xB13-1AA2 F-RS1e-x x in accordance with current rating Order number PL up to e 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 The components required to set up this example are as follows: Fault A5 N PE A4 N PE E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 N PE SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2T1 4T2 6T3 1) N PE PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 Fail-safe modules Figure 13-5: (cont.) Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits up to PL e / SIL3 This example illustrates the configuration with fail-safe motor starters and the safety group set accordingly. The motor starters can be arranged in any order. They are supplied by a PM-D F PROFIsafe 1) power module. The emergency stop switches are connected to a fail-safe digital input module 1) supplied by a separate PM-E power module. The example shows the circuit for PL e / SIL3. You can use your user program to determine which emergency stop switch affects which safety group(s). See the 'ET 200S Distributed I/O Device for Fail-Safe Modules' manual. 13-25 Fail-safe modules Y22 Y12 Y22 Y12 23 14 13 SG6 SG5 SG4 SG3 SG2 Make sure the wiring is cross-proof! 13 23 14 24 12 22 A2 U2 ext. M 6 13 7 14 L+ U1 ext. M 1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M L+ U2 ext. M S7-300 Master PLC A0 Profibus-DP IM 151-1 24 12 22 ON 14 Y11 EMERGENCY STOP 11 21 Y21 Y34 13 A1 K2 Y33 L+ 13 A1 K1 Y33 L+ SG1 TM-PF30 S47-G1 A0 1 8 2 9 PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 22 16 23 18 25 19 26 20 27 21 28 F-DS1e-x = SG2 F-DS1e-x = SG1 F-RS1e-x = SG1 F-DS1e-x = SG2 PM-D F X1 A4 A3 PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 A5 Terminating module A2 A1 15 K2 K1 3TK2822 Terminating cover A1 ON U2 ext. A2 Y34 M 14 EMERGENCY STOP Y11 11 21 Y21 Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations 3TK2822 13.5.2 Figure 13-6: Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations Safety note A fuse for K1/K2 enabling circuits is not necessary here because the internal fuse of the PM-D F X1 is sufficient in this instance. If other external safety combinations are used, it might be necessary to add a fuse to the enabling circuits to prevent the occurrence of the common mode fault of contact welding of the enabling circuits. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 13-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 N PE 1L1 3L2 5L3 E A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 Fault U E A A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 A E Fault A4 M 3~ U A E Fault A5 M 3~ 1 2 1 3 up to e 1 1 2 PL Description U PM-D F X1 TM-PFX30 S47-G1 External safety combination x in accordance with the connection 3RK1 301-0xB13-0AA2 F-DS1e-x x in accordance with current range 3RK1 903-3AC00 TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed 3RK1 903-3AC10 TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3RK1 301-0xB13-1AA2 F-RS1e-x x in accordance with current rating 3RK1 903-3DA00 3RK1 903-3AE00 3TK2 822-xCB30 Order number The components required to set up this example are as follows: Fault U N PE A3 2T1 4T2 6T3 A2 N PE E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring N PE 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 N PE PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 Fail-safe modules Figure 13-6: (cont.) Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations This example illustrates the configuration with fail-safe motor starters and the safety group set accordingly. The motor starters can be arranged in any order. The motor starter is supplied by a PM-D F X1 power/expansion module. The emergency stop buttons are connected to external safety combinations that switch the U1 voltage to the SG buses. The example shows the circuit for PL e. 13-27 L+ U2 ext. M 1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M S7-300F PLC Master A0 U2 ext. M L+ Profibus-DP IM 151-1 HF PM-E A3 A4 TM-E30 S44-A0 A0-0 TM-PF30 S47-F1 AUX1 U1 ext. M L+ 4 8 2 6 3 7 A6 F-DS1e-x = SG6 F-DS1e-x = SG2 A2 10, 12, 14, 16 9 13 11 15 2, 4, 6, 8 1 5 3 7 L+ U1 ext. M 4 emergency stop circuits for SG1 to SG6 DI7 Vs2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI1 DI2 DI3 Vs1 DI0 20 27 21 28 Profibus-DP IM 151-1 A0-0 PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 A5 PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 A1 EM 4/8 PM-D F PM-D F-DI PROFI F X1 24 VDC safe 1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M TM-P15 S23-A0 A2 TM-PF30 S47-G0 A1 Terminating module Terminating cover 13-28 6 13 7 14 1 8 2 9 22 16 23 18 25 19 26 20 27 21 28 A4 15 F-DS1e-x = SG2 F-DS1e-x = SG3 PM-D F X1 A3 A9 A8 A7 TM-PF30 S47-G1 Terminating module 22 16 23 18 25 19 26 20 27 21 28 A7 15 SG1 to SG6 6 13 7 14 1 8 2 9 13.5.3 Terminating cover A0 Fail-safe modules Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several stations Figure 13-7: Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several substations up to PL e / SIL3 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring N PE 1L1 3L2 5L3 E A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 Fault A5 A E Fault M 3~ U E A Fault A8 M 3~ U E A Fault A9 M 3~ 4 2 2 PM-D F PROFIsafe TM-PF30 S47-F1 PM-E TM-P15 S23-A0 EM 4/8 F-DI DC24V PROFIsafe TM-E30S44-A0 PM-D F X1 TM-PFX30 S47-G0 TM-PFX30 S47-G1 Description U External safety combination x in accordance with the connection 3RK1 301-0xB13-0AA2 F-DS1e-x x in accordance with current range 3RK1 903-3AC00 TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed 3RK1 903-3AC10 TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3TK2 822-xCB30 3RK1 903-3BA01 3RK1 903-3AA00 6ES7 138-4CB10-0AB0 6ES7 193-4CD20-0AA0 6ES7 138-4FA00-0AB0 6ES7 193-4CK20-0AA0 3RK1 903-3DA00 3RK1 903-3AE10 3RK1 903-3AE00 2 Order number PL up to e 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 The components required to set up this example are as follows: U A6 N PE 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 3L2 5L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2T1 4T2 6T3 1) N PE PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 Fail-safe modules Figure 13-7: (cont.) Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several substations up to PL e / SIL3 This example illustrates the configuration with fail-safe motor starters and the safety group set accordingly. The motor starters can be arranged in any order. They are supplied by a PM-D F PROFIsafe 1) power module. The emergency stop switches are connected to a fail-safe digital input module 1) supplied by a separate PM-E power module. Additional ET 200S buses are also supplied by a PM-D F X1. The example shows the circuit for PL e / SIL3. You can use your user program to determine which emergency stop switch affects which safety group(s). See the 'ET 200S Distributed I/O Device for Fail-Safe Modules' manual. 13-29 U2 ext. M L+ S7-300F PLC Master 1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M A0 L+ TM-P15 S23-A0 AUX1 U1 ext. M Profibus-DP IM 151-1 HF PM-E A1 A2 A3 A4 4 8 2 6 3 7 A1 A2 10, 12, 14, 16 9 13 11 15 L+ U1 ext. M 4 emergency stop circuits for SG1 to SG6 DI7 Vs2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI1 DI2 DI3 Vs1 DI0 20 27 21 28 A7 A8 SG3 SG2 SG1 1 8 2 9 4 11 Terminating module 16 23 26 28 12 6 13 7 14 A4 5 F-DS1e-x = SG2 1.1 15 2.1 22 OUT 3.1 25 4.1 27 F-DS1e-x = SG6 A3 PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 A6 F-RS1e-x = SG1 A5 F-DS1e-x = SG2 2, 4, 6, 8 1 5 3 7 EM 4/8 PM-D F F-CM F-DI PROFI 24 VDC safe TM-E30 S44-A0 A0 TM-PF30 S47-F1 13-30 TM-FCM30 S47-E0 2.2 OUT 3.2 4.2 1.2 SG6 SG5 SG4 13.5.4 Terminating cover PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 Fail-safe modules Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator Figure 13-8: Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator up to PL e / SIL3 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 N PE 1L1 3L2 5L3 E A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 Fault U E A A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 A E Fault A7 M 3~ U A E Fault A8 M 3~ 1 2 1 3RK1 903-3BA01 3RK1 903-3AA00 6ES7 138-4CB10-0AB0 6ES7 193-4CD20-0AA0 6ES7 138-4FA00-0AB0 6ES7 193-4CK20-0AA0 3RK1 903-3CA00 3RK1 903-3AB10 3RK1 301-0xB13-0AA2 Description U PM-D F PROFIsafe TM-PF30 S47-F1 PM-E TM-P15 S23-A0 EM 4/8 F-DI DC24V PROFIsafe TM-E30S44-A0 F-CM TM-FCM30 S47-E0 F-DS1e-x x in accordance with current range 3RK1 903-3AC00 TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed 3RK1 903-3AC10 TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3RK1 301-0xB13-1AA2 F-RS1e-x x in accordance with current rating Order number PL up to e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 The components required to set up this example are as follows: Fault U N PE A6 2T1 4T2 6T3 A5 N PE E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring N PE 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 N PE PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 Fail-safe modules Figure 13-8: (cont.) Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator up to PL e / SIL3 Based on the example in 11.4.1, a contact replicator is added to this example in order to achieve fail-safe disconnection of additional enabling circuits. You can determine which safety group (SG) controls the contact replicator using the wire jumper. Safety note Only one of the 6 SG buses can be selected with a jumper on the F-CM. 13-31 U2 ext. M L+ S7-300 PLC 1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M Master A0 F-CM PM-D F X1 U1 ext. M L+ Profibus-DP IM 151-1 A2 A1 6 13 7 14 1 8 2 9 TM-PF30 S47-G1 13-32 A4 F-RS1e-x = SG1 F-DS1e-x = SG2 22 16 23 18 25 19 26 20 27 21 28 U2 ext. M L+ 23 13 A2 13 SG1 24 14 12 22 23 13 24 14 12 22 2.1 OUT 3.1 4.1 1.1 Y22 Y12 Y34 A1 K2 Y33 1 8 2 9 4 11 15 22 25 27 16 23 26 28 12 6 13 7 14 A2 5 3TK2822 3TK2822 Y22 Y12 L+ K2 K1 ON 14 SG2 Y11 EMERGENCY STOP 11 21 Y21 SG3 13 F-DS1e-x = SG2 A6 Terminating module ON U2 ext. A2 M 14 Y11 EMERGENCY STOP 11 21 Y21 Y34 A1 K1 Y33 Make sure the wiring is cross-proof! SG6 SG5 SG4 SG3 SG2 SG1 F-DS1e-x = SG1 A5 PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 A3 PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 A1 15 TM-FCM30 S47-E0 2.2 OUT 3.2 4.2 1.2 SG6 SG5 SG4 13.5.5 Terminating cover A0 Fail-safe modules Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator Figure 13-9: Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator up to PL e SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 N PE 1L1 3L2 5L3 E A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 Fault U E A A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 A E Fault A5 M 3~ U A E Fault A6 M 3~ 1 2 3 up to e 1 1 1 1 2 PL Description U 3RK1 301-0xB13-1AA2 F-RS1e-x x in accordance with current rating 3RK1 903-3AD10 TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed PM-D F X1 TM-PFX30 S47-G1 F-CM TM-FCM30 S47-E0 External safety combination x in accordance with the connection 3RK1 301-0xB13-0AA2 F-DS1e-x x in accordance with current range 3RK1 903-3AC00 TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed 3RK1 903-3AC10 TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3RK1 903-3DA00 3RK1 903-3AE00 3RK1 903-3CA00 3RK1 903-3AB10 3TK2 822-xCB30 Order number The components required to set up this example are as follows: Fault U N PE A4 2T1 4T2 6T3 A3 N PE E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring N PE 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 N PE PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 Fail-safe modules Figure 13-9: (cont.) Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator up to PL e Based on the example in 11.4.2, a contact replicator is added to this example in order to achieve fail-safe disconnection of additional enabling circuits. You can use the wire jumper to set which of the two safety groups (SG1 or SG 2), switched via the external safety combinations, controls the contact replicator. Safety note Only one of the 6 SG buses can be selected with a jumper on the F-CM. 13-33 13-34 PLC U2 ext. M L+ S7-300 1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M DP master A0 AS-i power supply unit U1 ext. M L+ 6 13 7 14 1 8 2 9 Profibus-DP IM 151-1 A0 A3 F-RS1e-x = SG2 A2 F-DS1e-x = SG1 A1 PM-D F X1 22 16 23 18 25 19 26 20 27 21 28 A1 15 SG6 SG5 SG4 SG3 SG2 SG1 F 2.14 2.24 2.23 1.24 1.14 1.Y1 2.13 1.23 1.13 AS-i - AS-i + M L+ A6 1.Y2 Make sure the wiring is cross-proof! U2 ext. M L+ PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 TM-PF30 S47-G1 13 ON 14 F-DS1e-x = SG1 A4 F-DS1e-x = SG2 A5 AS-i Safety Monitor 3RK1105-1BE04-0CA0 A6 EMERGENCY STOP 4 EMERGENCY STOP 3 EMERGENCY STOP 2 EMERGENCY STOP 1 13.5.6 Terminating module Terminating cover PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 Fail-safe modules ET 200S fail-safe motor starter with AS-i Safety at work Figure 13-10: Example with PM-D F X1 power module and AS-i Safety at work up to PL e / SIL3 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 AS-I master N PE 1L1 3L2 5L3 E A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 Fault U E A A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 A E Fault A4 M 3~ U A E Fault A5 M 3~ Order number 3RK1 903-3DA00 3RK1 903-3AE00 3RK1 105-1BE04-0CA0 3RK1 301-0xB13-0AA2 3RK1 903-3AC00 3RK1 903-3AC10 3RK1 301-0xB13-1AA2 3RK1 903-3AD10 PL up to e 1 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 U TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed F-RS1e-x x in accordance with current rating TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed PM-D F X1 TM-PFX30 S47-G1 AS-I Safety Monitor F-DS1e-x x in accordance with current range Description The components required to set up this example are as follows: Fault U N PE A3 2T1 4T2 6T3 A2 N PE E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring N PE 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 N PE PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 Fail-safe modules Figure 13-10: (cont.) Example with PM-D F X1 power module and AS-i Safety at work up to PL e / SIL3 This configuration integrates an AS-i safety monitor in an ET 200S system. The configuration satisfies the requirements of all categories up to category 4/SIL3. It combines the advantages of AS-i Safety at work on the sensor side with the advantages of ET 200S on the actuator side in a way that makes best use of both. Safety note To prevent a common mode fault (contact welding of the enabling circuits) occurring with the AS-i safety monitor, add a 4 A MT fuse. 13-35 13-36 U2 ext. M L+ S7-300 PLC Master 1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M A0 L+ 6 13 7 14 1 8 2 9 22 16 23 18 25 19 26 20 27 21 28 A1 15 SG6 SG5 SG4 SG3 SG2 SG1 F-RS1e-x = SG1 F-DS1e-x = SG2 PM-D F X1 F-DS1e-x = SG6 A4 A2 A1 1 Y35 Y34 K2 Y32 ON 13 Make sure the wiring is cross-proof! 24 14 12 22 28 14 12 22 Y22 Y12 1 3TK2842 3TK2841 Y22 Y12 13 K2 K1 14 Y11 EMERGENCY STOP 11 21 Y21 ON Terminating module A1 14 Y11 EMERGENCY STOP A2 11 21 Y21 Y35 Y34 K1 Y32 PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 A3 A2 A1 U1 ext. M Profibus-DP IM 151-1 A0 TM-PF30 S47-G1 13.5.7 Terminating cover PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 Fail-safe modules Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations Figure 13-11: Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations up to PL e / SIL3 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 N PE E A Fault E A Fault A3 A M 3~ U E A Fault A4 M 3~ 1 1 1 1 1 up to e 1 1 2 PL Description U 3RK1 903-3DA00 PM-D F X1 3RK1 903-3AE00 TM-PF30 S47-G1 3RK1 301-0xB13-0AA2 F-DS1e-x x in accordance with current range 3RK1 903-3AC00 TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed 3RK1 903-3AC10 TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3RK1 301-0xB13-1AA2 F-RS1e-x x in accordance with current rating 3RK1 903-3AD10 TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3RK2 841-1BB40 Electronic safety combination Order number The components required to set up this example are as follows: M 3~ U N PE A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring N PE 1L1 3L2 5L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 N PE PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 Fail-safe modules Figure 13-11: (cont.) Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations up to PL e / SIL3 Note The external safety combinations are also supplied by the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module. 13-37 S7-300 PLC Master Profibus-DP IM 151-1 U2 ext. M L+ 1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M U1 ext. M L+ F-RS1e-x = SG1 F-DS1e-x = SG2 PM-D F X1 A0 A3 6 13 7 14 1 8 2 9 22 16 23 18 25 19 26 20 27 21 28 A1 15 DP coupler S7-300F PLC SG6 SG5 SG4 SG3 SG2 SG1 3 4 6 7 9 10 12 13 15 16 23 24 Master F-DI ET 200M A5 1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M 3L+ 3M 26 27 29 30 32 33 35 36 A5 21 22 17 18 19 20 37 38 39 40 PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 F-DS1e-x = SG6 A4 Terminating module PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 A2 A1 TM-PF30 S47-G1 13.5.8 Terminating cover 13-38 F-DO ET 200M A0 Fail-safe modules ET 200S fail-safe motor starters and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC Figure 13-12: ET 200S fail-safe motor starters and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1 1 1 3RK1 903-3DA00 3RK1 903-3AE00 6ES7 326-1BK00-0AB0 6ES7 326-1BF00-0AB0 3RK1 301-0xB13-0AA2 Description Order number PL up to e 1 1 1 1 2 M 3~ The components required to set up this example are as follows: E A N PE E A 1L1 3L2 5L3 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 Fault U N PE A3 Fault A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 M 3~ E A Fault U N PE A4 2T1 4T2 6T3 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring U N PE PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 PM-D F X1 TM-PF30 S47-G1 F-DI ET 200M F-DO ET 200M F-DS1e-x x in accordance with current range 3RK1 903-3AC00 TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed 3RK1 903-3AC10 TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3RK1 301-0xB13-1AA2 F-RS1e-x x in accordance with current rating Fail-safe modules Figure 13-12: (cont.) ET 200S fail-safe motor starters and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC This example illustrates a configuration with a central safety PLC with local safe inputs and safe outputs that shut down the motor starters safely. The link from the safe inputs to the safe outputs is implemented in the user program on the safety PLC. The standard PLC is responsible for operational switching and motor control and is thus not burdened with lengthy calculations of fail-safe links. See also the S7-300 Programmable Controller, Fail-Safe Signal Modules manual. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-39 L+ U2 ext. M Master A0 L+ U2 ext. M Profibus-DP + PROFIsafe frame 1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M S7-300F PLC IM 151-1 HF 1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M A5 20 27 21 28 L+ U1 ext. M A1 F-DS1e-x = SG6 AUX1 U1 ext. M L+ 4 8 2 6 3 7 A6 10, 12, 14, 16 9 13 11 15 2, 4, 6, 8 1 5 3 7 A7 A5 A6 A7 EM 4/8 F-DI 24 VDC Terminating module 4 emergency stop circu for SG1 to SG6 DI7 Vs2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI1 DI2 DI3 Vs1 DI0 IM 151-1 HF PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 F-RS1e-x = SG1 F-DS1e-x = SG2 PM-D F PROFI safe A4 PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 A3 TM-PF30 S47-F1 A2 Terminating module Terminating cover A1 PM-E 13-40 TM-P15 S23-A0 13.5.9 TM-E30 S44-A0 A0 Fail-safe modules Distributed selective detection of safety signals Figure 13-13: Distributed selective detection of safety signals SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 PM-D F PROFIsafe TM-PF30 S47-F1 PM-E TM-P15 S23-A0 3RK1 903-3BA01 3RK1 903-3AA00 6ES7 138-4CB10-0AB0 6ES7 193-4CD20-0AA0 Description Order number PL M 3~ 1L1 3L2 5L3 N PE E A up to e 1 1 1 1 E A 2T1 4T2 6T3 Fault U N PE A3 Fault A M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 A2 The components required to set up this example are as follows: M 3~ E A Fault A4 U N PE E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring 2T1 4T2 6T3 PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 U N PE 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 6ES7 138-4FA00-0AB0 EM 4/8 F-DI DC24V PROFIsafe 6ES7 193-4CK20-0AA0 TM-E30 S44-A0 3RK1 301-0xB13-0AA2 F-DS1e-x x in accordance with current range 3RK1 903-3AC00 TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed 3RK1 903-3AC10 TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3RK1 301-0xB13-1AA2 F-RS1e-x x in accordance with current rating 3RK1 903-3AD10 TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed Fail-safe modules Figure 13-13: (cont.) Distributed selective detection of safety signals This example describes the distributed selective detection of safety signals and the selective safe shutdown of motor starters. The motor starters can be arranged in any order. They are supplied by a PMD F PROFIsafe 1) power module. The emergency stop switches/position switches/rope-operated switches are connected to a fail-safe digital input module 1) supplied by a separate PM-E power module. The example shows the circuit for PL e / SIL3. The sensors (on the fail-safe digital input module) and the actuators (power module PM-D F PROFIsafe, fail-safe motor starter) are in different ET 200S stations. You can use your user program to determine which emergency stop switch affects which safety group(s). 1) See the 'ET 200S Distributed I/O Device for Fail-Safe Modules' manual. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-41 Fail-safe modules SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters 13-42 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records Section Subject A Page A.1 Data formats A-2 A.2 Error codes A-6 A.3 Data records A-9 A.4 DS68 - Read/write process output images A-11 A.5 DS69 - Read/write process input images A-12 A.6 DS72 Read log book - device errors A-13 A.7 DS73 Read log book - trips A-14 A.8 DS75 Read log book - events A-15 A.9 DS81 Read basic (factory) setting A-17 A.10 DS92 Read device diagnostics A-17 A.11 DS93 Write command A-20 A.12 DS94 Read measurements A-21 A.13 DS95 Read statistics A-22 A.14 DS96 Read slave pointer A-23 A.15 DS 100 Read device identification A-24 A.16 DS131 Read / write device parameters A-25 A.17 DS134 Read / write maintenance A-32 A.18 DS165 Read / write comment A-32 A.19 I&M data A-33 A.19.1 DS231 Read device identification A-33 A.19.2 DS232 Read / write equipment identifier A-34 A.19.3 DS233 Read / write installation A-34 A.19.4 DS234 Read / write description A-34 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-1 Data formats and data records A.1 Data formats Features The motor starter obtains a variety of operating, diagnostic and statistics data. Control data are sent to the motor starter. Control data Data sent to the motor starter, e.g. motor ccw switching command, trip reset, etc. Data format: Bit Messages Data sent from the motor starter and that display the current operating condition, e.g. motor ccw, etc. Data format: Bit Diagnostics Data sent from the motor starter and that display the current operating condition, e.g. overload fault, etc. Data format: Bit SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records Current values Current values are coded in different current formats, in the 6 bit current format, in the 8 bit current format and in the 9 bit current format: 9-bit current format %LW6WURPIRUPDW 8-bit current format %LW6WURPIRUPDW 6-bit current format %LW6WURPIRUPDW %LW ELV ELV ELV Current values are * * * * Motor current Imax (6 bit current format) Phase currents IL1 max, IL2 max, IL3 max (8 bit current format) Last tripping current (9 bit current format) Maximum tripping current (9 bit current format) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-3 Data formats and data records Statistics data on device service life * Operating hours The motor starter records 2 operating hour values: - The operating hours of the motor. This indicates how long the motor was switched on. - The operating hours of the equipment (motor starter). This indicates how long the DC24V-NS supply voltage of the motor starter was switched on. * Number of overload trips The motor starter counts the number of overload trips in the range from 0 to 65.535. * Number of motor cw / ccw starts The motor starter counts the number of starts in the range from 0 to 16,777,215. Example: If the current in the main circuit is flowing after the "Motor ON" command, the value is increased by 1. * Motor current Imax. The motor starter measures the current in all 3 phases and displays the current of the highest loaded phas in percent [%] of the current set Ie. Datenformat: 1 byte, 8 bit current format Example: Current set Ie = 10 A Motor current displayed 110 % then corresponds to 10 A x 1.1 = 11 A All 3 phase currents are available in data record 94 * Last tripping current The motor starter measures the current in all 3 phases and displays the current flowing at the time of tripping in the maximum loaded phase in percent [%] of the current set Ie and in amperes [A] Datenformat: 2 byte, 9 bit current format Example: Current set Ie = 10 A Motor current displayed 455 % then corresponds to 10 A x 4.55 = 45.5 A SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records Statistics data for slave pointer Slave points are used for preventative diagnostics: The maximum measurement is stored on the device. The higher level PLC can obtain the measurement at any time. The higher-level PLC can reset the measurement at any time. The data below are available as slave pointer: * * * * * * * * Number of motor overload trips Operating hours motor current = 18 ... 49.9 % of Ie Operating hours motor current = 50 ... 89.9 % of Ie Operating hours motor current = 90 ... 119.9 % of Ie Operating hours motor current = 120 ... 1000 % of Ie Maximum trip current IA max (%) Maximum trip current IA max (eff) Phase current IL1 max to IL3 max. Maximum phase current as a percentage [%] of current setting Ie and in amperes [A]. Data format: Each 1 byte, 8 bit current format. The maximum phase current measured is saved per phase. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-5 Data formats and data records A.2 Error codes Error codes with negative data record acknowledgement Description When a data record is rejected, an error code is sent with the negative acknowledgement, both via the device interface and via the bus interface. This provides information on the reason for the negative acknowledgement. The error codes conform to the PROFIBUS-DPV1 standard assuming they apply to the motor starter. Evaluation via local device interface with Motor Starter ES The error codes are evaluated by the Motor Starter ES parameterization and diagnostics software and displayed in plain text. More information on this can be found in the Motor Starter ES online help system. Evaluation via field bus The error codes are sent in the field bus response telegram. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records Error codes The following error codes are generated by the motor starter: Byte error codes high 00 H Error message Cause No faults -- low 00 H Communication interface 80 H A1 H Negative acknowledgement with "Write data record" * Data record only readable 80 H A2 H Protocol error * * * Layer 2 (field bus) Device interface Incorred coordination 80 H A9 H Function not supported * DPV1 service does not support read / write data record 80 H B5 H PROFIenergy data record read without prior writing * Invalid status 80 H CF H Incorrect data record * Incorrect coordination with list parameterization via DS128 Incorrect data record sequence with list parameterization via DS128 * Access to technology 80 H B0 H Unknown data record number (DS-Nr) * DS no. in motor starter not known 80 H B1 H Incorrect data record length during writing * DS length and specified DS length do not match 80 H B2 H Incorrect slot number * Slot not 1 or 4 80 H B4 H Incorrect data record length during reading * DS length specified DS length Ask for DS with correct length 80 H B6 H Communication partner has declined the data transfer * Incorrect operating mode (automatic, manual bus, manual local) Data record is only readable Parameter change in ON status not permissible * * 80 H B8 H SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Invalid parameter * Invalid parameter value A-7 Data formats and data records Byte error codes high Error message Cause Temporary resource lack in device * * low Device resources 80 H C2 H * No free reception buffer Data record currently being updated Data record job currently active on another interface SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records A.3 Data records Writing / reading of data records with STEP 7 Note Data sets can only be used for motor starters with article numbers 3RK1301-xxxxx-xAB4! You can access the motor starter data records from the user program. * Writing data records: S7-DPV1 Master: By calling the SFB 53 "WR_REC" or SFC 58 S7-Master: By calling the SFC 58 * Reading data records: S7-DPV1 Master: By calling the SFB 52 "RD_REC" or SFC 59 S7-Master: By calling the SFC 59 Note SFC 58 and 59 cannot be used with PROFINET. These modules only function with PROFIBUS. For PROFINET, modules SFB 52 and 53 should be used. These also function with PROFIBUS. More information Other information on the SFBs can be found * in the reference manual "System software for S7-300 / 400, system and standard functions" * in the STEP 7 online help SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-9 Data formats and data records Byte layouts If data that are longer than a byte are stored, the bytes have the following layouts ("big endian"): Byte layout %\WH$QRUGQXQJ %\WH +LJK%\WH %\WH /RZ%\WH Data type 'DWHQW\S +LJK:RUG Double-word 'RXEOH:RUG %\WH +LJK%\WH %\WH /RZ%\WH /RZ:RUG %\WH +LJK%\WH Word :RUG %\WH /RZ%\WH %\WH %\WH %\WH %\WH Byte %\WH SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records A.4 DS68 - Read/write process output images Note Note that data record 68 in automatic operating mode is overwritten by the cyclical process image! Byte Meaning Header 0 Coordination 1 Reserved 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 0x21 writing via C1 channel (PLC) Process output images 4 Process data DO 0.0 to DO 0.7, bottom table 5 Process data DO 1.0 to DO 1.7, bottom table 6 Reserved 7 Reserved Byte. bit Coding 4.0 1 = active Process data Meaning Relevant for DO 0.0 Motor cw all 4.1 DO 0.1 Motor ccw RS1e-x 4.2 DO 0.2 Brake actuation all 4.3 DO 0.3 Trip Reset all 4.4 DO 0.4 Emergency start all 4.5 DO 0.5 Self-test all 4.6 DO 0.6 -- -- DO 0.7 -- -- DO 1.0 -- -- 5.1 DO 1.1 -- -- 5.2 DO 1.2 -- -- 5.3 DO 1.3 -- -- 5.4 DO 1.4 -- -- 5.5 DO 1.5 -- -- 5.6 DO 1.6 -- -- 5.7 DO 1.7 Quick stop lock all 4.7 5.0 1 = active 1) 3) 1) Only relevant in conjunction with a brake xB1 to xB6 3) Only in conjunction with 2DI COM/2DI LC COM control module (optional) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-11 Data formats and data records A.5 DS69 - Read/write process input images Byte Meaning Process input images 0 Process data DI 0.0 to DI 0.7, bottom table 1 Process data DI 1.0 to DI 1.7, bottom table 2 Reserved 3 Reserved Byte. bit Coding Process data Meaning 0.0 1 = active DI 0.0 Ready (automatic) all 0.1 DI 0.1 Motor on all 0.2 DI 0.2 Group error all 0.3 DI 0.3 General warning 0.4 DI 0.4 Input 1 all 1) 0.5 DI 0.5 Input 2 all 1) 0.6 DI 0.6 Input 3 all 3) 0.7 DI 0.7 Input 4 all 3) DI 1.0 Actual motor current I act [%] bit 0 Actual motor current I act [%] bit 1 all Actual motor current I act [%] bit 2 Actual motor current I act [%] bit 3 all all 1.0 1 = active Relevant for all 1.1 DI 1.1 1.2 DI 1.2 1.3 DI 1.3 1.4 DI 1.4 1.5 DI 1.5 Actual motor current I act [%] bit 4 Actual motor current I act [%] bit 5 1.6 DI 1.6 Manual operation local 1.7 DI 1.7 Ramp operation all all all all 3) DSS1e-x 1) Only relevant in conjunction with a brake xB6 3) Only in conjunction with 2DI COM/2DI LC COM control module (optional) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records A.6 Byte DS72 Read log book - device errors Coding Meaning Value range Increment Net data (= technology data) Entry 1 (= latest entry) 0 ... 3 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s 4 ... 5 Unsign. 16 Object number 0 ... 32,767 1 Entry 2 6 ... 9 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s 10 ... 11 Unsign. 16 Object number 0 ... 32,767 1 120 ... 123 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s 124 ... 125 Unsign. 16 Object number 0 ... 32,767 1 ... ... Entry 21 This data record can take up to 21 inputs. When all positions have been described, the oldest entry is overwritten. Note The most recent entry is entered at the first position in the data record. The remaining entries are moved downwards one entry. The following object numbers are supported: Object no. Device error - Messages 453 Interface for current detection faulty 456 EEPROM: Memory faulty 457 EEPROM: CRC error "Fixed value parameter" 458 EEPROM: CRC error "Device parameter" 460 EEPROM: contains invalid data! 461 EEPROM: Value for "Parameterization lock CPU / master" invalid 462 EEPROM: Pointer for device parameter memory invalid 308 Switching element defective 1414 Switching element shortcircuited SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-13 Data formats and data records A.7 Byte DS73 Read log book - trips Coding Meaning Value range Increment Net data (= technology data) Entry 1 (= latest entry) 0 ... 3 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s 4 ... 5 Unsign. 16 Object number 0 ... 32,767 1 Entry 2 6 ... 9 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s 10 ... 11 Unsign. 16 Object number 0 ... 32,767 1 120 ... 123 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s 124 ... 125 Unsign. 16 Object number 0 ... 32,767 1 ... ... Entry 21 This data record can take up to 21 inputs. When all positions have been described, the oldest entry is overwritten. Note The most recent entry is entered at the first position in the data record. The remaining entries are moved downwards one entry. The following object numbers are supported: Object no. Trips - Messages 309 Overload switching element 317 Electronics power supply too low 318 Switching element power supply missing 327 Thermal motor model overload 333 Circuit-breaker tripped 334 Ie limit value exceeded 335 Ie limit value not reached 338 Zero current shutdown 341 Asymmetry shutdown 348 Input tripping 354 Sensor supply overload 355 Process image error 365 Invalid parameter value 381 Error during self-test (= device error) 1406 Cold run shutdown 1201 Blocking protection triggered during startup 1202 Blocking protection triggered during operation SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records A.8 Byte DS75 Read log book - events Coding Meaning Value range Increment Net data (= technology data) Entry 1 (= latest entry) 0 ... 3 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s 4 ... 5 Unsign. 16 Object number 0 ... 32,767 1 Entry 2 6 ... 9 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s 10 ... 11 Unsign. 16 Object number 0 ... 32,767 1 120 ... 123 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s 124 ... 125 Unsign. 16 Object number 0 ... 32,767 1 ... ... Entry 21 This data record can take up to 21 inputs. When all positions have been described, the oldest entry is overwritten. Note The most recent entry is entered at the first position in the data record. The remaining entries are moved downwards one entry. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-15 Data formats and data records The following object numbers are supported: Object no. Event - Messages Advance warnings 1419 prewarning limit - time-based trigger reserve not reached 1420 prewarning limit - motor heating exceeded 1457 maintenance required Warnings 327 Thermal motor model overload 333 Power switch triggered 334 Ie limit value not reached Ie limit value exceeded 335 337 Zero curernt detected 340 Asymmetry detected 351 Warning input 318 Switching element power supply missing 1458 Maintenance required Actions 310 Emergency start active 357 Automatic operating mode 358 Manual operating mode - bus 1443 Manual bus - PC controlling 359 Manual operation local 1444 Manual local - input controlling 1446 Manual local - PC controlling 360 Lost connection in manual operating mode 363 Slave pointer deleted 365 Invalid parameter value 366 Parameter change in ON status not permissible 368 Parameterization lock CPU/Master active 369 Factory setting restored 1302 Log book - trips cleared 1303 Log book - events cleared 1520 Energy-saving mode active : Event is entered as an "incoming" (+) and "outgoing" (-) event, other messages are only entered as "incoming" messages SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records A.9 DS81 Read basic (factory) setting In layout and content, data record 81 matches data record 131. Data record 81 provides the default values for all parameters of DS131. A.10 DS92 Read device diagnostics Byte.bit Coding Meaning Relevant (X) for DS1e-x / RS1e-x DSS1e-x Ready (automatic) X X 0.1 Motor cw X X 0.2 Motor ccw only RS1e-x -- 0.3 Overload switching element X X 0.4 Switching element defective X X 0.5 Emergency start active X X 0.6 Group error X X 0.7 General warning X X Switching element power supply missing X X only RS1e-x -- 0.0 1.0 1 = active 1 = active 1.2 Interlock active 1.3 Startup active -- X 1.4 Run-down active -- X Brake output active X X Thermal motor model overload X X 2.4 Overload shutdown X X 2.5 Pause time active X X Cooldown time active X X Circuit-breaker tripped X X 3.7 Input control X X 4.0 Asymmetry detected X X 4.1 Asymmetry shutdown X X 4.2 Ie limit value exceeded X X 4.3 Ie limit value not reached X X 4.4 Ie limit value shutdown X X 4.5 Residual current detected X X 4.6 Zero current shutdown X X 4.7 Motor blocking shutdown X X Input 1 X X 5.1 Input 2 X X 5.2 Input 3 X X 5.3 Input 4 X X 1.5 2.3 1 = active 2.6 3.2 5.0 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1 = active 1 = active A-17 Data formats and data records Byte.bit Coding Meaning Relevant (X) for DS1e-x / RS1e-x DSS1e-x Input tripping X X Shutdown input at limit position, clockwise rotation X X 5.6 Warning input X X 5.7 Shutdown input at limit position, counterclockwise rotation X X 5.4 1 = active 5.5 Sensor supply overload X X 6.4 Trip reset completed X X 6.5 Trip reset not possible X X 6.6 Slave pointer deleted X X 6.7 Electronics power supply too low X X 6.3 1 = active Bus fault X X 7.1 CPU/master STOP X X 7.2 Automatic operating mode X X 7.3 Manual bus operating mode (remote control) X X 7.4 Manual local operating mode (local control) X X 7.6 Lost connection in manual operating mode X X 7.7 Process image error X X 7.0 1 = active Parameterization active X X 8.1 Invalid parameter value X X 8.2 Parameter change in ON status not permissible X X 8.3 Parameterization lock CPU / Master active X X 8.4 No external startup arameter er hold X X Self-test active X X 9.1 Self-test ok X X 9.2 Error during self-test X X 9.3 Factory setting restored X X 10 Object no. (low byte) (= incorrect parameter name) X X 8.0 9.0 1 = active 1 = active 11 0x00 Object no. (high byte) X X 18.0 1 = active BO output active X X SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records Byte.bit Coding Meaning Relevant (X) for DS1e-x / RS1e-x DSS1e-x Switching / controlling Start-ready for motor on X X Switching element shortcircuited X X Automatic operating mode (redundant to bits 7.2) X X 22.1 Manual bus operating mode (redundant to bits 7.3) X X 22.2 Manual bus - PC controlling X X 22.3 Manual local operating mode (redundant to bits 7.4) X X 22.4 Manual local - input controlling X X 22.6 Manual local - PC controlling X X 19.1 1 = active 19.2 Communication 22.0 1 = active Advance warnings Group prewarning X X 24.2 Advance warning limit - timebased trigger reserve not reached X X 24.3 Advance warning limit - motor heating exceeded X X 24.0 1 = active Maintenance 26.0 1 = active 26.1 27.0 27.1 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1 = active Maintenance required X X Maintenance request X X Maintenance timer limit value_1 exceeded X X Maintenance timer limit value_2 exceeded X X A-19 Data formats and data records A.11 DS93 Write command Structure of the command data record: Byte Meaning Note Command data record Header 0 Coordination 1 Reserved 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 0x21 writing via C1 channel (PLC) Command 4 No. of commands Value range 1 ... 5 Number of subsequent valid commands 5 Command 1 coding, see table below 6 Command 2 optional (coding, see table below) 7 Command 3 optional (coding, see table below) 8 Command 4 optional (coding, see table below) 9 Command 5 optional (coding, see table below) Write command Object no. Coding Command Meaning 0 0 Reserved no function 703 1 Trip Reset Reset and acknowledgement of error messages 713 2 Emergency start ON -- 714 3 709 4 Automatic operating mode Transfer to automatic operating mode (control via DP master) 5 Operating mode - Manual - Bus - On-site Transfer to manual operating mode. In the process, the motor starter switches over in manual bus operating mode or manual local operating mode, depending on the interface via which the command is received. 701 6 Factory setting Restore factory setting of the parameters from DS131. (Only possible in "Manual" operating mode.) 704 7 Clear slave pointer The measurements for preventative diagnostics are cleared (= 0). 702 9 Re-start Trigger re-start (as after mains ON), e. g. nach re-assignment of the station address. (Only possible in "Manual" operating mode.) 707 10 Parameterization lock CPU / Master ON No parameterization possible via parameterizing master, or its parameters will be ignored 708 11 Parameterization lock CPU / Master OFF Parameterization possible via parameterizing master 1-byte commands 710 711 712 Emergency start OFF -- SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records Object no. Coding Command Meaning 705 13 Clear log book trips Clear log book with recorded causes of error. 706 14 Clear log book events Clear log book with recorded warning messages and specific actions. 717 15 Cold run ON Permits the activation of the switching contacts without main energy 718 16 Cold run OFF Switches the "cold run" function off 719 17 Clear maintenance timer Clears the timer for the maintenance function 18 ... 255 Reserved 1-byte commands A.12 DS94 Read measurements Byte. bit Meaning Value range / [coding] Increment Relevant for 0 Phase current IL1(%) 0 ... 797 % 3.125 % all 1 Phase current IL2(%) 0 ... 797 % 3.125 % all 2 Phase current IL3(%) 0 ... 797 % 3.125 % all 4 ... 5 Remaining cooldown time of the motor 0 ... 30 min 100 ms all 6.0 ... 6 Motor heating 0 ... 200 % / [0 ... 100] 2% all 6.7 Asymmetry [0]: No asymmetry [1]: Asymmetry ( 40 %) -- all 7 Value for asymmetry 0 ... 100 % / [0 ... 100] 1% all 28 ... 31 Phase current IL1(eff) 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A all 32 ... 35 Phase current IL2(eff) 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A all 36 ... 39 Phase current IL3(eff) 0 ... 20 A] 0.01 A all 46 ... 47 Time-based triggering of the thermal motor model 0 ... 6.500 s 0.1 s all Measurements (= volatile!) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-21 Data formats and data records A.13 DS95 Read statistics Byte Meaning Value range / [coding] Increment Relevant for 0 Motor current Imax 0 ... 797 % 3.125 % all 1 Reserved -- -- -- 2 ... 3 Last trigger current 0 ... 1000 % 3.125 % all 4 ... 7 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s all 8 ... 11 No. of starts, motor cw 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 12 ... 15 No. of starts, motor ccw 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 16 ... 17 Number of overload trips 0 ... 65535 1 all 20 ... 23 Motor current Imax(eff) 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A all 24 ... 27 Last trip current IA(eff) 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A all 28 ... 31 Operating hours motor 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s all 32 ... 35 Operating hours motor current = 18 ... 49.9 % x Iemax 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s all 36 ... 39 Operating hours motor current = 50 ... 89.9% x Iemax 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s all 40 ... 43 Operating hours motor current = 90 ... 119.9 % x Iemax 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s all 44 ... 47 Operating hours motor current = 120 ... 1000% x Iemax 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s all 50 ... 51 Number of switching element overload trips 0 ... 65,535 1 all 54 ... 55 No. of short-circuit trips 0 ... 65,535 1 all 56 ... 59 No. of stops with mechanical braking 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 all 80 ... 83 No. of starts output BO 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 all 84 ... 87 Maintenance timer 0...4.294.967.295 s 1s all all only RS1ex Operating hours The motor starter records 2 operating hours values: The operating hours of the motor indicate how long the switching elements and therefore the motor were switched on. The operating hours of the equipment (motor starter) indicate how long the DC24V-NS supply voltage of the motor starter was switched on. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records A.14 DS96 Read slave pointer The slave pointers store the extreme values of individual measurements in the time sequence. Slave pointers can be cleared or reset to "0" by the user using the "Clear slave pointer" command. Statistics data on preventative diagnostics (slave pointer) Byte Slave pointer Value range / [coding] Increment 0 Reserved no function 1 Reserved no function 2 Reserved no function 3 Reserved no function 4 Phase current IL1 min(%) 0 ... 796.9 % 5 Phase current IL2 min(%) 0 ... 796.9 % 3.125 % 6 Phase current IL3 min(%) 0 ... 796.9 % 3.125 % 8 Phase current IL1 max(%) 0 ... 796.9 % 3.125 % 9 Phase current IL2 max(%) 0 ... 796.9 % 3.125 % 3.125 % 10 Phase current IL3 max(%) 0 ... 796.9 % 3.125 % 12 ... 13 Maximum trip current IA max(%) 0 ... 1,000 % 3.125 % 14 ... 15 Number of motor overload trips 0 ... 65,535 1 16 ... 19 Maximum trip current IA max(eff) 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A 20 ... 23 Phase current IL1 min(eff) 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A 24 ... 27 Phase current IL2 min(eff) 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A 28 ... 31 Phase current IL3 min(eff) 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A 32 ... 35 Phase current IL1 max(eff) 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A 36 ... 39 Phase current IL2 max(eff) 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A 40 ... 43 Phase current IL3 max(eff) 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A 64 ... 67 Operating hours - motor current = 18 ... 49.9 % x Ie 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s 68 ... 71 Operating hours - motor current = 50 ... 89.9 % x Ie 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s 72 ... 75 Operating hours - motor current = 50 ... 119.9 % x Ie 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s 76 ... 79 Operating hours - motor current = 120 ... 1000 % x Ie 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1s SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-23 Data formats and data records A.15 DS 100 Read device identification Byte Length Value Meaning Header 0 ... 3 4 0x00 Reserved Device identification (TF) Time stamp1) 4 ... 11 8 ... 12 ... 31 20 Siemens AG Manufacturer 32 ... 55 24 -- MLFB 56 1 0x01 Device range: load branch 57 1 0x01 Device sub-range: Motor starters 58 1 0x01 0x02 0x03 Device class: e. g. direct starter/reversing starter/direct soft starter 59 1 0x48 System: PROFIBUS 60 1 0x4B Functional group 61 1 0x00 Reserved 62 ... 77 16 -- Product code 78 ... 81 4 E ... Hardware verion 82 1 DS1e-x 0x01 RS1e-x 0x11 DSS1e-x 0x21 ID number (Byte0) 83 1 0x00 ID number (Byte1) 84 1 0x00 ID number (Byte2) 85 1 0x00 ID number (Byte3) 88 ... 95 8 ... Service number 96 ... 99 4 V ... Firmware version 1) Time stamp: Time of the factory initialization with basic factory settings, see table below Object name id_date Object length 8 bytes Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 2 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 3 res res 25 24 23 22 21 20 0 to 59 minutes res 24 23 22 21 20 0 to 23 hours SU: 0: Normal time, 1: Summer time Octet 4 SU res Day of the week 5 6 22 21 res res 7 res 2 6 8 res res Day of the month 0 to 59 999 milliseconds 1 to 7; 1 = Monday, 7= Sunday 20 24 23 22 21 20 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 0 1 to 12 months 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 0 0 to 99 years; 0 = 2000 res res res res res res 1 to 31 Reserved SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records A.16 DS131 Read / write device parameters Complete data records can be exchanged with the system via the acyclical channel (PROFIBUS) and the NRT channel (PROFINET) during ongoing operation. It is advisable that you first export data record 131 with the current parameters from the motor starter, change the relevant parameters and then write them back to the motor starter. DS131 Byte Parameters Value range Increment 0 Coordination with startup parameterization: 0x20 writing via C1 channel (PLC) default Relevant for with parameterization in operation: 0x21 writing via C1 channel (PLC) 1...3 Reserved not used 4...7 Devicefunctions_2 Content MLFB-specific 8...11 Devicefunctions_1 14 and 15 Rated operating current Ie A 0.15 ... 2.0 A [0] 10 mA 0.151) / 2.02) 1.5 ... 12 A 1.51) / 12.02) all starters 16.0 Load type [0] 3-phase motor [1] 1-phase motor [0] DS1e-x RS1e-x 16.1 Non-resetting on voltage failure [0] No [1] Yes [1] all starters 17 Prewarning limit value - motor heating 0 ... 95%; 0 = deactivated [0] all starters 18 Response with overload Thermal motor model [0] shutdown without re-start [1] shutdown with restart [2] Warning [0] all starters 19 Tripping class (2 A, 12 A) 0] CLASS 10 [1] CLASS 20 [3] CLASS 5 (10a) [4] CLASS 15 [15] CLASS OFF 5, (10a) 10, 15, 20 CLASS OFF [0] all starters 20 Recovery time 1min ... 30min 0.5min [3] all starters 21 Idle time 0s ... 255s; 0 = deactivated 1s [0] all starters 22 ... 23 Prewarning limit - time trip reserve 0s ... 500s; 0 = deactivated 1s [0] all starters 1) 2) 5% Configuring using GSD / HSP Device factory setting SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-25 Data formats and data records DS131 Byte Parameters Value range 24.0 ... 24.1 Response on overload - temperature sensor 24.4 ... 24.6 Increment default Relevant for [0] shutdown without re-start [1] shutdown with restart [2] Warning [0] all starters Temperature sensor [0] deactivated [1] thermoclick [2] PTC type A [0] all starters 24.7 Temperature sensor monitoring [0] No [1] Yes [1] all starters 28 Lower current limit [6-32] 18.75%...100% [0] deactivated 3.125% 18.75% all starters 29 Upper current limit [16-128] 50%... 400% [0] deactivated 3.125 % 112.5% all starters 30 Blocking current 150% ... 1000% 50% [16] all starters 150%...800% 32.0 ... 32.3 Blocking time 1s ... 5s 32.4 ... 32.5 Response with supply voltage switching elements missing 32.6 DSS1e-x 0.5s [2] all starters [0] Group error [1] Group error only with ON command [2] Group warning [0] all starters Response to current limit violation [0] Warning [1] Shutdown [0] all starters 32.7 Response to residual current detection [0] Warning [1] Shutdown [1] all starters 33.0 ... 33.1 Response with power switch OFF [0] Group error [1] Group error only with ON command [2] Group warning [0] all starters 34.0...2 Asymmetrical limit value 30% ... 60% [0] deactivated [3] all starters 34.6 Response to asymmetry [0] Warning [1] Shutdown [1] all starters 36 Interlock time 0s - 60 s Note: Lock time = 0 means a min. time of approx. 150 ms for safety reasons! 1s [0] RS1e-x 37 Input signal extension 0ms - 200ms 10ms [0] all starters 38.0 ... 38.2 Input signal delay 10ms - 80ms 10ms 10ms all starters 10% SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records DS131 Byte Parameters Value range Increment default Relevant for 38.4 Input 1 - level [0] NC contact [1] NO contact -- [1] all starters 38.5 Input 2 - level [0] NC contact [1] NO contact -- [1] all starters 38.6 Input 3 - level [0] NC contact [1] NO contact -- [1] all starters 38.7 Input 4 - level [0] NC contact [1] NO contact 39.0 ... 39.3 Input 1 - action NO contact / NC tactr NO contact / NC tactr NO contact / NC tactr NO contact / NC tactr conconconcon- NO contact / NC contactr NO contact / NC contactr NO NO NO NO contact / NC contactr NO NO 39.4 ... 39.7 Input 2 - action NO contact / NC tactr NO contact / NC tactr NO contact / NC tactr NO contact / NC tactr conconconcon- NO contact / NC contactr NO contact / NC contactr NO NO NO NO contact / NC contactr NO NO SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 [0] no action [1] Shutdown without re-start [2] Shutdown with re-start [3] Shutdown end position clockwise [4] Shutdown end position counterclockwise [5] Group warning all starters -- [0] all starters -- [0] all starters [6] Manual operation local [7] Emergency start [8] Motor cw [9] Motor ccw (with RS only) [11] Quick stop [12] Trip reset [13] Cold run [0] no action [1] Shutdown without re-start [2] Shutdown with re-start [3] Shutdown end position clockwise [4] Shutdown end position counterclockwise [5] Group warning [6] Manual operation local [7] Emergency start [8] Motor cw [9] Motor ccw (with RS only) [11] Quick stop [12] Trip reset [13] Cold run A-27 Data formats and data records DS131 Byte Parameters 40.0 ... 40.3 Input 3 - action NO contact / NC tactr NO contact / NC tactr NO contact / NC tactr NO contact / NC tactr conconconcon- NO contact / NC contactr NO contact / NC contactr NO NO NO NO contact / NC contactr NO NO 40.4 ... 40.7 Input 4 - action NO contact / NC tactr NO contact / NC tactr NO contact / NC tactr NO contact / NC tactr conconconcon- NO contact / NC contactr NO contact / NC contactr NO NO NO NO contact / NC contactr NO NO Value range Increment default Relevant for [0] no action [1] Shutdown without re-start [2] Shutdown with re-start [3] Shutdown end position clockwise [4] Shutdown end position counterclockwise [5] Group warning -- [0] all starters -- [1] all starters [6] Manual operation local [7] Emergency start [8] Motor cw [9] Motor ccw (with RS only) [11] Quick stop [12] Trip reset [13] Cold run [0] no action [1] Shutdown without re-start [2] Shutdown with re-start [3] Shutdown end position clockwise [4] Shutdown end position counterclockwise [5] Group warning [6] Manual operation local [7] Emergency start [8] Motor cw [9] Motor ccw (with RS only) [11] Quick stop [12] Trip reset [13] Cold run 41.0 Input 1 - signal [0] non-retentive / [1] retentive [0] all starters 41.1 Input 2 - signal [0] non-retentive / [1] retentive [0] all starters 41.2 Input 3 - signal [0] non-retentive / [1] retentive [0] all starters 41.3 Input 4 - signal [0] non-retentive / [1] retentive [0] all starters 46 starting time 0 ... 30 s [0] minimum ramp (100 ms) 5s [20] DS1e-x RS1e-x 0.25 s SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records DS131 Byte Parameters Value range Increment default Relevant for 47 Coasting down time 0 ... 30 s [0] function deactivated 0.25 s [0s] DS1e-x RS1e-x 48 starting voltage 20 ... 100 % [4 ... 20] 5% [40%] DS1e-x RS1e-x 49 Stop voltage 20 ... 90 % [4 ... 18] 5% [40%] DS1e-x RS1e-x 50 Current limiting value 125 ... 600 % Where Ie 9 A 125 % ... 50 % 3.125% [600%] DS1e-x RS1e-x 51.0 ... 51.3 Startup mode [0] direct [1] voltage ramp [4] current limit [5] voltage ramp + current limit [0] DS1e-x RS1e-x 51.4 ... 51.7 Ramp-down mode [0] free ramp-down [1] voltage ramp [0] DS1e-x RS1e-x 52 ... 53 Replacement value see POI [0] all starters 56.6 Group diagnosis [0] lock [1] enable [0] all starters 56.7 Response to CPU/ master STOP [0] Switch replacement value [1] Retain last value [0] all starters 58 ... 59 Enable delay of the brake when starting - 2.5s...2.5s 0.01s 0s all starters 60 ... 61 Holding time of the brake when stopping 0...25s 0.01s 0s all starters 73 reserved (for input level) 93.0 ... 93.1 Output 1 - level [0]: not inverted [1]: inverted [2 ... 3]: Reserved [0] 93.2 ... 93.3 Output 2 - level [0]: not inverted [1]: inverted [2 ... 3]: Reserved [0] 94.0 ... 94.3 Output 1 - level [0]: steady [1]: flashing [6 ... 15]: Reserved [0] 94.4 ... 94.7 Output 2 - level [0]: steady [1]: flashing [6 ... 15]: Reserved [0] SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-29 Data formats and data records DS131 Byte Parameters Value range 96 Output 1 - action [00]: No action Increment default Relevant for [0] all starters all starters all starters all starters all starters all starters all starters all starters DS1e-x RS1e-x DS1e-x RS1e-x DS1e-x RS1e-x all starters all starters [01]: Control source POI DO 1.0 [02]: Control source POI DO 1.1 [03]: Control source POI DO 0.2 [06]: Control source input 1 [07]: Control source input 2 [08]: Control source input 3 [09]: Control source input 4 [10]: Ramping up [11]: Operation / jumper [12]: Ramp-down [13]: Duty cycle (RUN) [14]: Control command "motor ON" (ON) [17]: Brake output all starters all starters all starters all starters all starters all starters all starters all starters all starters all starters [18]: Device ON [30]: Group prewarning [31]: General warning [32]: Group error [33]: Bus fault [34]: Device fault [35]: Maintenance required [36]: Maintenance request [38]: Start-ready for motor on 97 Output 2 - action [00]: No action [01]: Control source POI DO 1.0 [02]: Control source POI DO 1.1 [03]: ...[38]: see byte 96 [0] all starters all starters all starters SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records DS131 Byte Parameters Value range 137.0 ... 137.3 Plug monitoring 137.4 ... 137.7 Response to plug removed MLFB Increment default Relevant for [0]: deactivated [1]: supply-side [0] all starters [0]: Group error [1]: Group error only for ON command [2]: General warning [0] all starters Device function_2 Device function_1 Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 3RK1301-0AB10-0AB4 DS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB8 0x08 0x4C 3RK1301-0AB10-1AB4 RS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB9 0x08 0x4C 3RK1301-0AB20-0AB4 DSS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB8 0x08 0x4C 3RK1301-0BB10-0AB4 DS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB8 0x08 0x4C 3RK1301-0BB10-1AB4 RS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB9 0x08 0x4C 3RK1301-0BB20-0AB4 DSS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB8 0x08 0x4C 3RK1301-0CB10-0AB4 DS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB8 0x08 0x4C 3RK1301-0CB10-1AB4 RS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB9 0x08 0x4C 3RK1301-0CB20-0AB4 DSS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB8 0x08 0x4C SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-31 Data formats and data records A.17 DS134 Read / write maintenance Byte Parameters Value range Increment Factory setting Header 0 Coordination with startup parameterization: 0x20 writing via C1 channel (PLC) with parameterization in operation: 0x21 writing via C1 channel (PLC) 1 ... 7 Reserved User data A.18 8 ... 11 Maintenance timer-Warning limit value_1 0 ... 4.294.967.295 s 1s 946.080.000 (30 years) 12 ... 15 Maintenance timer-Warning limit value_2 0 ... 4.294.967.295 s 1s 946.080.000 (30 years) 16 ... 27 Reserved DS165 Read / write comment Components in a system are assigned a unique identifier by the user during the system configuration that provides information on the installation location and the usage type. The individual components are then assigned the corresponding identification sign local. Byte Parameters Value range Increment Factory setting Header 0 Coordination with startup parameterization: 0x20 writing via C1 channel (PLC) with parameterization in operation: 0x21 writing via C1 channel (PLC) 1 ... 3 4 ... 199 Reserved not used [0] ASCII SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Data formats and data records A.19 I&M data The following I&M (Identification & Maintenance Function) data are supported by all ET200S1) motor starters: Number Name Note I&M 0 Device identification Stored by the manufacturer I&M 1 Equipment identification I&M 2 Installation I&M 3 Description entered into the hardware config by the user during the configuration process via the device properties screen 1) from order number suffix: -.AB4 A.19.1 DS231 Read device identification I&M 0 The following data are prepared in data record 231: Byte Coding Meaning Note I&M header 0 ... 9 0x00 Reserved = 0 -- I&M0 - data block 0 10 ... 11 0x002A MANUFACTURER_ID 42 = m anufacturer name SIEMENS 12 ... 31 ORDER_ID Order number (MLFB ) 32 ... 47 SERIAL_NUMBER Serial number 48 ... 49 HARDWARE-REVISION Hardware revision status or product version 50 ... 53 SOFTWARE_REVISION Firmware version 54 ... 55 0x0000 REV_COUNTER Not supported 56 ... 57 0x5E10 PROFILE_ID Device range: Motor starters 58 ... 59 DS1e-x 0x1011 RS1e-x 0x1012 DSS1e-x 0x1013 PROFILE_SPECIFIC_ TYPE Addition to object "PROFILE_ID" 60 ... 61 0x0101 IM_VERSION I&M version status (01 01hex = version 1.1). 62 ... 63 0x000E IM_SUPPORTED supports I&M1, I&M2, I&M3 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-33 Data formats and data records A.19.2 DS232 Read / write equipment identifier I&M 1 The following data are saved in data record 232: Byte Coding Meaning Note I&M header 0 ... 9 0x00 Reserved -- I&M - data block 1 A.19.3 10 ... 41 ASCII TAG-FUNCTION System identifier fill unused positions with blank (ASCII = 0x20) 42 ... 63 ASCII TAG-LOCATION Location identifier fill unused positions with blank (0x20) DS233 Read / write installation I&M 2 The following data are saved in data record 233: Byte Coding Meaning Note 0 ... 9 0x00 Reserved 10 ... 25 ASCII INSTALLATION_DATE Installation date 26 ... 63 0x00 Reserved -- I&M header -- I&M - data block 2 A.19.4 DS234 Read / write description I&M 3 The following data are saved in data record 234: Byte Coding Meaning 0 ... 9 0x00 Reserved Note I&M header -- I&M - data block 3 10 ... 63 ASCII DESCRIPTOR custom additional information and notes fill unused positions with blank (0x20) SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters A-34 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 B Order numbers Section Subject Page B.1 Motor starters B-2 B.1.1 ET 200S DS1-x direct starter; standard / ET 200S RS1-x reversing starter; standard B-2 B.1.2 ET 200S High Feature motor starters for Motor Starter ES B-3 B.1.3 ET 200S fail-safe motor starters with electronic overload protection (F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) B-3 B.2 Components for ET 200S motor starters B-4 B.3 Components for the safety-integrated system (local safety) B-6 B.4 Components for expansion modules B-7 B.5 Fail-safe components (PM-D F PROFIsafe, PM-D F X1) B-7 B.6 Manuals for ET 200S distributed I/O system B-8 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 B-1 B.1 Motor starters B.1.1 ET 200S DS1-x direct starter; standard / ET 200S RS1-x reversing starter; standard Adjustment range Order number kW A Direct starter (DS1-x) Reversing starter (RS1-x) < 0.06 0.14 - 0.20 3RK1301-0BB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0BB00- 1AA2 0.06 0.18 - 0.25 3RK1301-0CB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0CB00- 1AA2 0.09 0.22 - 0.32 3RK1301-0DB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0DB00- 1AA2 0.10 0.28 - 0.40 3RK1301-0EB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0EB00- 1AA2 0.12 0.35 - 0.50 3RK1301-0FB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0FB00- 1AA2 0.18 0.45 - 0.63 3RK1301-0GB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0GB00- 1AA2 0.21 0.55 - 0.80 3RK1301-0HB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0HB00- 1AA2 0.25 0.70 - 1.00 3RK1301-0JB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0JB00- 1AA2 0.37 0.90 - 1.25 3RK1301-0KB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0KB00- 1AA2 0.55 1.10 - 1.60 3RK1301-1AB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1AB00- 1AA2 0.75 1.40 - 2.00 3RK1301-1BB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1BB00- 1AA2 0.90 1.80 - 2.50 3RK1301-1CB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1CB00- 1AA2 1.10 2.20 - 3.20 3RK1301-1DB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1DB00- 1AA2 1.50 2.80 - 4.00 3RK1301-1EB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1EB00- 1AA2 1.90 3.50 - 5.00 3RK1301-1FB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1FB00- 1AA2 2.20 4.50 - 6.30 3RK1301-1GB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1GB00- 1AA2 3.00 5.50 - 8.0 3RK1301-1HB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1HB00- 1AA2 4.00 7.00 - 10.0 3RK1301-1JB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1JB00- 1AA2 5.50 9.00 - 12.0 3RK1301-1KB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1KB00- 1AA2 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters B-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 B.1.2 ET 200S High Feature motor starters for Motor Starter ES The following motor starters are suitable for the "Motor Starter ES" software as of V2.0 Adjustment range Order number kW A Direct starter (DS1e-x) Direct soft starter (DSS1e-x) Reversing starter (RS1e-x) < 1.1 0.3 - 3 3RK1301-0AB10- 0AA3 3RK1301-0AB20- 0AA3 3RK1301-0AB10- 1AA3 3 2.4 - 8 3RK1301-0BB10- 0AA3 3RK1301-0BB20- 0AA3 3RK1301-0BB10- 1AA3 7.5 2.4 - 16 3RK1301-0CB10- 0AA3 3RK1301-0CB20- 0AA3 3RK1301-0CB10- 1AA3 New design with expanded parameterization (see Section 10.6, 'Tripping class') < 1.1 0.3 - 3 3RK1301-0AB10- 0AA4 3RK1301-0AB20- 0AA4 3RK1301-0AB10- 1AA4 3 2.4 - 8 3RK1301-0BB10- 0AA4 3RK1301-0BB20- 0AA4 3RK1301-0BB10- 1AA4 7.5 2.4 - 16 3RK1301-0CB10- 0AA4 3RK1301-0CB20- 0AA4 3RK1301-0CB10- 1AA4 New design with new functions and extended parameterizations and DPV1 functionality (see Section 10.1, 'Functions - Overview') < 1.1 0.3 - 3 3RK1301-0AB10- 0AB4 3RK1301-0AB20- 0AB4 3RK1301-0AB10- 1AB4 3 2.4 - 8 3RK1301-0BB10- 0AB4 3RK1301-0BB20- 0AB4 3RK1301-0BB10- 1AB4 7.5 2.4 - 16 3RK1301-0CB10- 0AB4 3RK1301-0CB20- 0AB4 3RK1301-0CB10- 1AB4 B.1.3 ET 200S fail-safe motor starters with electronic overload protection (F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) Suitable for the "Motor Starter ES" software Adjustment range Order number Fail-safe direct starter (F-DS1e-x) Fail-safe reversing starter (F-RS1e-x) kW A < 1.1 0.3 - 3 3RK1301-0AB13- 0AA2 3RK1301-0AB13- 1AA2 3 2.4 - 8 3RK1301-0BB13- 0AA2 3RK1301-0BB13- 1AA2 7.5 2.4 - 16 3RK1301-0CB13- 0AA2 3RK1301-0CB13- 1AA2 New design with expanded parameterization (see Section 10.6, 'Tripping class') < 1.1 0.3 - 3 3RK1301-0AB13- 0AA4 3RK1301-0AB13- 1AA4 3 2.4 - 8 3RK1301-0BB13- 0AA4 3RK1301-0BB13- 1AA4 7.5 2.4 - 16 3RK1301-0CB13- 0AA4 3RK1301-0CB13- 1AA4 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 B-3 B.2 Components for ET 200S motor starters Description Model Order number Power module PM-D for direct and reversing starters 3RK1903-0BA00 Terminal modules TM-P15 S27-01 for the PM-D power module with terminating cover 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-DS45-S32 for DS1-x, with power bus infeed, with caps 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45-S31 for DS1-x, with power bus throughfeed 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-RS90-S32 for RS1-x, with power bus infeed, with caps 3RK1903-0AC00 TM-RS90-S31 for RS1-x, with power bus throughfeed 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-DS65-S32 -01 FS L for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x, with power bus infeed, with caps 3RK1903-0AK00 TM-DS65-S31 -01 S for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x, with power bus throughfeed 3RK1903-0AK10 TM-RS130-S32 -01 FS L for RS1e-x, with power bus infeed, with caps 3RK1903-0AL00 TM-RS130-S31 -01 S for RS1e-x, with power bus throughfeed 3RK1903-0AL10 TM-FDS65-S32 -01 FS L for F-DS1e-x, with power bus infeed, with caps 3RK1903-3AC00 TM-FDS65-S31 -01 S for F-DS1e-x, with power bus throughfeed 3RK1903-3AC10 TM-FRS130-S32 -01 FS L for F-RS1e-x, with power bus infeed, with caps 3RK1903-3AD00 TM-FRS130-S31 -01 S for F-RS1e-x, with power bus throughfeed 3RK1903-3AD10 Spacing module DM-V15 for installing direct starters with derating 3RK1903-0CD00 Accessories Caps 3RK1903-0AF00 Terminal block L1/L2/L3 30 mm, jumper module 3RK1903-0AF00 L1/L2/L3 terminal block 15 mm, jumper module 3RK1903-0AE00 PE/N terminal block 45 mm, infeed module, with caps 3RK1903-2AA00 PE/N terminal block 45 mm, infeed and jumper module 3RK1903-2AA10 PE/N terminal block 30 mm, jumper module 3RK1903-0AJ00 PE/N terminal block 15 mm, jumper module 3RK1903-0AH00 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters B-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Description Accessories Accessories Model Order number PE/N terminal block M65-PEN-F 65 mm, infeed module, with caps 3RK1903-2AC00 PE/N terminal block M65-PEN-S 65 mm, infeed and jumper module 3RK1903-2AC10 3-phase feed-in terminal for S0 if necessary for power bus infeed for wiring: * solid or stranded: 2.5 to 25 mm2 * finely stranded with end sleeve: 2.5 to 25 mm2 * solid or stranded: 12 to 4 AWG 3RV1925-5AB Control kit manual actuation for contactors (only for DS1-x, RS1-x) (5 pcs.) 3RK1903-0CA00 Control unit for direct drive of the contactor coils of ET 200S devices (only for DS1-x, RS1-x) 3RK1903-0CG00 2DI COM control module digital 2DI COM input module for local operation of the computer interface (only for DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x) 3RK1903-0CH10 2DI LC COM control module digital 2DI LC COM input module with computer interface for manual local operation (only for DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x) 3RK1903-0CH20 LOGO! PC cable for the connection of the computer to the 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module 6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0 "Motor Starter ES" diagnostics and commissioning tool Software for diagnostics and commissioning for motor starter - Basic package, floating license - Standard package, floating license - Premium package, floating license SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3ZS1310-4CC10-0YA5 3ZS1310-5CC10-0YA5 3ZS1310-6CC10-0YA5 B-5 B.3 Components for the safety-integrated system (local safety) Description Model Order number PM-D F1 fail-safe, up to PL e DIN EN ISO 13849-1 for emergency stop 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F2 fail-safe, up to PL e, DIN EN ISO 13849-1 for autostart for protective door monitoring; 3RK1903-1BB00 PM-D F3 fail-safe, up to PL d, DIN EN ISO 13849-1 for expansion, with time delay of 0.5 to 30 s 3RK1903-1BD00 PM-D F4 fail-safe, up to PL e, DIN EN ISO 13849-1 for expansion 3RK1903-1BC00 PM-D F5 contact replicator, up to PL e, DIN EN ISO 13849-1 3RK1903-1BE00 Connection module PM-X connection unit for infeed contactor, fail-safe up to PL e (DIN EN ISO 13849-1) 3RK1903-1CB00 Terminal modules TM-PF30 S47-B1 for PM-D F1,2 for potential group, infeed U1, U2, sensor connection with terminating cover 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B0 for PM-D F1,2 for potential subgroup, sensor connection 3RK1903-1AA10 TM-PF30 S47-C1 for PM-D F3,4 for potential group, infeed U1, U2 with terminating cover 3RK1903-1AC00 TM-PF30 S47-C0 for PM-D F3,4 for potential subgroup, infeed U2 3RK1903-1AC10 TM-PF30 S47-D0 for PM-D F5 for contact replicator 3RK1903-1AD10 TM-X15 S27-01 for PM-X connection module connection unit for infeed contactor, PL d and PL e (DIN EN ISO 13849-1) 3RK1903-1AB00 Fail-safe kit 1 for DS1-x direct starter, up to Category 4 (DIN EN ISO 13849-1) * 1 auxiliary switch block * 1 contact holder with connecting lead for direct starter * 1 contact support for terminal module (feedback loop) * 1 contact support for terminal module (infeed contactor) 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 2 for RS1-x reversing starter, up to PL e, (DIN EN ISO 13849-1) * 2 auxiliary switch blocks * 1 contact holder with connecting lead for reversing starter * 1 light gray contact support for terminal module (feedback loop) * 1 dark gray contact support for terminal module (feedback loop) * 2 contact support for terminal module (infeed contactor) * 1 connecting lead 3RK1903-1CA01 Power modules Fail-safe kit SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters B-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 B.4 Components for expansion modules Description Brake control modules Terminal modules B.5 Model Order number xB1 xB3 for brake 24 VDC/4 A with 2 extra inputs 3RK1903-0CB00 3RK1903-0CE00 xB2 xB4 for brake 500 VDC/0.7 A with 2 extra inputs 3RK1903-0CC00 3RK1903-0CF00 xB5 xB6 for 400 V AC / 0.5 A brake also with 2 inputs 3RK1903-0CJ00 3RK1903-0CK00 TM-xB15 S24-01 for brake control modules xB1, xB2, xB5 3RK1903-0AG00 TM-xB215 S24-01 for brake control modules xB3, xB4, xB6 3RK1903-0AG01 Fail-safe components (PM-D F PROFIsafe, PM-D F X1) Description Model Order number Power module PM-D F PROFIsafe With overvoltage protection With diagnostics (for a description see the ET 200S Distributed I/O Device for Fail-Safe Modules manual) 3RK1903-3BA01 3RK1903-3BA02 Power/expansion module PM-D F X1 With overvoltage protection for the infeed of external emergency stop signals 3RK1903-3DA00 contact replicator F-CM With 4 safe, floating contacts 3RK1903-3CA00 Terminal modules TM-PF30 S47-F1 for PM-D F PROFIsafe For potential group, with infeed U1, SG1 to SG6, with terminating cover (for a description see ET 200S Distributed I/O Device for Fail-Safe Modules) 3RK1903-3AA00 TM-PFX30 S47-G1 for PM-D F X1 for potential group, without infeed from the ccw for U1, SG1 to SG6 with terminating cover 3RK1903-3AE00 TM-PFX30 S47-G0 for PM-D F X1 for potential group, with infeed from the ccw for U1, SG1 to SG6, 3RK1903-3AE10 TM-FCM30 S47-E0 for F-CM With throughfeed U1, SG1 to SG6, 3RK1903-3AB10 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 B-7 B.6 Manuals for ET 200S distributed I/O system Description Documentation package for the ET 200S, consisting of * Manuals, operating instructions, and product information for the "SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O Device" * Manual "SIMATIC ET 200S. Fail-safe motor starters: Safety-Integrated System * System manual SIMATIC PROFINET System Description * Programming Manual "SIMATIC PROFINET IO. From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO" Order number Only available on the Internet Manual "SIMATIC ET 200S Interface Module IM 151-7 CPU" and the S7-300 operation list Only available on the Internet Manual SIMATIC ET 200S Process-Related Functions Only available on the Internet Operating instructions "SIMATIC ET 200S Positioning" Only available on the Internet Operating instructions "SIMATIC ET 200S Serial Interface Modules" Only available on the Internet Installation and operating manual "SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O Device for Fail-Safe Modules" Only available on the Internet A table of contents for the individual manuals can be befound at the beginning of this manual under "Important Information." SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters B-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 C Dimensioned drawings Section Subject Page C.1 Motor starters C-2 C.1.1 DS1-x direct starter; standard and TM-DS45 terminal module C-2 C.1.2 DS1e-x direct starter; high feature, DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature and TM-DS65 terminal module; F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter and TM-FDS65 terminal module C-3 C.1.3 RS1-x reversing starter; standard and TM-RS90 terminal module C-4 C.1.4 RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and TM-RS130 terminal module F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter and TM-FRS130 terminal module C-5 C.2 Power modules, connection module C-6 C.2.1 PM-D power module and TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module C-6 C.2.2 Power modules PM-D F1 to 5 and terminal modules TM-PF30 S47B0/-B1/-C0/-C1/-D0; PM-D F PROFIsafe power module and TM-PF30 S47-F1 terminal module; PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47-G0/-G1; F-CM contact replicator and TM-FCM30 S47-E0 terminal module C-7 C.2.3 PM-X connection module and TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module C-8 C.3 DM-V15 spacing module C-8 C.4 Expansion modules C-9 C.4.1 Brake control module xB1 to 4 and terminal module TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 C-9 C-1 Dimensioned drawings Motor starters C.1.1 DS1-x direct starter; standard and TM-DS45 terminal module Space for heat removal C.1 DS-x1 DS-x1 Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm TM-DS45 Space for heat removal Connection zone SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters C-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Dimensioned drawings C.1.2 DS1e-x direct starter; high feature, DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature and TM-DS65 terminal module; F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter and TM-FDS65 terminal module Space for heat removal DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm LOGO! PC cable Control module TM-DS65 TM-FDS65 Space for heat removal Connection zone 2DI COM/ -2DI LC COM SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 C-3 Dimensioned drawings C.1.3 RS1-x reversing starter; standard and TM-RS90 terminal module RS-x1 Rail RS-x1 35 x 7.5/15 mm Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm TM-RS90 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters C-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Dimensioned drawings C.1.4 RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and TM-RS130 terminal module F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter and TM-FRS130 terminal module Space for heat removal RS1e-x F-RS1e-x RS1e-x F-RS1e-x Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm LOGO! PC cable Control module TM-RS130 TM-FRS130 Space for heat removal Connection zone 2DI COM/ -2DI LC COM SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 C-5 Dimensioned drawings C.2 Power modules, connection module C.2.1 PM-D power module and TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module PM-D Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm TM-P15 S27-01 Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters C-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Dimensioned drawings C.2.2 Power modules PM-D F1 to 5 and terminal modules TM-PF30 S47-B0/-B1/-C0/-C1/-D0; PM-D F PROFIsafe power module and TM-PF30 S47-F1 terminal module; PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47-G0/-G1; F-CM contact replicator and TM-FCM30 S47-E0 terminal module PM-D F1 bis 5 PM-D F PROFIsafe PM-D F X1 F-CM Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm TM-PF30 S47 TM-PFX30 TM-FCM30 Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 C-7 Dimensioned drawings C.2.3 PM-X connection module and TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module PM-X SF PM-X Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm TM-X15 S27-01 Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm C.3 DM-V15 spacing module Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters C-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Dimensioned drawings C.4 Expansion modules C.4.1 Brake control module xB1 to 4 and terminal module TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 xB1 DC24V/4A 4 8 Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm X 2 3 4 Stat 3RK19030CB00 Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 C-9 Dimensioned drawings SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters C-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 D Applications Section Subject Page D.1 Examples with brake control modules D-2 D.1.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without brake D-2 D.1.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with external power supply D-4 D.1.3 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with internal power supply D-6 D.1.4 Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve D-8 D.1.5 Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor D-10 D.2 Examples with reversible-pole motors D-12 D.2.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander winding D-12 D.2.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with 2 Dahlander windings D-14 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 D-1 Applications Safety note The following applications are used only as a suggestion of typical circuit diagrams. No liability will be accepted for the proper functioning, compliance with certification requirements, or compatibility of the examples. Use at your own risk. Caution Derating (see Section 3.4) is not taken into account in the following examples. Caution Due to the operation of star-connected three-phase motors, high EMC interference may occur. Interference above the IEC limit values can lead to an impairment of functions or failure of the electronics. In case of high EMC interference, we recommend the use of motors with EMC protection circuits. (Exception: soft starters may not be operated with a EMC protection circuit). D.1 Examples with brake control modules D.1.1 brake Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without Terminating cover xB3, 4 PM-D 8 4 IN2 Brake 21 Limit switch ccw rotation 22 6 IN1 5 L+ 2 1 L+ AUX3 AUX2 6 13 7 14 5 12 A2- 4 11 U2 U1 M L+ PLC A1+ Master 1 8 2 9 A1 IM 151 Profibus-DP TM-P15 S27-01 A1 A3 A2 RS-x1 21 Limit switch cw rotation 22 TM-xB215 S24-01 A3 Terminating module Figure D-1: Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without brake SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters D-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Order number Description 3RK1 903-0BA00 PM-D 3RK1 903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01 3RK1 301-xxB00-1AA2 RS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating 1 3RK1 903-0AC00 TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed 1 3RK1 903-0AG01 TM-xB215 S24-01terminal module for xB3, 4 brake control 1 3RK1 903-0CE00 xB3 1) 1 3RK1 903-0CF00 xB4 1) brake control 2 XXX Limit switch for brake control module 1) either xB3 or xB4 1 1 1 Number A M 3~ E E E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring N PE E A Fault A2 1L1 3L2 5L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 N PE SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A3 4 8 The components required to set up this example are as follows: Applications Figure D-1: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without brake D-3 Applications AUX2 24 V brake 8 4 IN2 6 - + 24 V DC 8 4 IN-2 6 5 L+ 5 IN+2 21 Limit switch ccw rotation 22 IN1 2 2 AUX3 A3 RS-x1 PM-D 6 13 7 14 A2- U2 A1+ 4 11 5 12 A1 1 8 2 9 L+ Master PLC U1 M IM 151 Profibus-DP TM-P15 S27-01 A1 IN-1 21 Limit switch cw rotation 22 A5 A4 A3 1 L+ xB3 TM-xB215 S24-01 A2 1 IN+1 TM-xB215 S24-01 RS-x1 xB3 Terminating module A5 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with external power supply Terminating cover D.1.2 Figure D-2: Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with external power supply SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters D-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 3RK1 903-0BA00 PM-D 3RK1 903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01 3RK1 301-xxB00-1AA2 RS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating 3RK1 903-0AC00 TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed 3RK1 903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3RK1 903-0AG01 TM-xB215 S24-01terminal module for xB3 3RK1 903-0CE00 xB3 brake control 3RK1 903-0AE00 15 mm jumper module L1,2,3 XXX Limit switch for brake control module Description N PE E A Fault A2 A 1L1 3L2 5L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 Order number E E N PE Number A3 4 8 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 1W 1V 1U E A Fault A4 M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 E A5 + zu A5 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring 2U 2V 2W A E N PE SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4 8 The components required to set up this example are as follows: - Applications Figure D-2: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with external power supply D-5 Applications 21 Limit switch ccw rotation 22 400 V brake 4 IN2 IN1 8 400 V brake 4 IN2 6 6 IN1 5 L+ 5 L+ 2 2 AUX3 A2- 4 11 A1+ U1 M 5 12 A1 6 13 7 14 AUX2 A3 Master L+ 1 8 2 9 Profibus-DP IM 151 1 L+ RS-x1 1 L+ A5 A4 A3 A2 PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 PLC U2 xB4 TM-xB215 S24-01 A1 8 21 Limit switch cw rotation 22 TM-xB215 S24-01 RS-x1 xB4 Terminating module A5 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with internal power supply Terminating cover D.1.3 Figure D-3: Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with internal power supply SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters D-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 3RK1 903-0BA00 PM-D 3RK1 903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01 3RK1 301-xxB00-1AA2 RS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating 3RK1 903-0AC00 TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed 3RK1 903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3RK1 903-0AG01 TM-xB215 S24-01terminal module for xB4 3RK1 903-0CF00 xB4 brake control 3RK1 903-0AE00 15 mm jumper module L1,2,3 XXX Limit switch for brake control module Description N PE E A Fault A2 A 1L1 3L2 5L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 Order number E E N PE Number A3 4 8 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 1W 1V 1U E A Fault A4 M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 E A5 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring 2U 2V 2W A E N PE SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4 8 The components required to set up this example are as follows: Applications Figure D-3: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with internal power supply D-7 Applications Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve PM-D A1 A3 Lifting platform configuration xB3 input 1 Limit switch, top DS-x1 IM 151 Master PLC A2 xB3 Terminating module D.1.4 xB3 input 2 Limit switch, bottom Terminating cover TM-xB215 S24-01 TM-P15 S27-01 Profibus-DP Hydraulic diagram Y1 M 3~ 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 A2 A3 E Fault L+ E A U1 M A1 1 8 2 9 6 13 7 14 AUX2 AUX3 2 IN1 6 4 8 2T1 4T2 6T3 1 L+ 5 L+ E IN2 N PE A1+ N PE A3 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring 21 Limit switch Bottom 22 4 U2 A2- M 3~ 4 11 21 Limit switch Top 22 5 12 8 Y1 The components required to set up this example are as follows: Number 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 Order number Description 3RK1 903-0BA00 PM-D 3RK1 903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01 3RK1 301-xxB00-0AA2 DS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating 3RK1 903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 3RK1 903-0AG01 TM-xB215 S24-01terminal module for xB3 3RK1 903-0CE00 xB3 brake control XXX Limit switch for brake control module XXX Valve (Y1) Figure D-4: Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters D-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Applications The diagram below illustrates the dependencies between the individual signals DS1-x: Control (process image outputs) - PLC action 1 DO 0.0 (pump motor ON) 3 8 DO 0.2 (valve open) 4 7 DS1-x: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation DI 0.1 (contactor on) xB3, xB4, xB6 Limit switch, top 5 Lifting platform at top 2 Limit switch, bottom 6 Lifting platform at bottom xB3, xB4, xB6: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation DI 0.0 (limit switch, top) DI 0.1 (limit sw., bottom) xB3, xB4, xB6: Diagnostics LED, switching output 4 LED, limit switch, top LED, limit switch, bottom Original drive signal overridden / rendered ineffective by limit switch Figure D-4: (cont.) Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve 1 Switch on the pump motor (DO 0.0) with the user program in the PLC. The switch-on command from the PLC is a drive signal for the contactor. 2 Limit position is passed, so the limit switch for lifting table at top opens. When the limit switch opens the direct (no PLC intervention) result is discontinuation of the contactor drive signal. The PLC's drive signal for the contactor is rendered ineffective (overridden by limit switch). The motor contactor is switched off. 3 The application program in the PLC cancels the switch-on command (DO 0.0). 4 The valve for lowering the lifting platform is opened (DO 0.2) by the application program in the PLC. 5 The limit switch for lifting platform at top position recloses. 6 The limit switch for lifting platform at bottom opens. The switching output for the valve is disabled. 7 The application program in the PLC cancels the switch-on command for DO 0.2. 8 See step 1 Each upward or downward action of the platform can take place individually within the limits of travel. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 D-9 Applications Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor Master PLC A4 PM-D A5 RS-x1 xB4 2DI PM-E A1 A2 A3 IM 151 Terminating module D.1.5 Terminating cover TM-P15 S27-01 TM-xB215 S24-01 Profibus-DP Lifting platform configuration xB3 input 1 Limit switch, top 2DI input 1 BERO limit switch, top 2DI input 2 BERO limit switch, bottom xB3 input 2 Limit switch, bottom Brake motor The components required to set up this example are as follows: Number Order number 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6ES7 138-4CA00-0AA0 6ES7 193-4CE00-0AA0 6ES7 131-4BB00-0AA0 6ES7 193-4CB00-0AA0 3RK1 903-0BA00 3RK1 903-0AA00 3RK1 301-xxB00-1AA2 1 1 1 2 2 3RK1 903-0AC00 3RK1 903-0AG01 3RK1 903-0CF00 XXX XXX Description PM-E DC24V TM-P15S22-01 2DI DC24V TM-E15S23-01 PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 RS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed TM-xB215 S24-01terminal module for xB4 xB4 brake control Limit switch for brake control module BERO Figure D-5: Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters D-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Applications 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 A4 A5 E Fault E A A N PE 4 8 2T1 4T2 6T3 E N PE M 3~ 24 VDC M 2 A1 6 3 7 A2 1 DI0 2 24 VDC E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring Top L+ I U1 M 1 8 2 9 A3 6 13 7 14 AUX2 AUX3 3 M 1 DI1 2 24 VDC A5 1 L+ 2 IN1 5 L+ 6 Bottom I IN2 A1+ 4 11 A2- 5 12 21 Limit switch Bottom 22 4 U2 3 M 21 Limit switch Top 22 8 400 V brake Figure D-5: (cont.) Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor At each limit position, the lifting platform is controlled by a BERO limit switch. If a limit switch fails, the position switch acts directly on the RS1-x reversing starter through the xB4 brake control module. The starter is switched off immediately and the brake is activated. This rapid shutdown acts by bypassing the PLC user program. With the position switch actuated, the starter can only be switched on in the opposite direction by the PLC. The process image of the inputs at the brake control module is also made available to the PLC. There, the operation can be adapted to the situation. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 D-11 Profibus-DP TM-PF30 S47-B1 Master Fail-safe kit 2 RS-x1 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10 Order number Description PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 1 1 PM-D F1 1 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 1 1 PM-X 1 1 TM-X15 S27-01 1 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A 1 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 1 DC connection module 1 Power switch as line protection with maximum complement 40 A 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed 2 2 3RK1903-1CA01 Fail-safe kit 2 In this typical circuit diagram, PL caccording to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met if a warning is issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system initiates a safe status condition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required. Emergency stop looped in line for supply voltage U2 (A1+ A2 ) c1) d/e PL 5 12 A2- U2 4 11 1 8 2 9 A1+ U1 M L+ A1 RS-x1 Fail-safe kit 2 A3 A5 Terminating module 13 OUT- OUT+ 2 RF2 22 1 RF1 21 A5 K1 Infeed contactor Power switch 26 28 12 22 7 K1 A2 AUX3 ON 23 14 24 17 27 EMERGENCY STOP AUX2 A1 11 21 25 6 6 13 7 14 22 Fail-safe kit 1 DS-x1 A4 K1 Q1 D.2 Examples with reversible-pole motors D.2.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander winding 2) 1) 1 1 2 1 1 12) 1 b The components required to set up this example are as follows: PLC IM 151 PM-D F1 A2 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 D-12 Terminating cover A1 Applications Figure D-6: Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander winding SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2W L3 1U 2U 1L1 3L2 5L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 1W L3 N PE E A Fault K1 A2 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 Q1 A 1V L2 2V L1 1U 2W E 2U 2W 2V 2U A Fault Fail-safe kit E2 E 22 N PE A3 M 3~ 2V L2 1U 1V 1W 1W L1 A 1V E 2T1 4T2 6T3 21 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring E A E Fault Fail-safe kit E2 N PE E 2T1 4T2 6T3 A4 N PE Fail-safe Applications Figure D-6: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander winding Warning You must ensure that there is an appropriate, software-specific interlocking with a sufficiently apportioned time delay between module A3 and A4. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 D-13 Master Profibus-DP RS-x1 Fail-safe kit 2 A2 2) 1) 1 2 3 1 1 12) 1 b 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10 Order number Description A3 A2- U2 A1+ U1 M L+ RS-x1 Fail-safe kit 2 PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 1 1 PM-D F1 1 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 1 1 PM-X 1 1 TM-X15 S27-01 1 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A 1 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 1 DC connection module 1 Power switch as line protection with maximum complement 40 A 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1 3 3 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed 2 2 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3 3 3RK1903-1CA01 Fail-safe kit 2 In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met if a warning is issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system initiates a safe status condition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required. Emergency stop looped in line for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-). c1) d/e PL The components required to set up this example are as follows: PLC IM 151 PM-D F1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 D-14 5 12 4 11 1 8 2 9 A1 13 OUT- A6 2 RF2 22 1 RF1 21 A6 K1 26 28 12 22 7 K1 A2 AUX3 ON 23 14 24 17 27 EMERGENCY STOP AUX2 A1 11 21 6 25 6 13 7 14 22 DS-x1 A5 Terminating module Fail-safe kit 1 OUT+ RS-x1 Fail-safe kit 2 A4 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Infeed contactor Power switch K1 Q1 D.2.2 Terminating cover A1 Applications Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with 2 Dahlander windings Figure D-7: Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with 2 Dahlander windings SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 E 2U 2V 3V L2 E 3V 3W 2V L2 1V L2 L1 1U A Fault Fail-safe kit E2 E 22 21 N PE A3 1W L3 A 2W L3 3U L1 2U 2T1 4T2 6T3 1W 1V 1U M 3~ E 2U 2V 2W A 3U 3V 3W E N PE Fault Fail-safe kit E2 2W L1 3U A 3W L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 A4 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring E A E Fault Fail-safe kit E2 N PE E 2T1 4T2 6T3 A5 N PE Fail-safe Applications 1L1 3L2 5L3 N PE E A Fault K1 A2 1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 Q1 A 2T1 4T2 6T3 Figure D-7: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with 2 Dahlander windings Warning You must ensure that there is an appropriate, software-specific interlocking with a sufficiently apportioned time delay between module A4 and A5. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 D-15 Applications SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters D-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Glossary 2-channel (contactor control) A two-channel contactor drive circuit is accessible when at least two release circuits are available and the primary current is disconnected redundantly. 2-channel (sensor) The emergency stop switch is polled by means of two contacts, and the results are sent separately to the evaluation unit. AUX1 Freely usable potential line carried through all modules. Only the PM-E modules have connecting terminals. AUX2 Supply for infeed contactor, connect to A1+. AUX3 Supply for infeed contactor, connect to A2-. CON See U2. Direct starter A direct starter is a -> motor starter for a single direction of rotation that switches a motor on or off directly. It consists of a circuit breaker and a contactor. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Glossary-1 Glossary Cross-circuit proof PM-D F1 Emergency stop button In the event of a short circuit between the cables of the emergency stop button, all the safety-related components of the ET 200S are switched off. The operating status of the ET 200S cannot be restored until the problem has been rectified. Fail-safe systems See fail-safe systems. Fail-safe modules ET 200S modules that can be used for safety-related operation in the ET 200S distributed I/O device. These modules have integrated safety functions. Fail-safe systems Fail-safe systems are characterized by the fact that they remain in a safe state or transfer directly into another safe state when certain failures occur. Fail-safe motor starter Fail-safe motor starters have the following characteristics: * Device designations: F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x * Usable up to 7.5 kW * Installation width:65 mm for F-DS1e-x 130 mm for RS1e-x Enabling circuit A positively driven output with redundant, monitored normally open contacts that drives other switchgear such as motor starters or infeed contactors. Load group A group of motor starters supplied by a single power bus infeed. A load group can be within a potential group or comprise parts of two potential groups. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters Glossary-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Glossary Monitored start-up At start-up, the emergency stop switch must always be closed first and the supply voltage switched on. Only then can the on switch be pressed. If the ON switch is jumpered, the PM-D F1 evaluation unit detects an error, which is indicated by a channel LED. Motor starter; high feature Motor starters; high feature have the following features: * Device designations: DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x * Usable up to 7.5 kW * Installation width:65 mm for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x 130 mm for RS1e-x Motor starter; standard Motor starters; standard have the following features: * Device designations: DS1-x, RS1-x * Usable up to 5.5 kW * Installation width:45 mm for DS1-x 90 mm for RS1-x MS (motor starter) Motor starter is the generic term for direct and reversing starters. With motor starters the start-up and direction of rotation of a motor is determined. OUT+/A positively driven output that drives other safety devices such as expansion units (PM-D F4) or a time-delayed safety combination (PM-D F3). PELV Protective Extra-Low Voltage. A DIN VDE 0100 T410 protective measure against accidental contact. Potential group A group of motor starters and/or electronic modules that are supplied by a single power module. Potential subgroup A potential subgroup exists if the auxiliary voltage U2 can be partially switched off within a potential group. PROFIenergy The PROFINET profile supports energy management systems in process plants by exporting measurements or, for example, via short-term shutdown of the overall plant in pause times via standardized PROFIenergy commands.ROFI SIMATIC - ET 200S GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Glossary-3 Glossary PWR See U1. Redundancy All the components required for a function are duplicated. In order to achieve complete redundancy in the enabling circuits in the ET 200S, two normally open contacts are connected in series in the PM-D F1 to 5 power module. If there is a failure of a normally open contact - if it is welded, for example - safe switching off is guaranteed. Reversing starters A reversing starter is a -> motor starter for two directions of rotation of a motor. It consists of a circuit breaker and two contactors. Feedback loop The operation of the actuated contactors can be monitored by monitoring the slave auxiliary contacts (normally closed contacts) of the motor starter from the PM-D F1 to 5 power module. If a contactor is welded, the emergency stop segment can no longer be started. SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage. A circuit that is designed and protected in such a way that when under normal conditions just one error occurs the following can be ensured: The voltage between any two accessible parts, one of which can either be a grounded or a conductive accessible part, does not exceed the safety extra-low voltage and no overvoltage is produced that is greater than the safety extra-low voltage. SGx SG stands for safety group. Six safety groups (SG1 to SG6) can be encoded using the corresponding terminal module of the motor starters. U1 (PWR) supply voltage for electronics. U2 (CON) supply voltage for contactor control. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters Glossary-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Index Numerics 2DI 4-9 2DI COM 1-7 2DI COM control module 1-7 2DI control module 4-9 2DI LC COM 1-7, 4-13 2DI LC COM control module 1-7, 4-13 3-phase feed-in terminal 1-3 A Actual motor current 10-6 After overload tripping 4-5 Aggregate current 6-16 Assignment of the terminal modules AUX1 Gl-1 AUX2 Gl-1 AUX3 Gl-1 Auxiliary switch block 11-25 6-2 B Brake control 12-5 Brake control module xB2 and xB4 12-21, 12-25 C Caps 1-3, 3-36, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-10, 6-11, 6-12, 6-14, 6-15 Circuit breaker 8-9, 8-46, 9-8 Coasting down time 8-36 Coding 3-17, 3-21, 3-22, 3-30 Coding (motor starter safety, local solution) 11-17 Color coding labels 6-4, 11-6, 11-13, 13-5, 13-7 CON 7-2, 11-21, Gl-1 Configuration 4-14 Configuration of an ET 200S with motor starters 3-3 Configuration options 1-13 Contact carrier 11-24 Contact holder 11-24 contactor 8-9, 8-25, 9-8, 9-25 Control kit 1-5, 4-7 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Control unit 1-5, 4-8 Cover cap of a backplane bus connector 3-3 CPU/master STOP 10-25 Cross-circuit proof Gl-2 Current flow via the power bus 6-16 Current limit 10-18, 10-22, 10-38 Current-carrying capacity 1-19, 6-14 Cyclic duration factor CD 8-37 Cyclic test of the F-CM 13-19 Cyclic test of the F-DS1e-x 8-15 Cyclic test of the F-RS1e-x 9-14 D Derating 3-6 DI input signal 4-40, 4-41, 4-44 DI, input signal 4-40, 4-41 Diagnostic options 2-12 Diagnostics 4-23 Dimensioned drawings C-1 DIN standard rail 1-2 Diodes 4-5 Direct soft starters 1-6, 8-27 Direct starter 1-4, 1-6, 8-5, 8-11, Gl-1 DM-V15 1-2, 3-10, 12-11 DM-V15 spacing module 3-9 DO output signal 4-43 DO, output signal 4-40, 4-43 DS1e-x 1-6, 8-11 DSS1e-x 1-6, 8-27 DS-x1 1-4, 8-5 E Electrical connections 3-23, 3-30 Electrical isolation 4-5 Electrical life 8-10, 8-26, 9-9, 9-26 EMC protection circuit 8-2, 9-2, 11-28, 13-23, D-2 Emergency start 10-23 Emergency stop circuit 11-25, 11-26 Enabling circuit Gl-2 Environmental conditions 5-3 ET 200S DS1e-x direct starters 1-6, 8-11 Index-1 Index ET 200S DS1-x direct starters 1-4, 8-5 ET 200S DSS1e-x direct soft starters 1-6, 8-32 ET 200S F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starters 1-8, 8-11 ET 200S F-RS1e-x fail-safe refersing starters 1-8, 9-10 ET 200S RS1e-x reversing starters 1-6, 9-10 ET 200S RS1-x reversing starters 1-4, 9-4 ET 200S manuals 1-21, 1-22 External short-circuit protection 4-4 Externally powered brake xB1, xB3 12-18 F Factory setting 10-54 Fail-safe direct starters 1-8, 8-11 Fail-safe kit (= F-Kit) 11-24 Fail-safe kit 1 1-11, 11-25 Fail-safe kit 2 1-11, 11-26 Fail-safe modules 13-1, Gl-2 Fail-safe motor starter Gl-2 Fail-safe reversing starters 1-8, 9-10 Fail-safe systems Gl-2 FB125 4-23 FC125 4-23 F-CM 1-9, 13-16 F-CM contact replicator 1-9, 13-16 F-CM module replacement 13-20 F-DS1e-x 1-8, 8-11 F-DS1e-x module change 8-19 Feedback loop 11-24, 11-25, 11-26, Gl-4 Feed-in terminal 1-3 F-RS1e-x 1-8, 9-10 F-RS1e-x module change 9-18 G General warning 4-41 Group error 4-26, 4-41 H Help 2-14 high feature 1-6, 8-11, 8-27, 8-32, 9-10 HW Config 2-13 I Idle time 10-16 IM 151 1-2 IM 151 interface module 1-2 Infeed contactor 1-11, 11-3 Input behavior 4-42 Inserting power modules 3-21 Installation measurements and clearances 3-5 Installation position 3-4 Installation rules 3-3 Installing motor starters 3-23, 3-30 Installing terminal modules 3-17 Installing the brake control module 12-30 Internally powered brake xB2 and xB4 12-21, 12-25 L L1/L2/L3 jumper module 1-3 Labelling strips 3-17, 11-17 Labelling the modules 3-17, 11-17 Latched positions 3-23, 3-30 Laying regulations for lines 13-12 Load group 1-17, 6-16, Gl-2 LOGO! PC cable 4-10 M Main circuit 8-8, 8-24, 8-45, 9-7, 9-24 Manual operation local 4-13, 4-41, 8-12, 8-32, 9-11, 10-41 Manuals 1-21, 1-22 Maximum current-carrying capacity 1-19 Monitored start-up Gl-3 Monitoring 4-23 Motor connection 6-14 Motor current 4-41 Motor Starter ES 4-9, 4-45 Motor starters 8-1, 9-1, 10-1 N Number of modules 3-3 O Operating position 3-24, 3-31 Overload tripping test 4-4 P Parameter length 1-18 Parameters of the soft starters 8-42 Parked position 3-24, 3-31 PE/N jumper module 1-3, 1-7 PE/N terminal block 6-15 PELV Gl-3 Phase firing 8-29 PM-D 1-2, 7-1 PM-D F PROFIsave 1-9 PM-D F X1 1-9, 13-9 PM-D F5 11-20 PM-D power module 7-1 PM-D F PROFIsave power module 1-9 PM-D F X1 module replacement 13-13 PM-D F X1 power/expansion module 1-9, 13-9 PM-D F1 to 5 1-10, 11-6, 11-15 PM-D F1, F2 11-18 SIMATIC - ET 200Smotor starters Index-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Index PM-D F3, F4 11-19 PM-X 1-10, 11-6, 11-23 PM-X connection module 11-23 Potential group 1-17, 11-7, Gl-3 Potential subgroup 11-7, Gl-3 Potentiometer 8-40 Power bus 6-14 Power bus infeed 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-10, 6-11, 6-12, 6-14 Power bus throughfeed 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-10, 6-11, 6-12, 6-14 Power modules PM-D F1 through 5 11-15 Preventing unauthorized persons from switching on 4-6 Process mappings 4-40 PROFIBUS-DP 4-23 Profile rails 3-4 Protection against dirt 3-36 Protection circuit 8-2, 9-2, 11-28, 13-23, D-2 PWR 7-2, 11-21, 13-22, Gl-4 R Ramp time 8-36 Rated operating current 10-10, 10-11, 10-18, 10-22, 10-25, 10-26, 10-34 Recovery time 10-5 Reducing the starting current 8-28 Reductions 8-39 Redundancy Gl-4 Removal of the motor starters 3-23, 3-30 Removing motor starters 3-25, 3-32 Reversing starters 1-4, 1-6, 4-5, 9-4, 9-10, Gl-4 Revision level 4-42 Rotary current asynchronous motors 8-27 RS1e-x 1-6, 9-10 RS-x1 1-4, 9-4 S Safety regulations 13-12 Safety relay 4-28, 4-29, 4-30, 4-31, 4-32, 4-34 Safety-related standards 11-21, 13-15, 13-22 Self-test 8-16, 9-15 SELV Gl-4 Set current Ie 4-3 Settings 8-35 SGx Gl-4 Shipping conditions 5-2 Short-circuit tripping 4-5 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 SIRIUS switchgear 8-5, 8-11, 8-32, 9-4, 9-10 Soft coasting-down function 8-35 Soft starter 8-29, 8-46 Soft starting function 8-35 Spacing module 1-2, 3-6, 12-11 Specifying the safety group 3-29 standard 1-4, 8-5, 9-4 Star starting 8-28 Start time 8-36 Starting current 8-27 Starting time 8-41 Starting torque 8-39 Starting voltage 8-36 starting voltage 8-36, 8-39 Station width 3-3, 3-4 Stop time 8-36 Storage conditions 5-2 Storage temperature 5-2 Switch-over interval 9-4 T Table of contents vii Terminal block 1-5, 6-14 Terminal modules 6-1 Terminating cover for control bus 3-36 Terminating module 1-3, 3-36 Time ramp 8-36 TM-DS45 1-4, 6-3, 6-6 TM-DS65 1-6, 6-3, 6-7 TM-FCM30 1-9, 6-3 TM-FCM30 S47 13-4 TM-FDS65 1-8, 6-3, 6-8 TM-FRS130 1-8, 6-3, 6-12 TM-P15 1-2, 6-2, 6-4 TM-PF30 1-10, 6-2, 11-6, 11-9 TM-PFX30 6-3, 13-5, 13-7 TM-PFX30 S47 13-4 TM-RS130 1-6, 6-3, 6-11 TM-RS90 1-4, 6-3, 6-10 TM-X15 1-10, 6-2, 11-6 TM-xB15 1-12, 12-3 TM-xB215 1-12, 12-3 Trip Reset 4-26 Tripping class 8-20 1-3, U U1 7-2, 11-21, 13-22, Gl-4 U2 7-2, 11-21, Gl-4 User program 4-23 V Voltage tolerance for the contactor supply 4-3 Index-3 Index X xB1 12-18 xB1 and xB3 brake control module xB1 to 4 1-12, 12-4 xB2 12-21, 12-25 xB3 12-18 xB4 12-21, 12-25 Z Zener diodes 12-18 4-5 SIMATIC - ET 200Smotor starters Index-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Sender (please complete) Name Company / Office To Siemens AG DF CP PRM IM 2 Address Phone 92220 Amberg Fax Fax: 09621 / 80-3337 SIMATIC ET 200S motor starter safety-integrated system manual Have you come across any errors in this manual? Please describe the errors on this form. We will be very grateful to you for any ideas and suggestions for improvements. SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15 SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-15